diff options
Diffstat (limited to '39009-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009-h/39009-h.htm | 7837 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009-h/images/ch1.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1603 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009-h/images/ch2.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1525 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009-h/images/ch3.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1540 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009-h/images/fch1.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1574 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009-h/images/fch2.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1598 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009-h/images/fch3.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1539 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009-h/images/i089.jpg | bin | 0 -> 8970 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 39009-h/images/i095.jpg | bin | 0 -> 6277 bytes |
9 files changed, 7837 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/39009-h/39009-h.htm b/39009-h/39009-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..58c84b3 --- /dev/null +++ b/39009-h/39009-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,7837 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" +"http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> +<head> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=utf-8" /> +<meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> +<title>The Project Gutenberg eBook of The History of the Great and Mighty Kingdom of China and the Situation Thereof. Volume 1. translated out of the Spanish by R Page. Published By The Hakluyt Society.</title> + +<style type="text/css"> + +body { + margin-left: 6em; + margin-right: 10%; +} + +h1 { + text-align: center; + font-size: 1.2em; +} + +h2 { + text-align: center; + font-size: 1.5em; +} + +p { + margin-top: .75em; + text-align: left; + margin-bottom: .75em; +} + +hr { + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; +} + hr.l15 {width: 15%;} + hr.l30 {width: 30%;} + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} + +.pagenum { + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; +} +.sidenote { + width: 5em; + float: left; + clear: left; + margin-left: -6em; + margin-top: 0; + margin-right: 6px; + border: 1px dotted black; + padding: 0 4px 0 2px; + background-color: rgb(90%,90%,90%); + + font-size: smaller; + color: #333; + text-indent: 0; + text-align: left; + line-height: 1em; +} + +.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; +} + +.footnote { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + font-size: 0.9em;} + +.footnote .label {position: absolute; right: 84%; text-align: right;} + +.fnanchor { + vertical-align: super; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: + none; +} +.p2 {margin-top: 2em;} +.p4 {margin-top: 4em;} +.p6 {margin-top: 6em;} + +.center {text-align: center;} + +.chapter {font-weight: bold; + text-align: center; + margin-top: 2em; +} +.intro {font-style: italic; + text-align: center; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; +} + +.blockquot{ + margin-left: 5%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + +.technt {background:#d0d0d0; + padding: 7px; + border:solid black 1px;} +.s09 {font-size: .9em;} +.s08 {font-size: .8em;} +.s07 {font-size: .7em;} +.s06 {font-size: .6em;} +.s05 {font-size: .5em;} +.b13 {font-size: 1.3em;} +.b20 {font-size: 2.0em;} + +.i4 {margin-left: 4em;} +.i6 {margin-left: 6em;} +.i8 {margin-left: 8em;} + +</style> +</head> + +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of The History of the Great and Mighty Kingdom +of China and the Situation Thereof, Volume , by Juan Gonzalez de Mendoza + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The History of the Great and Mighty Kingdom of China and the Situation Thereof, Volume I (of 2) + +Author: Juan Gonzalez de Mendoza + +Editor: George T. Staunton + +Translator: R. Parke + +Other: The Hakluyt Society + +Release Date: February 29, 2012 [EBook #39009] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: UTF-8 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GREAT AND MIGHTY KINGDOM OF CHINA *** + + + + +Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper, Melissa McDaniel +and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +https://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<div class="technt"> +<p class="center">Transcriber's Notes.</p> + +<p>The hyphenation and spelling of the original document have been +preserved.</p> +<p>This text includes o's with macrons ("long" mark): + ō, which require a +Unicode (UTF-8) file encoding. +If these characters do not display properly, +you may have an incompatible browser or unavailable fonts. +First, make sure that the browser's "character set" or +"file encoding" is set to Unicode (UTF-8). You may also need +to change your browser's default font.</p> +</div> + +<p class="center p6">WORKS ISSUED BY</p> +<p class="center b20"><b>The Hakluyt Society.</b></p> +<hr class="l15" /> +<h1>MENDOZA'S HISTORIE OF THE<br /> +KINGDOME OF CHINA.</h1> + +<p class="center p2">VOL. I.</p> + +<p class="center p4">NO. XIV</p> + +<p class="center p6">ORIGINALLY PUBLISHED BY THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY</p> +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="center">REPRINTED BY PERMISSION</p> + +<p class="p4"> +Published by LENOX HILL Pub. & Dist. Co. (Burt Franklin)<br /> +235 East 44th St., New York, N.Y. 10017<br /> +Originally Published: 1854<br /> +Reprinted: 1970<br /> +Printed in the U.S.A.<br /> +<br /> +S.B.N.: 8337-23618<br /> +Library of Congress Card Catalog No.: 73-141353<br /> +Burt Franklin: The Hakluyt Society First Series 14<br /></p> + +<p class="center p6 b13">THE HAKLUYT SOCIETY.</p> +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="p2 center">SIR RODERICK IMPEY MURCHISON, G.C.St.S., F.R.S., Corr. Mem. Inst +Fr.,<br /> +Hon. Mem. Imp. Acad. Sc. St Petersburg, &c., &c., <span class="smcap">President</span>.</p> + +<table summary="Society Members"> +<tr> +<td> </td> +</tr> +<tr><td><span class="smcap">The EARL OF ELLESMERE.</span></td> +<td rowspan="2"><span class="b20">}</span></td> +<td rowspan="2"><span class="smcap">Vice-Presidents.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">Capt. C. R. DRINKWATER BETHUNE, R.N., C.B.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">Rear-Admiral Sir FRANCIS BEAUFORT, K.C.B., +F.R.S.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">Captain BECHER, R.N.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">CHARLES T. BEKE, Esq.</span>, Phil. D., F.A.S.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">WILLIAM DESBOROUGH COOLEY, Esq.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">BOLTON CORNEY, Esq., M.R.S.L.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">The Right Rev. LORD BISHOP OF ST. DAVID'S.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">Rt. Hon. Sir DAVID DUNDAS.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">Sir HENRY ELLIS, K.H., F.R.S.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">JOHN FORSTER, Esq.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">R. W. GREY, Esq., M.P.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">JOHN HOLMES, Esq.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">JOHN WINTER JONES, Esq.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">Sir CHARLES LEMON, Bart., M.P., F.R.S.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">P. LEVESQUE, Esq., F.A.S.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">Sir JOHN RICHARDSON, M.D.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">The EARL SOMERS.</span></td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td><span class="smcap">Sir GEORGE T. STAUNTON, Bart. F.R.S.</span></td> +</tr> +</table> +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">R. H. MAJOR, Esq., F.R.G.S., Honorary Secretary.</span></p> + +<h2 class="p6">INTRODUCTION.</h2> +<hr class="l15" /> +<p>In presenting to the members of the Hakluyt Society a reprint of the +cotemporary English translation by Parke of Mendoza's interesting and now rare +account of China, the editor thinks it due to his readers that some explanation +should be given of the circumstances under which the original work was compiled, +and that at the same time it should be shown what previous accounts had reached +Europe respecting that remarkable country. The interest of the narrative itself, +abounding as it does with minute and curious details of the manners and customs +of so peculiar a race as the Chinese, requires no vindication: it will speak for +itself. It will nevertheless interest those who appreciate the objects of the +Society, to know, that the present translation was made at Hakluyt's own +suggestion, shortly after the appearance of Mendoza's original work in Spanish.</p> +<p>It is the leading purpose of the Hakluyt Society to deal with the Archæology +of Geography, and more especially so in connexion with the progress made by our +own English ancestors in the advancement of <span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_ii" id="Page_ii"> +[ii]</a></span> +that important science. In pursuance of that object, therefore, Mendoza's +account of China has been selected for re-publication, as being the earliest <i> +detailed</i> account of that country ever published in the English language. We +say <i>detailed</i> account, because we must not omit to mention that it was +preceded by a short but interesting document, published by Richard Eden in his <i> +History of Travayle in the West and East Indies</i>, entitled "Reportes of the +Province of China," of the history and contents of which we shall hereafter +speak in its proper place. While, however, in the selection for re-publication, +respect is paid to the earliest narratives which appeared in our own tongue, the +reader's appreciation of the subject is best secured by an introductory notice +of all the antecedent descriptions which may at intervals have appeared in other +languages. This plan is more especially desirable with respect to those earlier +glimmerings of information which Europe obtained respecting a country so removed +from the civilized world, by its geographical position and ethnological +peculiarities, as China, yet so marvellously in advance of it at the times of +which we speak, both in its intellectual and moral developments. In such notice, +meanwhile, we propose to pass by all discussion as to the much disputed question +of the position of the Thinæ of Eratosthenes, Strabo, and the Periplus of the +Erythræan Sea, or of the application of Marinus's Serica, as preserved to us by +Ptolemy, to the kingdom of China. Upon these more uncertain data we shall dwell +no longer than to state, that our own impression agrees with that of Vossius, +that China is the country referred to, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iii" id="Page_iii">[iii]</a></span> +that the Seres of Ammianus Marcellinus, corresponding as they so closely do in +character with the modern Chinese, were intended to represent that people. That +the Romans possessed some knowledge of China, would seem to be shown by a +discovery made by the learned De Guignes, of a statement in a Chinese historical +work, that in the year of our Lord 166, an embassy, said to have come by sea, +arrived from An-thon (Antoninus) to the Emperor Yan-hi; and the use of the "serica +vestis", alluded to by Horace and Propertius, would appear to confirm the +impression, provided only that silk, and not muslin, were the commodity really +alluded to.</p> + +<p>On these less certain points, however, we are, as we have said, unwilling to +dwell. We pass on therefore to the mention of more explicit and unquestionable +record. First of these is the narrative given in an Arabic manuscript, written +about the year 1173, describing the observations of two Arab merchants, who, +from the style of the documents, were evidently in China a couple of centuries +earlier. Their respective dates, indeed, are concluded to be 851 and 867. This +curious and valuable manuscript, discovered by the learned M. Eusèbe Renaudot in +the Comte de Seignelay's library, was translated by him into French, and +published at Paris in 1718. A translation appeared in English in 1733. Although +thus concealed from the acquaintance of Europeans till this comparatively recent +date, it rightly takes its place here as comprising the two earliest accounts of +China, of which we have as yet received<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_iv" id="Page_iv">[iv]</a></span> +any information. Though adulterated with some few exaggerations, and statements +manifestly fabulous, they contain so many curious particulars, which even now, +from the permanence of institutions and manners in China, may be considered as +accurate, that no doubt can be entertained of their genuineness, or of the +intelligence of the narrators.</p> +<p>The two narratives were written consecutively, one of them forming a sort of +comment or supplement to the other.</p> +<p>The country is described as extensive, but, though more populous, less +extensive than the Indies, and divided into many principalities. It is +represented as fruitful, and containing no deserts, while India is said to +contain some of great extent.</p> +<p>Tea, under the name of <i>tcha</i>, is distinctly referred to, as being +universally drunk infused in hot water, and supposed to be a cure for every +disease.</p> +<p>Porcelain is spoken of as an excellent kind of earth, of which is made a ware +as fine and transparent as glass.</p> +<p>The Chinese are described as more handsome than the Indians, and are </p> +<div class="blockquot"> + <p>"dressed +in silk both winter and summer; and this kind of dress is common to the prince, +the soldier, and to every other person, though of the lowest degree. In winter +they wear drawers, of a particular make, which fall down to their feet. Of these +they put on two, three, four, five, or more, if they can, one over another; and +are very careful to be covered quite down to their feet, because of the damps, +which are very great and much dreaded by<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_v" id="Page_v">[v]</a></span> +them. In summer they only wear a single garment of silk, or some such dress, but +have no turbans.</p> + <p>"Their common food is rice, which they often eat with a broth, like what the +Arabs make of meat or fish, which they pour upon their rice. Their kings eat +wheaten bread, and all sorts of animals, not excepting swine, and some others.</p> + <p>"They have several sort of fruits, apples, lemons, quinces, sugar-canes, +citruls, figs, grapes, cucumbers of two sorts, trees which bear meal, walnuts, +filberts, pistachios, plums, apricocks, services [cherries], and coco-nuts; but +they have no store of palms; they have only a few about some private houses.</p> + <p>"Their drink is a kind of wine made of rice; they have no other wine in the +country, nor is there any brought to them; they know not what it is, nor do they +drink of it. They have vinegar also, and a kind of comfit like what the Arabs +call Natef, and some others.</p> + <p>"They are not very nice in point of cleanliness. They eat also of dead +animals, and practice in many other things like the Magians; and, in truth, the +religion of the one and the other is much the same. The Chinese women appear +uncovered, and adorn their heads with small ivory and other combs, of which they +shall wear sometimes a score together. The men are covered with caps of a +particular make. They are very expert mechanics, but ignorant of the arts that +depend on the mathematics."</p> +</div> +<p>The knowledge of reading and writing is described as being general amongst +them, all import<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vi" id="Page_vi">[vi]</a></span>ant +transactions being put into writing. Idolatry is mentioned as very prevalent, +and a hideous and incomprehensible statement is made, of human flesh being +publicly exposed for sale in the markets. At the same time the punishment of +vice is represented as most severe, and the surveillance over individuals +extremely rigid, "for everybody in China, whether a native, an Arab, or any +other foreigner, is obliged to declare all he knows of himself, nor can he +possibly be excused for so doing". And thieves are put to death as soon as +caught.</p> +<p>Canfu (Canton) is mentioned as the seaport of China, resorted to by Arabian +shipping; and Cumdan, described as a very splendid city, supposed to be Nanking, +was the residence of the monarch.</p> +<p>Renaudot, to whom the world is indebted for rescuing this narrative from +obscurity, believes that it supplied Edrisi, the celebrated Arab geographer of +the twelfth century, with the materials for the observations on China which +occur in his <i>Geographia Nubiensis</i>; but this reproach would seem to be +unfounded, inasmuch as his details are too few and vague, to warrant the +conclusion that they were digested from the more lucid and ample account to +which we have been referring. The most observable point of information with +which Edrisi supplies us, is the fact, that the northern parts of <i>Sin</i> +had by that time been conquered by a Tartar nation, whom he calls the Baghargar +Turks. Abulfeda also, who flourished nearly two centuries later, seems to have +been equally ignorant of the existence of the two Arab<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_vii" id="Page_vii">[vii]</a></span> +travellers; for he gives, as an apology for the ignorance of the geographers of +that day respecting China, that no one had been there from whom they could +procure information.</p> +<p>The incidental reference to China by Benjamin of Tudela, a Jewish traveller +in the east, of the twelfth century, should not be omitted. It is but a +reference, but curious enough to be quoted. It is as follows:—</p> +<div class="blockquot"> + <p>"From thence (the +Island of Khandy) the passage to China is effected in forty days; this country +lies eastward, and some say that the star Orion predominates in the sea which +bounds it, and which is called Sea of Nikpha. Sometimes so violent a storm rages +in this sea, that no mariner can reach his vessel; and whenever the storm throws +a ship into this sea, it is impossible to govern it; the crew and the passengers +consume their provisions, and then die miserably. Many vessels have been lost in +this way, but people have learned how to save themselves from this fate by the +following contrivance. They take bullocks' hides along with them, and whenever +this storm arises and throws them into the Sea of Nikpha, they sew themselves up +in the hides, taking care to have a knife in their hand, and being secured +against the sea-water, they throw themselves into the ocean; here they are soon +perceived by a large eagle, called griffin, which takes them for cattle, darts +down, takes them in his gripe, and carries them upon dry land, where he deposits +his burthen on a hill or in a dale, there to consume his prey. The man, however, +now avails himself of his knife, therewith to kill the bird,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_viii" id="Page_viii">[viii]</a></span> +creeps forth from the hide, and tries to reach an inhabited country. Many people +have been saved by this stratagem."</p> +</div> +<p>The first European reference to China described by a traveller from <i> +hearsay</i>, is that given by the Minorite friar John de Plano Carpini, who, +with five other brothers of the order, in 1245 was sent by Pope Innocent IV into +the country of the Mongolians. The purpose of this mission was, if possible, to +divert these devastating conquerors from Europe, and to instigate them rather to +a war with the Turks and Saracens. At the same time they were to inculcate, as +much as might be, the Christian faith, and at all events to collect every +possible information respecting a people so little known.</p> +<p>Carpini was absent sixteen months. A copy of his narrative, formerly +belonging to Lord Lumley, is in the British Museum, and is the same which was +used by Hakluyt for his <i>Principal Navigations</i>, from which the following +extract is taken. It is after describing a battle between the Mongals and the +Chinese, whom he calls Kythayans, that he describes the latter as follows:</p> +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>"The men of Kytay are Pagans, hauing a speciall kinde of writing by +themselues, and (as it is reported) the Scriptures of the Olde and Newe +Testament. They haue also recorded in hystories the liues of their forefathers: +and they haue Eremites, and certaine houses made after the manner of our +churches, which in those dayes they greatly resorted vnto. They say that they +haue diuers saints also, and they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_ix" id="Page_ix">[ix]</a></span> +worship one God. They adore and reuerence <span class="smcap">Christ Jesvs</span> +our Lord, and beleeue the article of eternall life, but are not baptized. They +doe also honorably esteeme and reuerence our Scriptures. They loue Christians, +and bestowe much almes, and are a very courteous and gentle people. They haue no +beardes, and they agree partly with the Mongals in the disposition of their +countenance. In all occupations which men practise, there are not better +artificers in the whole worlde. Their countrey is exceeding rich in corne, wine, +golde, silke, and other commodities."</p> +</div> +<p>The first traveller, from whom accounts collected from personal experience +respecting China were received in <i>Europe</i>, was William Van Ruysbroeck, +commonly known by the name of De Rubruquis, a friar of the Minorite order, and +sometimes called William of Tripoli, from the circumstance of the narrative of +his travels having been transmitted from Tripoli to St. Louis, king of France, +at whose instance they were undertaken. The cause of his mission was a rumour, +which had spread through Europe, that the Mongolian chief, Mangu Khan, had +embraced the Christian religion; and St. Louis being then engaged in the fourth +Crusade against the Saracens, was anxious to cement an alliance with the +Tartars, who were at that time in hostility with the same power on the side of +Persia. This political purpose was enhanced by sanguine hopes that the Tartars +were even then, or likely soon to be, converted to the Christian faith. The +passage of Rubruquis was by Constantinople over the Black Sea, through the +Crimea,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_x" id="Page_x">[x]</a></span> to the +district of the city of the Caraci, in the Gobi Desert, where Mangu Khan was +then residing.</p> +<p>His first reception was not of the most hospitable kind, but nine days after +his arrival he succeeded in obtaining an imperial audience; and when Mangu Khan, +a short time after, departed for Karakorum, a city on the east side of the river +Orchon, he and his companions followed in his train. This city, of which no +traces have been found in the desert for some centuries, is mentioned by Marco +Polo, who visited it about eighteen years after Rubruquis, as having been the +first in which these Tartars ever fixed their residence, and was at that time +the capital of Mangu Khan, and the only considerable city in that part of Asia. +Rubruquis, in describing it, says: "There are two grand streets in it, one of +the Saracens, where the friars are kept and many merchants resort thither, and +one other street of the Catayans (Chinese), who are all artificers." The +explanation of this is, that the Tartars had already conquered the greater part +of northern China, then known under the name of Cathay.</p> +<p>Rubruquis and his companions, who by this time had gained considerable favour +in the eyes of the Khan, entered Karakorum with great distinction. He describes +the city itself as not equal to the village of St. Denis, near Paris, the +monastery of which he asserts was "tenne times more worth than the palace, and +more too." The place was surrounded by a mud wall, and had four gates. The +description of the palace conveys the idea of a hall,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xi" id="Page_xi">[xi]</a></span> +at one end of which was a raised seat for the Khan, on which he "sitteth above +like a god". In this city the friar found to his surprise a French goldsmith, +named Guillaume Bouchier, who is not unfrequently mentioned by early writers +under the name of William of Paris, and who had constructed a piece of +mechanism, the ingenuity of which deserves the highest praise, when the early +period at which he worked is taken into consideration. Its description is thus +given by Purchas, in a translation of the greater part of the travels of +Rubruquis, inserted in the third volume of his <i>Pilgrimes</i>.</p> +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>"Master <i>William Parisiensis</i> made him (the Khan) a great silver tree, +at the root whereof were foure silver lions, having one pipe sending forth pure +cowes milke, and the foure pipes were convayed within the tree, unto the top +thereof: whose tops spread backe again downward: and upon every one of them was +a golden serpent, whose tayles twine about the bodie of the tree. And one of +those pipes runs with wine, another with caracosmos, that is, clarified whay; +another with ball, that is, drinke made of honey; another with drinke made of +rice, called <i>teracina</i>. And every drinke hath his vessell prepared of +silver, at the foot of the tree, to receive it. Betweene those foure pipes in +the top, he made an angell holding a trumpet; and under the tree, he made an +hollow vault, wherein a man might be hid; and a pipe ascendeth through the heart +of the tree unto the angell. He first made bellowes, but they gave not wind +enough. Without the palace there is a chamber,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xii" id="Page_xii">[xii]</a></span> +wherein the drinkes are layd, and there are servants readie there to poure it +out, when they heare the angell sounding the trumpet. And the boughes of the +tree are of silver, and the leaves and peares. When therefore they want drinke, +the master butler cryeth to the angell that he sound the trumpet. Then he +hearing (who is hid in the vault) blowes the pipe strongly, which goeth to the +angell. And the angell sets his trumpet to his mouth, and the trumpet soundeth +very shrill. Then the servants hearing, which are in the chamber, every of them +poure forth their drink into their proper pipe, and the pipes poure it forth +from above, and they are received below in vessels prepared for that purpose. +Then the butlers draw them, and carry them through the palace to men and women."<a name="FNanchor_1_1" id="FNanchor_1_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_1_1" class="fnanchor">[1]</a></p> +</div> +<p>Amongst the various points of information gathered by Rubruquis respecting +the Chinese or Catayans, as they were so long called, occur the following +important items. The characteristic principle of their religious and political +creed, embodied the great truth of the existence of one supreme presiding deity, +under whom the grand khan maintained the presidency over his extensive +dominions, and resistance to that dominion consequently involved not only +treason but heinous impiety. Another curious fact, first communicated by +Rubruquis, and afterwards confirmed by Marco Polo, is that of paper currency, +which was not adopted in Europe for some centuries after, being then in general +use<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xiii" id="Page_xiii">[xiii]</a></span> in +China. To him also we are indebted for some notion of the peculiar characters +and mode of writing practised by the Chinese, who, as he says, do not write with +pens as we do, but with small brushes, such as are used by our painters, and in +one character or figure give a whole word.</p> +<p>He also speaks at length of a strong drink called Cosmos, which he describes +as follows:—</p> +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>"Their drinke, called Cosmos, which is mare's milk, is prepared after this +manner. They fasten a long line unto two posts, standing firmly in the ground, +and unto the same line they tye the young foales of those mares which they meane +to milke. Then come the dammes to stand by their foales, gently suffering +themselves to be milked. And if any of them be too unruly, then one takes her +foale and puts it under her, letting it sucke a while, and presently carrying it +away againe, there comes another man to milke the said mare. And having gotten a +good quantitie of this milke together (being as sweet as cowes milke) while it +is new, they powre it into a great bladder or bag, and they beat the said bag +with a piece of wood made for the purpose, having a club at the lower end like a +mans head, which is hollow within: and soone as they beat upon it, it begins to +boyle like new wine, and to be sowre and sharpe of taste, and they beat it in +that manner till butter come thereof. Then taste they thereof, and being +indifferently sharpe they drinke it; for it biteth a mans tongue like the wine +of raspes when it is drunke. After a man hath taken a draught thereof, it +leaveth behind it a taste like<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xiv" id="Page_xiv">[xiv]</a></span> +the taste of almond-milke, and goeth downe very pleasantly, intoxicating weake +braynes. Likewise Karacosmos, that is to say, blacke Kosmos, for great lords to +drinke, they make on this manner. First, they beat the said milke so long till +the thickest part thereof descend right downe to the bottome like the lees of +white wine; and that which is thinne and pure remaineth above, being like unto +whay or white must. The said lees and dregs being very white, are given to +servants, and will cause them to sleepe exceedingly. That which is thinne and +cleere their masters drinke, and in very deede it is maruellous sweet and +wholesome liquor."<a name="FNanchor_2_2" id="FNanchor_2_2"></a><a href="#Footnote_2_2" class="fnanchor">[2]</a></p> +</div> +<p>This limited stock of information, however, valuable as it is from the +priority of its date, sinks into insignificance before the detailed and almost +cotemporaneous narrative of that once reviled but now much honoured pioneer of +geographical investigation, Marco Polo. In the present advanced age, when +enlarged facilities have opened up to the knowledge of the world the +characteristic peculiarities of remote countries and their inhabitants, we can +do justice to the courage and fidelity of those who, six centuries ago, could +dare to describe such apparent anomalies, while at the same time we can find an +excuse for the disbelief of those who regarded them as extravagant and impudent +fictions. Nor can we, indeed, conceive of any country and people, the +description of which, unconfirmed by the repeated observation of many, was more +calculated to excite suspicion and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xv" id="Page_xv">[xv]</a></span> +disbelief, while those very peculiarities, now that they are authenticated, +become the staple proof of the trustworthiness of the early narrator. The father +and uncle of Marco Polo, natives of Venice, had in 1254 made a trading journey +to Tartary; the exploration of the east, and the importation of its rich and +beautiful productions, offering a peculiar attraction to the commercial +enterprise of that great and flourishing city. Marco was not born till some +months after the departure of his father, but by the time of the return of the +two brothers was become a young man, fifteen years having been devoted to their +interesting and extraordinary peregrinations. They had crossed the Euxine Sea to +Armenia, whence they travelled by land to the court of a great Tartarian chief +named Barba. By him they were favorably received, and were enabled to effect +advantageous sales of their merchandise. After a year, however, spent in his +capital, a war broke out between him and a neighbouring chieftain, and the +return of the travellers to Europe being thus intercepted, they took a +circuitous course round the head of the Caspian, and so through the desert of +Karak to Bokhara.</p> +<p>After an abode there of three years, during which they obtained a knowledge +of the Tartar language, they attached themselves to the company of an ambassador +going to the court of Kublai, grand Khan of the Tartars, where they arrived +after a year's journey. This potent monarch gave them a gracious reception, and +was curious in his enquiries concerning the affairs of Europe and the Christian +religion.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xvi" id="Page_xvi">[xvi]</a></span> +Learning from them that the Pope was the person regarded with the greatest +veneration in Europe, he resolved on despatching them as his ambassadors to His +Holiness, with the request that he would send persons to instruct his people in +the true faith. Protected by his signet they set out, and pursuing their journey +across Asia, arrived in Venice in the year 1269. At this time there was a +vacancy in the popedom, and the brothers remained in Venice two years before it +was filled. At length, on the accession of Gregory X, they obtained letters from +him, accompanied with presents to Kublai Khan, and taking with them young Marco, +now seventeen years of age, and accompanied by two friars of the order of +Preachers, they again departed for the east. They landed at a port in Armenia +named Giuzza (Ayas), but finding that the Sultan of Babylon was at war with the +province, the two friars became intimidated and returned home. The three +Venetians, however, pursued their way, and after travelling for three years and +a half across Asia, and encountering numerous perils and disasters, at length +reached the court of Kublai. He was greatly pleased at their return, and Marco, +becoming a great favourite with him, was employed by the Khan in various +important missions to distant provinces. After a residence of seventeen years at +the court of Kublai, the three Venetians were extremely desirous of returning to +their native land, and at length obtained permission to accompany the +ambassadors of a king of India, who had come to demand a princess of the Khan's +family in marriage<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xvii" id="Page_xvii">[xvii]</a></span> +for their sovereign. It was a voyage of a year and a half through the Indian +seas before they arrived at the court of this king, named Argon. Thence they +travelled to Constantinople, and finally reached Venice in 1295.</p> +<p>Such is the narrative of the travels and foreign residence of the three +Polos, as related by Marco. They returned rich in jewels and valuable effects, +after an absence of twenty-four years, which had so altered them, that nothing +less than a display of their wealth was necessary to procure their recognition +by their kindred. Hence, Marco gained the name of Il Millione, the house in +which he had lived in Venice being still known in the time of Ramusio under the +name of "<i>La Corte del Millioni.</i>" Not long afterwards, news came to +Venice that the Genoese were approaching with a powerful armament, and a number +of galleys were immediately fitted out to oppose them, and Marco Polo was made <i> +sopracomito</i> of one of them. In an engagement that ensued he fell into the +hands of the Genoese Admiral Lampa Doria, and was carried prisoner to Genoa, to +which circumstance we owe the advantage of possessing a permanent record of his +travels. Then he spent four years in prison; but the interest excited amongst +the Genoese nobles by the stirring narrative of his adventures, led them to urge +him to allow an account of his travels to be drawn up from his notes and +dictation. His narrative was thus taken from his mouth in his prison at Genoa, +by the hand of his friend and fellow-traveller Rustichello, a native of Pisa. He<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xviii" id="Page_xviii">[xviii]</a></span> +afterwards regained his liberty, but of his subsequent history little or nothing +is known.</p> +<p>The most interesting portion of his narrative is unquestionably that which +refers to China, of which he speaks under the names of Kataia and Manji; the +former, as we have already stated, denoting the northern, and the latter the +southern part of the empire. The northern kingdom of Kataia contained the +residence of Kublai Khan, while the south, although subjugated, had not been +completely incorporated into the almost boundless Tartar dominion, which had +been established by Kublai's victorious ancestor, the renowned Zenghis Khan.</p> +<p>The route by which Polo entered China was along the northern frontier, and is +thus referred to by Mr. Marsden:—"Having reached the borders of Northern China, +and spoken of two places (Succuir, the modern Sucheu, and Kampion, the modern +Kancheu) that are within what is named the Great Wall, our author ceases to +pursue a direct route, and proceeds to the account of places lying to the north +and south, some of them in the vicinity and others in distant parts of Tartary, +according to the information he had acquired of them on various occasions. Nor +does he in the sequel furnish any distinct idea of the line he took upon +entering China, in company with his father and uncle, on their journey to the +emperor's court, although there is reason to believe that he went from Kan-cheu +to Sining, and there fell into the great road from Thibet to Peking." Before +reaching the latter city, however, they visited Karakorum, already<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xix" id="Page_xix">[xix]</a></span> +referred to as the capital of the Khan's dominions visited by Rubruquis. This +city, Mr. Marsden says, was built by Oktar Khan, the son and successor of +Jenghis Khan, about the year 1235, whose nephew Mangu Khan, made it his +principal residence. No traces of it have been in existence for some centuries, +but its position is noted in the Jesuits' and Danville's maps. J. Reinhold +Forster, however, on the authority of Fischer's <i>History of Siberia</i>, +observes, that it must be looked for on the east side of the river Orchon, and +not on the Onghin or Onguimuren, where D'Anville has placed it.</p> +<p>From the length of time which had elapsed since Nicolo and Maffeo Polo had +left China as Kublai's ambassadors, they were forgotten, but as soon as the +Khan, who was then absent, heard of their arrival at Karakorum, he issued orders +that they should be received with all honour and escorted to his presence. The +appearance of young Marco produced a highly favourable impression upon the Khan, +who immediately took him under his especial protection. The assiduity of Marco +in studying the language and manners of the Tartars, and the wisdom and prudence +which he exhibited in the exercise of the various important functions in which +he was employed by the Khan, caused him rapidly to rise in the estimation and +favour of that liberal-minded monarch. Upon the removal of the Khan to Khambalu, +a corruption of Khambalig (capital of the Khan), and understood to be the modern +Pekin, Marco followed in his train. This city was found to surpass in splendour<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xx" id="Page_xx">[xx]</a></span> +everything that he had yet met with. The dimensions of the palace comprehended a +square, each side of which was six miles long, a statement not very widely +different from the truth. This enclosure, however, comprised all the royal +armouries, as well as fields and meadows, stored with various descriptions of +game. The roofs of the spacious halls were covered with gorgeous gilding, and +painting in brilliant colours, while representations of dragons and battles were +carved upon the sides. To the north of the palace stood an eminence called the +Green Mountain, of about a mile in circuit, covered with the finest trees which +could be collected from all parts of the empire, and which had been brought by +elephants to this spot.</p> +<p>This account strikingly agrees with those of modern travellers, and the +description of the internal government of the country, its postal arrangements, +and the beneficent distribution of grain from the imperial granaries in times of +scarcity, agree with since recognized Chinese history.</p> +<p>Marco subsequently made an excursion into the country of Manji, or Southern +China, his route lying by the course of the imperial canal. In his southward +progress, after passing by various cities, he at length reached Tinqui +(Taitcheou), distant about three days' journey from the sea, where there is an +extensive manufactory of salt, an article which forms a leading article of +commerce in China. He next came to Yanqui (Yangtcheoufou), at the mouth of the +river Yang-tsi-kiang, the seat of a viceroy, in which Polo<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxi" id="Page_xxi">[xxi]</a></span> +himself exercised for the space of three years the supreme jurisdiction. His +subsequent route lay along the banks of the Yang-tsi-kiang, and he incidentally +alludes to the noble city of Nanghin (Nanking), where he speaks of the +manufacture of cloths of gold and silver, but does not seem to have visited the +city itself. Taking thence a southward course, he reached Quinsai (Hang-cheou), +or the city of heaven, the splendour of which still important place was at that +time such, that he speaks of it in the following terms: "In the world there is +not the like, nor a place in which there are found so many pleasures, that a man +would imagine himself in paradise." This city, then the metropolis of Manji, was +in the height of its glory, and may well be supposed to have surpassed in +grandeur any city which Polo had seen; and if he is to be charged with +exaggeration in describing it as one hundred miles in circumference, and to have +contained one million six hundred thousand houses, and twelve thousand bridges, +it must be remembered that its really immense extent was calculated to mislead +the judgment of an observer, and to make him credulous of the accounts of the +inhabitants. It is still a splendid and very extensive city, and it is not to be +wondered at that Polo, who witnessed its unfaded glories, should have dwelt with +enthusiasm on its spacious and beautiful palaces, and its waters covered with +richly decorated barges. The character of the inhabitants he describes as +effeminate, luxurious, and unwarlike.</p> +<p>In his southward journey Polo mentions many<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxii" id="Page_xxii">[xxii]</a></span> +great cities in Manji, which it would be difficult to identify with their modern +nomenclature. Among these Unguen, a city of the province of Fokien, is referred +to, as remarkable for its extensive manufacture of sugar, sent from thence to +Khambalu; its natives being described as skilled in the art of refining it with +wood ashes, from persons belonging to Babylonia (Egypt). It is also worthy of +notice, that his embarcation took place at a famous port called Zaitun, which +was much frequented by ships with rich cargoes from India for the supply of +Manji and Kataia, and exceedingly productive in revenue to the grand Khan, who +received ten per cent. on all merchandise. In spite of this impost, and the +heavy freights, amounting to nearly fifty per cent., the merchants are described +as making enormous profits.</p> +<p>The inhabitants of the place are represented as distinguished for their skill +in embroidery and tapestry. This has been supposed to mean Fou-cheou-fu, Amoy, +or some neighbouring port in Fokien; but it is difficult to reconcile this with +the statement that one arm of the river on which this city stood reached to +Quinsay, which, as we have already stated, appears to be intended for the +great city of Hang-cheou.</p> +<p>The next in rotation on our list of eastern travellers, is Giovanni di Monte +Corvino, a Franciscan monk of Calabria, who went as ambassador from Pope +Nicholas IV in 1288 to the grand Khan, and died in Khambalu, that is, Pekin, +holding the distinguished position of archbishop of the missions in that city. +His letters refer to little more than the progress<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxiii" id="Page_xxiii">[xxiii]</a></span> +he made in the advancement of the Roman Catholic religion in that capital.</p> +<p>The next traveller in China of whom we have to speak is Oderico Mattheussi, a +Minorite friar, more commonly known under the name of Oderico de Pordenone, from +Pordenone in Friuli, in which place he was born about the year 1285. He +undertook a journey in 1317, accompanied by several other monks, through +Tartary, by Trebizond, to China, and returned by Thibet to Europe. In 1330, a +year before his death, he dictated in Padua, to Guglielmo di Solagno, a monk, an +account of his travels as they occurred to his memory, in the Italian language. +An English translation is given by Hakluyt in his second volume, from which we +quote the following extracts.</p> +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>"Travelling more eastward, I came vnto a city named Fuco, which conteineth 20 +miles in circuit, wherein be exceeding great and faire cocks, and al their hens +are as white as the very snow, having wol in stead of feathers, like vnto sheep. +It is a most stately and beautiful city, and standeth vpon the sea. Then I went +18 daies iourney on further, and passed by many prouinces and cities, and in the +way I went ouer a certain great mountaine, vpon y<sup>e</sup> one side whereof I +beheld al liuing creatures to be as black as a cole, and the men and women on +that side differed somewhat in maner of liuing fro' others: howbeit, on the +other side of the said hil euery liuing thing was snow-white, and the +inhabitants in their maner of liuing were altogether vnlike vnto others. There, +all maried women cary, in token that they haue<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxiv" id="Page_xxiv">[xxiv]</a></span> +husbands, a great trunke of horne vpon their heads. From thence I traueiled 18 +dayes journey further, and came vnto a certaine great riuer, and entered also +into a city, whereunto belongeth a mighty bridge to passe the said river. And +mine hoste with whom I soiourned, being desirous to shew me some sport, said +vnto me: 'Sir, if you will see any fish taken, goe with me.' Then he led me vnto +the foresaid bridge, carying in his armes with him certaine diue-doppers or +water-foules, bound vnto a company of poles, and about every one of their necks +he tied a thread, least they should eat the fish as fast as they tooke them: and +he caried 3 great baskets with him also: then loosed he the diue-doppers from +the poles, which presently went into the water, and within lesse then the space +of one houre, caught as many fishes as filled 3 baskets: which being full, mine +hoste vntyed the threads from about their neckes, and entering a second time +into the river they fed themselues with fish, and being satisfied they returned +and suffered themselues to be bound vnto the saide poles as they were before. +And when I did eate of those fishes, methought they were exceeding good.</p> +<p>"Trauailing thence many dayes iourneys, at length I arriued at another city +called Canasia [Quinsay, or Hang-cheou], which signifieth in our language the +city of heaven. Neuer in all my life did I see so great a citie; for it +continueth in circuit an hundreth miles: neither saw I any plot thereof, which +was not thoroughly inhabited: yea, I sawe many houses of tenne or twelue stories +high, one above another. It<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxv" id="Page_xxv">[xxv]</a></span> +hath mightie large suburbs, containing more people then the citie it selfe. Also +it hath twelue principall gates: and about the distance of eight miles, in the +high way vnto every one of the saide gates, standeth a city as big by estimation +as Venice and Padua. The foresaid city of Canasia is situated in waters and +marshes, which alwayes stand still, neither ebbing nor flowing: howbeit it hath +a defence for the winde like vnto Venice. In this citie there are mo then 10,002 +bridges, many whereof I remembered and passed over them: and vpon euery of those +bridges stand certaine watchmen of the citie, keeping continuall watch and ward +about the said city, for the great Can the emperour of Catay.</p> +<p>"The number of his owne followers, of his wives attendants, and of the traine +of his first begotten sonne and heire apparent, would seeme incredible vnto any +man, vnlesse hee had seene it with his owne eyes. The foresayd great Can hath +deuided his empire into twelue partes or prouinces, and one of the sayd +prouinces hath two thousand great cities within the precincts thereof. Whereupon +his empire is of that length and breadth, that vnto whatsoeuer part thereof he +intendeth his iourney, he hath space enough for six moneths continual progresse, +except his islands, which are at the least 5,000.</p> +<p>"The foresayd emperor (to the end that trauailers may haue all things +necessary throughout his whole empire) hath caused certaine innes to be prouided +in sundry places upon the high wayes, where all things pertaining vnto victuals +are in a continuall readinesse.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxvi" id="Page_xxvi">[xxvi]</a></span> +And when any alteration or newes happens in any part of his empire, if he chance +to be farre absent from that part, his ambassadors vpon horses or dromedaries +ride post vnto him; and when themselues and their beasts are weary, they blow +their horne; at the noise whereof, the next inne likewise prouideth a horse and +a man, who takes the letter of him that is weary, and runneth vnto another inne: +and so by diuers innes, and diuers postes, the report, which ordinarily could +skarce come in 30 dayes, is in one naturall day brought vnto the emperor: and +therefore no matter of any moment can be done in his empire, but straightway he +hath intelligence thereof."</p> +</div> +<p>The next traveller of whom we have to make a short mention, is the celebrated +Arabian author Ibn Batuta, the date of whose journey is 1324. His point of +arrival in China was Zaitun, the port already mentioned of Marco Polo's +embarcation. Its identity is not easy of recognition. From this port he would +seem to have travelled to Hang-cheou and back again, embarking again at Zaitun. +Although his route is not distinctly traceable, the account he gives of the +country appears very accurate. He particularizes the facility and safety of +travelling, and the convenient, but at the same time rigid surveillance of the +hostelries, in which a register was kept of all strangers who lodged in them. +Silkworms and silk are mentioned, but the latter as being inferior in value to +cotton. The paper money and the manufacture of porcelain are also referred to.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxvii" id="Page_xxvii">[xxvii]</a></span></p> +<p>In pursuance of our chronological arrangement of travels in China, we shall +here introduce the account of an embassy, though not European, sent by Mirza +Shah Rokh, one of the sons of Tamerlane, to Cathay, in the year 1419. The +ambassadors set out from Herat in Persia, about the month of November in that +year, and reached a spot in the desert within twelve stages of Sekju (Sucheu), +near the great wall in Shensi, on the 14th of June 1420. At this place they were +met, by order of the khan, by some Cathayans, who erected tents or huts for +their accommodation in the desert, and plentifully supplied them with roasted +geese, fowls, and various kinds of meat, fruits, etc., which were served to them +on china dishes; they likewise regaled them with a variety of strong liquors, +together with a pot of Chinese tea. The chief person in the embassy was the Emir +Sadi Khoja; and, according to the list of the names of the ambassadors and the +number of their retinue, taken down by some Cathayan secretaries, the entire +embassy, including merchants, amounted to eight hundred and sixty persons. In +taking this list, the Cathayan officers earnestly desired that the exact number +should be stated, as a want of truthfulness would involve them in discredit. Two +days after their arrival, they were invited to the encampment of the dankji or +governor of the borders of Cathay, by whom they were entertained with a +magnificent feast. On reaching the spot, they found a square space of ground +enclosed with tents, in the centre of which was a lofty awning of cloth +supported on wooden<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxviii" id="Page_xxviii">[xxviii]</a></span> +pillars, with an imperial canopy of state at one end, where the throne was +placed, as if for the emperor, with other seats on each side: on the left of +this throne were placed the ambassadors, and on the right the Cathayan officers. +Each ambassador had placed before him two tables, the one covered with a variety +of meats and fruits, the other with cakes and bread, gracefully ornamented with +silk and paper. The other persons present had but one table apiece. At the lower +end of the tent stood a sideboard covered with silver and china. After the +banquet they were entertained with music and a comedy, in which the actors wore +masks representing the faces of animals: among these a child, enclosed in the +body of an artificial stork, amused them by performing a variety of curious +antics. On the next day they reached a karawl, a strongly fortified outpost, +built in a defile in the mountains, through which all travellers that way must +unavoidably go. Here their retinue was again carefully numbered. They next +arrived at Sucheu, a large and strong square city, where they had lodgings +appointed to them in a public building over the city gates, and were amply +provided with every convenience and comfort for themselves and their horses, +even the servants having mattresses and counterpanes allowed them for their +beds.</p> +<p>They next came to a city called Khamchu, after which we find them crossing +the river Karamoran by a bridge of boats, and arriving at a magnificent city +containing many splendid temples. From the beauty<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxix" id="Page_xxix">[xxix]</a></span> +of the women, who, contrary to usual Chinese observances, were seen standing at +the doors of the taverns, they designated this town in the Persian language, +Rhosnabad, the city of Beauty. After passing several rivers they reached +Sedinfur, a large city, in which they saw a cast image of gilt metal of immense +proportions, having a great number of hands with an eye in each. This image +rested on a pedestal of polished stone, and was surrounded by six tiers of +balustrades.</p> +<p>In December 1420, after a journey of ninety-five days, they reached Kambalu +or Pekin, the whole road thither from Sucheu being through so populous a country +that they lodged every night in a large town. Workmen were at that time still +occupied in building the walls of Kambalu. Immediately on their arrival they +were conducted to the palace, and, though before sunrise, they found a multitude +assembled in the outer court, amounting apparently to no less than one hundred +thousand men. At sunrise, at beat of drum, the prince took his seat on a lofty +throne, placed under a canopy at the outside of the palace, and amidst profound +silence a number of criminals were led in, who had been brought to the capital +from all parts of the empire. Each man had a board fastened to his neck, +specifying his crime and his legal punishment, and was led by the hair to the +emperor, who after inspecting the board pronounced sentence. Upon the dismissal +of the criminals, the Persian ambassadors were introduced, and after prostrating +themselves as demanded, were graciously received by the emperor. An amusing +occurrence, however, had nearly destroyed all their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxx" id="Page_xxx">[xxx]</a></span> +prospects of success. The monarch having been slightly injured by a fall from a +horse which had been presented to him by the ambassadors, was so exasperated, +that he condemned them all to imprisonment for life in a distant part of the +empire. He afterwards, however, thought better of his resolution, and merely +upbraiding Sadi Khoja, with the taunt that such a horse ought not to be +presented by one sovereign to another, overlooked the offence; and on hearing +that the animal was sent to him by Tamerlane as an especial favourite, his anger +was entirely appeased.</p> +<p>Previous to their departure, a circumstance occurred which threw a gloom over +the imperial court,—the most beloved of the emperor's wives died. And here, <i> +par parenthèse</i>, we would mention a curious custom recorded in this +narrative, respecting the burial of ladies belonging to the imperial family: +they are interred on a certain mountain, on which all the horses belonging to +them are turned out to graze at liberty for the rest of their lives; all the +maidens of their retinue also are placed in attendance on the grave, and have +provisions allowed them for about five years, and when these are exhausted they +are left to die of famine. In addition to this loss of his favourite wife, the +new palace of the emperor was struck by lightning on the night after the +funeral, the flames causing fearful devastation and loss of life. These +afflictions so affected the emperor, that he fell sick, and the prince his son +assuming the reins of government, gave the ambassadors their audience of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxxi" id="Page_xxxi">[xxxi]</a></span> +leave. On their return through Cathay they were furnished as before with every +necessary, and at Sucheu, some articles which had been detained were honourably +restored to them. They took their departure by a circuitous route, in +consequence of intestine commotions, and passing through Khoten and Cashgar +proceeded homewards to Herat, which they reached in September 1422.</p> +<p>Hitherto we have had to treat of travellers who in the middle ages reached +China by an overland journey; we have now to allude to those who have visited +that country by sea, subsequent to that grand achievement of the Portuguese, the +discovery of the passage by the Cape of Good Hope.</p> +<p>The Portuguese themselves were, as might be expected, the first to take +advantage of this expeditious route, and about the same time that they had +succeeded in establishing a communication with the King of Siam they aimed at +forming relations with China. On gaining information of the boundless wealth of +the east and its empires in the productions of nature and art, King Manoel +determined on despatching a squadron farther eastward to Bengal and China. This +squadron, consisting of eight sail, the commander of which was Fernando Peres +d'Andrade, selected on account of the ability he had shown previously in India, +especially at Malacca, departed, after various unsuccessful cruises, from +Malacca on the 17th June 1517, and arrived on the 15th August at the Island of +Tamang (called by the Portuguese Beniaga), lying three miles from the mainland, +where<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxxii" id="Page_xxxii">[xxxii]</a></span> +all foreign ships that trade to Canton must lie at anchor and transact their +business.<a name="FNanchor_3_3" id="FNanchor_3_3"></a><a href="#Footnote_3_3" class="fnanchor">[3]</a> +In the harbour Andrade found Edward Coelho, who, in a previous expedition, had +been separated from him by a storm, had wintered at Siam, and had already been +there a month. Andrade caused it to be notified to the commander of the Chinese +fleet, which was stationed off the coast there for the protection of merchant +ships against pirates, that he was come on a peaceful embassy from the King of +Portugal to the Emperor of China. The commander bade him welcome, but referred +him to the Pio (great admiral) at Nanto upon the subject of his business. After +various delays and difficulties, occasioned by the numerous gradations of rank +amongst the Chinese authorities, their ceremoniousness, and the mistrust, +imperfectly veiled by civility, of the Chinese towards strangers, Andrade +reached Canton at the close of September, and ran into the harbour with all the +usual nautical ceremonies. When surprise was expressed at this, he justified +himself by referring to the practice of the Chinese in this particular when +their ships came to Portuguese Malacca. He then begged that he might forward to +the emperor the ambassador and the presents which he had brought with him, and +that the Portuguese fleet might be dismissed as soon as possible. He was +answered civilly, that they would receive the ambassador, and as soon as +permission was obtained from the emperor, would escort him to court. Meanwhile +the commander had permission<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxxiii" id="Page_xxxiii">[xxxiii]</a></span> +to carry on trade in the town, after the ambassador had landed. Andrade now +caused the ambassador, Thomas Pires, with seven Portuguese, richly dressed, to +be put on shore with sound of trumpets and discharge of cannon. This Tomas +Pires, erroneously called by Mendoza, Bartholomew, though a man of no rank, had +been selected for this mission on account of his scientific qualifications, his +tact, and experience. He was an apothecary by profession, and a practised and +competent judge of the merchandize and productions of India. They not only +granted him one of the best houses in the town, wherein he and his companions +received visits from the most distinguished inhabitants, but also offered them +maintenance, according to the custom observed with ambassadors. This, however, +the commander declined, nor did he accept the invitation to come on shore, but, +excusing himself, sent the factor with some assistants in his stead, and when a +warehouse was granted them near the fleet, allowed the merchandize to be landed +by degrees, and an interchange of traffic commenced.</p> +<p>Matters were in this prosperous condition, when circumstances rendered it +necessary for the commander to leave Canton. Many of his people had become sick +from malaria, and nine, including the factor, were dead. These and other +disasters compelled Andrade to take leave of the Chinese commanders, and he went +back to the island of Tamang, where he was plentifully supplied with all that he +required for the repair of his ships. Before his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxxiv" id="Page_xxxiv">[xxxiv]</a></span> +departure Andrade caused proclamation to be made in Canton, Nanto, and the +harbour of Tamang, that those who had demands on the Portuguese, should apply to +him in order that they might be fully satisfied. This proceeding gave the +Chinese a high opinion of the integrity of the Portuguese. At the end of +September 1518, Fernando Peres d'Andrade again set saile with his whole fleet, +and entered the harbour of Malacca loaded with renown and riches.<a name="FNanchor_4_4" id="FNanchor_4_4"></a><a href="#Footnote_4_4" class="fnanchor">[4]</a></p> +<p>At his departure from Canton, he left the affairs of the Portuguese so +arranged that their trade with the Chinese might be carried on securely and +peacefully, and with profit to both parties. His brother, Simon d'Andrade, +received from the king a commission to make another voyage to China, and +departed in April 1518 from Malacca. Upon his arrival in August in the harbour +of Tamu, he found that the Portuguese ambassador, Thomas Pires, had not yet left +Canton, as, in spite of three applications, no order had yet been received from +the court to escort him thither. At length the order came, and Pires went in the +beginning of January 1520 by water as far as the mountain range Malenschwang, +thence to Nankin, where the emperor was, who ordered him to Pekin, where he +himself usually resided on account of the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxxv" id="Page_xxxv">[xxxv]</a></span> +nearness of the Tartars, with whom he was continually at war. In January 1521, +the emperor came there, and immediately dismissed the embassy. He had received +unfavourable accounts of the Portuguese from the authorities at Canton and +Nankin, whom the King of Bintang had influenced by an emissary; they told the +emperor that, under the pretext of trading, the Portuguese explored the country +with the view of taking it by force of arms, and that in this way they had made +themselves masters of India and Malacca. Pires therefore was admitted no more +into the palace. Meanwhile the emperor fell ill and died, and the counsellors of +his successor were of opinion that Pires and all his companions should be put to +death as spies. The emperor however ordered the ambassador, real or pretended, +to be sent back to Canton with the presents, and to be kept in custody there +until answer should be received from the Portuguese authorities at Malacca. +Until then no Portuguese or Portuguese merchandise was to be admitted into the +empire. The emperor further commanded that the king of Malacca, who was an ally +of the emperor, and who had been driven out by the Portuguese, should be +restored.</p> +<p>The severe conditions imposed upon the Portuguese by the emperor are not to +be wondered at, for all the accounts which he had received from his authorities +respecting them were prejudicial, and Simon d'Andrade himself gave frequent +occasion for complaint by inconsiderate or unjust regulations, contrary both to +the laws and to the received<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxxvi" id="Page_xxxvi">[xxxvi]</a></span> +opinions of the country, and provoked the Chinese against the Portuguese; and +even his personal behaviour seems to have been calculated to provoke animosity.<a name="FNanchor_5_5" id="FNanchor_5_5"></a><a href="#Footnote_5_5" class="fnanchor">[5]</a> +At last a hot encounter took place between the Portuguese and Chinese ships, +during which, fortunately for the Portuguese, a storm arose, which scattered the +Chinese fleet and favoured the flight of the Portuguese, so that they happily +reached Malacca at the end of October.</p> +<p>Thomas Pires meanwhile was, upon his arrival in Canton, thrown into prison +with all his companions, and died in chains; the presents which he had brought +with him were stolen. The letters, which two or three years afterwards arrived +from the prisoners, contained lamentable descriptions of the oppressions they +had to endure, and of the robberies which were committed in foreign ships, upon +the pretence that they had Portuguese on board. The great stores of valuable +merchandize, gold and silver from India, were entirely lost. Mendoza does not +complete the tale of Pires's adventures, but some interesting details are given +by Remusat in his <i>Nouveaux Mélanges Asiatiques</i>, page 205, tom. ii.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxxvii" id="Page_xxxvii">[xxxvii]</a></span></p> +<p>The next Portuguese adventurer who comes within the range of our special +notice, is Ferdinand Mendez Pinto, who from the apparent extravagance of his +accounts became proverbial as an accomplished romancer. Congreve, in his <i> +Love for Love</i>, makes Foresight thus address Sir Sampson Legend: "Ferdinand +Mendez Pinto was but a type of thee, thou liar of the first magnitude." Like +most of his predecessors, however, in early travel, he has by this time +recovered much of his forfeited reputation, and, as in their case, some of his +most remarkable statements have been confirmed by more recent explorations. +Being compelled to leave his country from some accident, which he describes as +casting "him into manifest peril of his life", he took to the sea. The chances +of his life led him to Abyssinia, and subsequently along the coast of Arabia to +India. With his adventures in these countries we have here nothing to do, but +pass at once to the circumstances under which he was thrown upon the coast of +China. At Goa, Pinto hired himself as a soldier to Pedro de Faria, who was +proceeding as governor to Malacca. In this employ he was selected as Portuguese +agent in the company of the ambassador of the Battas, on the return of the +latter to Sumatra from his complimentary visit to Faria, at Malacca, the seat of +government. Here he fell in with one Antonio de Faria, with whom he joined in a +great commercial expedition to be sent up the Gulf of Siam.</p> +<p>We pass over various romantic adventures with pirates, described in his +narrative, especially those with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxxviii" id="Page_xxxviii">[xxxviii]</a></span> +one Coja Acem, a native of Guzerat, and an implacable enemy of the Portuguese, +whom Faria at length overcame in a desperate encounter. The adventurers then +sailed to Liampoo (Ning-po), where Faria gained intelligence of an island called +Calempluy, in which were the tombs of seventeen kings of China, all of gold, and +containing great treasure of various descriptions. This place they sought and +reached, and having plundered, loaded their ships with the treasure. About a +month after they had put to sea, they were wrecked in a furious gale in the Gulf +of Nanking, and fourteen of the Portuguese alone escaped with their lives. The +Chinese gave the shipwrecked pirates but a harsh reception; they were first +thrust into a pond where they were almost devoured by leeches, and were +afterwards sent with other criminals to Nanking, where they were punished with a +severe whipping. They were subsequently sent to Peking, also chained together in +parties of three, and on their arrival received thirty lashes apiece by way of +welcome. Pinto gives an animated account of the magnificence of these two great +capitals, but splendid as the objects he observed in them were, they would +scarcely bear comparison with those which presented themselves along the great +rivers and canals. The multitude of cities, together with the abundance which +here prevailed, was almost incredible. The immense concourse of boats at the +time of the great fairs, the mode of rearing water-fowl, their plan of hatching +eggs by artificial heat, the industry and regularity of populace, and their +fashion of eating<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xxxix" id="Page_xxxix">[xxxix]</a></span> +with chop-sticks, are detailed with great exactness. Upon the whole, his remarks +leave no doubt, we think, of the truth of his having been an eye-witness of what +he records. Upon the subsequent occurrences of his eventful life, and his final +return to Lisbon in 1558, we shall not here dwell, but proceed to the +consideration of the next in order on our list of European travellers to China.</p> +<p>Among a series of letters in Spanish, received in 1555 from various Jesuits +in the East, and appended to the 1561 edition of Francisco Alvarez's <i> +Historia de Ethiopia</i>, occurs an account of some matters regarding the +customs and laws of the kingdom of China, which a man (who was a captive there +for six years) related at Malacca, in the college of the Jesuits. This valuable +account, we believe, has never before appeared in English, and is here +translated.</p> +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>"The Chinese build their towns in the strongest situations, near rapid +rivers, and chiefly at the curves, in order that they may serve in part for +enclosures; and if the towns are half a league in circuit, they build walls of a +league in extent, so that in case of war they may hold a considerable number of +defenders. The towns are walled with stone built in mortar, for the most part; +some, especially the large towns, have very strong brick walls. They contain +very large buildings, and bridges of half a league, all of stone excellently +wrought, and there are blocks in them so large that it appears impossible for +men to have raised and set them by any contrivance. One<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xl" id="Page_xl">[xl]</a></span> +of the things that surprised us much, was to see eight columns, upon which the +government palace is built, in a town where we were for three years. We measured +these columns, and two men stretching their arms round them did not touch each +other; they appeared to us to be sixty feet high, little more or less; and it is +very strange that men should have been able to raise them and place them where +they are. The houses which are upon them are very high, all of wood, painted and +gilded. An officer resides there who collects the revenue of the province, and +there are similar ones in the other provinces. Each of these houses is +separately enclosed by walls, within which they are accustomed to plant trees +and make very pleasant gardens, with all kinds of fruit, which the Chinese are +exceedingly fond of, and also of having ponds at their houses in which they +breed fish for their amusement.</p> +<p>"What is generally considered by the nobility and principal men as the +greatest distinction, is to erect edifices in front of their gates, in way of an +arch going from one side of the street to the other, so that the people pass +underneath; some build them of stone, others of wood, with all kinds of +painting, colours of gold and blue, with pictures of various birds and other +things that may gratify the sight of the passers by. And they are so curious and +vain in this particular, that he who goes to the greatest expense therein, is +thought most of amongst them. On the border of the arches are the name and arms +of him who caused them to be erected, in letters of gold and blue.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xli" id="Page_xli">[xli]</a></span></p> +<p>"The houses are covered with glazed tiles of many colours, and the woodwork +is much wrought. The streets are very well made and paved with stone, and the +highways are all raised. I say this because they took us from that town (where +we had been prisoners for three years), and we went one hundred and twenty days' +journey, without going out of the kingdom, and found all the roads raised and +even; and several times when we passed rivers and inquired if most of the roads +that ran forward were similar, we were told that they were, and that it was a +four months' journey to reach the court of the king, and the roads were all +alike. They treated us very well on the journey, giving us sumpter beasts and +every thing necessary.</p> +<p>"In all the towns there is a street of very noble houses built by order of +the king, in which the officers who perform the service of visitation lodge. +These officers are commissioned with the royal authority over the governing +presidents (who are called in their language Taquoan). The governors of +provinces and those who hold any command, are chosen for their learning and +great prudence, without regard to anything else, and if the sons are as able as +their fathers they succeed them in their offices, otherwise they are not +admitted by the king into his service. The special governors of the towns are +obliged to sit to hear and do justice to all, every morning until midday, and +after having dined till sunset.</p> +<p>"Officers of the court come twice every year, by command of the king, to make +a stay in all the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xlii" id="Page_xlii">[xlii]</a></span> +towns, principally to see if the governors do their duty well, and to remove +them at once and put others in their place, if they are tyrannical, or oppress +the people, or perform their functions ill. These officers examine all the +walls, and if they are in bad condition, order them to be repaired. They +afterwards inquire concerning the royal revenues and the expenses of the towns, +moderating them if they are excessive. He who gives out money at usury loses it +(if proved), and, moreover, incurs further punishment. In the towns where these +officers come, they cause public notice to be given, in order that those who are +aggrieved by any injustice may come before them.</p> +<p>"In the town I was speaking of there are six governors, one of whom takes +precedence; and there are also six others whose business it is to collect the +revenues, and one of them is obliged to watch the town every night with his men, +that thieves may not disturb the people. Others take care to close the gates, +which are very strong and fortified with iron. The governors and magistrates of +every town are charged to write every moon, to the court of the king, an account +of what takes place; and each has to write separately, that it may be seen if +they concert what they write, and whether they speak truth; for those who lie to +the king incur the punishment of death; wherefore they dread much to state +anything false in their accounts. No man governs in his native place, where he +has relations, that he may do justice to all without respect of persons.</p> +<p>"In the principal towns are many strong gaols;<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xliii" id="Page_xliii">[xliii]</a></span> +we being prisoners were distributed in six of them. There are prisoners for +various crimes; the most serious with them is murder. The prisoners are +numerous, because the towns are populous; in every gaol there are three, four, +or five hundred of them. A native of the town, where we were, told us, that in +it alone there might be at that time more than eight thousand prisoners; and +that was because it was a principal town, where those of the neighbouring places +were assembled together. In every gaol there is a book of the prisoners therein, +whom the gaoler counts every night. In that where I was, sometimes there were +three hundred prisoners, at others four hundred; and although I did not see the +other gaols, it appears to me from this, that there might be as many prisoners +as they told me.</p> +<p>"The serious crimes go to the court; and for those who come from thence +sentenced to death, the king gives power to the governors of the towns—if, upon +a re-examination of the case, from being nearer where the offence was committed, +they should find them less guilty—to spare their lives, and condemn them to +banishment, or to the king's service, for so many years, or for their whole +life. They take all possible pains to avoid condemning any to death. It can +scarcely be expressed how much the king is feared by his subjects: they call him +god and king for the strict government and justice that he maintains in his +kingdom, which is necessary from the people being bad and malicious.</p> +<p>"In their ancient books they find that at a certain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xliv" id="Page_xliv">[xliv]</a></span> +time, white men with long beards are to take their kingdom of China; on this +account they are so careful of the walls and of fortifying the towns; and the +officers make a muster of the soldiers, they receive and examine them to see if +they are good soldiers; they do the same with the cavalry; and to those who +excel they give rewards according to their personal qualities, putting also in +their heads a branch with gold and silver leaves, as a sign of honour; but those +who do not satisfy them they dismiss, paying them their hire and giving them the +money with reproachful words.</p> +<p>"The people of China are, in general, neither brave nor skilful, nor have +they any natural inclination for warlike affairs; if they maintain themselves it +is by the multitude of the people, the strength of the walls and towns, and the +provision of ammunition. At the boundary of the kingdom of China, where it +borders on the Tartars, there is a wall of wondrous strength, of a month's +journey in extent, where the king keeps a great military force in the bulwarks. +Where this walls comes upon mountains, they cut them in such a manner that they +remain and serve as a wall; for the Tartars are very brave and skilful in war. +At the time we were prisoners, they broke through a part of the wall and entered +into the territory within for a month and a half's journey; but as the king +prepared great armies of men provided with artful contrivances (in which the +Chinese are very crafty), he kept back the Tartars, who fight on horse-back. As +their horses had become weak and were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xlv" id="Page_xlv">[xlv]</a></span> +dying of hunger, one of the Chinese officers commanded a large quantity of peas +to be placed in the fields, and thus it was that the horses (being so hungry as +they were) set themselves to eat against the will of their masters; and in this +manner the army of the king of China put them in disorder and turned to drive +them out. And now a strict watch is kept on the wall.</p> +<p>"They make great feasts in the provinces of the kingdom of China, every year +on the king's birthday; and in the government palaces of every town, in a hall +covered with an awning, and having the walls and the floor ornamented with very +rich coloured cloths, they place a seat painted of the same colour. This hall +has three doors, and it is the custom of the officers of the towns to enter by +any one of them, on foot like any other man, without taking anything with him, +and without a sunshade before him; in passing they make obeisance by seven or +eight genuflexions, as if the king were sitting on the seat. Having finished, +they go to their houses, and at this time enter on foot and by any door; for +except on this day they only enter by the middle door and in very rich litters, +in which their servants carry them. They hold it for greater dignity to go in +these litters than on horseback, taking one or two persons on the right for +state, and a sunshade on foot before them, like those which they use in India.</p> +<p>"They make another very great feast on the first day of the year, which is +the day upon which we celebrate the feast of the Circumcision. These feasts<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xlvi" id="Page_xlvi">[xlvi]</a></span> +last three days; on every one of which they represent scenes by day and night, +for they are much addicted to the performance of farces. On these three days the +gates of the town are closed, because from much eating and drinking the people +are at times beside themselves. They make other very great feasts when the king +nominates his son for his heir; upon which day, they declared to me, they +release all the prisoners, even those sentenced to death. At the time that we +were prisoners, there came news that the king intended to make his son a king, +upon which the prisoners in all the gaols rejoiced much.</p> +<p>"These great kingdoms of China are divided by the same king into fifteen +provinces, and in every one of them there is a chief town, where there is a +governor, who is changed every three years; in these chief towns the treasure of +the king, from the revenue of all the province, is collected. The privilege for +those who shall betake themselves to the chief town is, that for crimes which +they have committed elsewhere they cannot be taken; and the reason of this +privilege is, that as they are continually carrying on war with the Tartars and +with other kings, if they did not afford this security these persons would pass +over to the enemy.</p> +<p>"It has been, and still is, the custom to write everything remarkable and +worthy of remembrance on large stones on the highways, and in the same places +where they occurred, principally in the towns at the government palaces, where +the officers reside.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xlvii" id="Page_xlvii">[xlvii]</a></span> +These antiquities are written in the open courts, many of them in letters of +gold; and the noblemen and men of quality are very curious to read them, and +fond of talking of remarkable actions, and of the dignity and achievements of +the former kings.</p> +<p>"I have heard much of the grandeur of these kingdoms, and seen somewhat +(although little), which to those who have no knowledge of China would scarcely +appear true; wherefore I only speak of those things that are most common among +the people, leaving the rest to time, which will discover them. The noblest and +most populous town is one where the king resides, which is called Paquin; the +natives (for I did not see it) say that it takes seven days to traverse it by a +direct road, and thirteen to go round it. It is surrounded by three enclosures +and a very copious river, which entirely encompasses it, forming, as it were, +the interior enclosure. Marvellous things are reported of the riches and +structure of the royal residence; the designs are taken from many provinces of +the same kingdom, none being allowed to go out of it. Before entering the +palaces seven or eight very strong gates have to be passed, where there are very +tall and stout men for guards. The king (according to what they say) never goes +out of that town, and everything he eats is produced within the walls; he does +not go to the outer enclosures; and they say he is never seen except by those +who attend upon him, who are all eunuchs, sons of noblemen, and who when once +they enter there into the residence, never more depart from it until death.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xlviii" id="Page_xlviii">[xlviii]</a></span> +The king has noblemen about him, very learned and of great prudence, with whom +he transacts all the business of the kingdom. And these also never go without +the enclosure on any account; they are called Vlaos. The manner of choosing them +for that dignity is this: when there is a vacancy, the king inquires for some +one distinguished in learning and for discretion, and inclined to justice; if +there be one who is commonly held of this reputation, he orders him to be +summoned from any province of the kingdom where he may be, and invests him with +the office of Vlaos.</p> +<p>"The Chinese observe much exactness in their courtesies and great neatness in +their apparel, both men and women; they generally go very well dressed, from the +quantity of silk there is in the kingdom.</p> +<p>"The soil is very productive of necessaries, fruits, and very singular +waters; there are very pleasant gardens, and all kinds of game and hunting. The +Chinese touch no food with their hands, but all, both small and great, eat with +two little sticks for cleanliness.</p> +<p>"Their temples are very large edifices, richly wrought, which they call +Valeras, and which cost a great deal, for the statues, which are of large size, +are all covered with beaten gold. The roof of the temples is gilded, and the +walls ornamented with boards well wrought and painted in pictures. They are +skilful workmen in carpentry. In these temples there are priests (who are +obliged to remain in them always), with an appointed income. They eat neither<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_xlix" id="Page_xlix">[xlix]</a></span> +flesh nor fish, only herbs, principally beledas, and some fruits; on certain +days they fast. If they do anything that they ought not, they are driven out and +allowed to be priests no longer, and others are put in their place.</p> +<p>"No man can go from one province to another without taking a licence of the +governor, and he who is found without one is punished; and no traveller can be +(by law of the kingdom) more than three or four days in a town where he has not +business; there is a man whose office it is to go about looking to this, and if +any such is found, he is taken up, for they presume him to be a thief and a man +of bad life. And so every one is accustomed to have some occupation, and to hold +some office, even the sons of the officers and nobles. All employ their sons, of +whatever condition they may be, setting them to read and write, which they +vnderstand generally. Others put them to trade, and they are also in the habit +of placing their sons with officers and noblemen, that they may learn how to +serve. The officers are waited on with much veneration; all who speak to them do +so with genuflexions, and whatever they have to ask for must be done in writing.</p> +<p>"The sentences which the officers pronounce are conformable to the laws of +the kingdom; they judge according to the truth of the matter, which they inquire +into themselves, without taking account of what the parties say; and so they are +very correct in affairs of justice, for fear of the visitation, which, they say, +is made every six months. Their years have<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_l" id="Page_l">[l]</a></span> +twelve moons, and every three years they add to the year one moon, and thus it +has thirteen.</p> +<p>"The people of any consequence wear black silk for their dress, because +coloured is held dishonourable for clothing; so much so, that no one dares to go +before any officer or person of quality without a black dress; and if he has +gone away from home with a coloured cloak, and he happens to have to speak to +any officer, he takes a black cloak from some acquaintance whom he meets, and +leaves him his own while he transacts his business. The common people always +speak to the nobles cap in hand, and they may not wear black cloaks, but only +very short coloured ones. The officers wear a kind of cap, different from other +people, for a certain dignity is kept up amongst them as with us. In these caps +they have tufts made of horsehair, stuck on every part. The king wears the same, +except that they say he has two points cross-wise at the top.</p> +<p>"They praise and extol the richness of the king's dress, which they say is +always of the colour of heaven. The officers, on the principal feasts, on the +first day of January and at the beginning of the moon, dress themselves richly +in coloured damask, and on the breast and back of the vesture they bear a stag +and an eagle, very naturally embroidered, for they are clever designers. These +garments look very well; they reach within a hand's breadth of the ground, and +have very long, large, and wide sleeves. They wear boots of a blackish colour, +with soles of white cloth strong as boards.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_li" id="Page_li">[li]</a></span></p> +<p>"The officers and nobles, at the death of father or mother or a very near +relation, wear white dresses, very cross and rough; and they gird themselves +with a girdle as thick as the leg, which reaches to the ground, as does the +dress also. Attached to the cap, they wear another thinner cord. When the +deceased are less nearly related, they also clothe themselves all in white, from +the shoes to the cap, but not so coarse and rough.</p> +<p>"These are the matters that are most commonly seen and known in China, where +we were prisoners six years; other very remarkable things that we heard tell of +I omit, because I did not see them, and because it appears to me that every day +will discover more and more."</p> +</div> +<p>The next account of China is by Gaspar da Cruz, a native of Evora, and one of +the order of Friars Preachers; he is thus described by Barbosa Machado, in his <i> +Biblioteca Lusitana</i>. "Inflamed with an holy ardour of announcing the gospel +to distant barbarians, who were given to idolatry, he set sail in the year 1548 +with twelve companions, of whom the Friar Diego Bernardo was vicar-general, to +the East Indies; and after building a convent at Goa, and another at Malacca, he +penetrated as far as the kingdom of Camboya; but as the fruits of his labours +did not correspond with his desires, he resolved upon passing on to China in the +year 1556, being the first missionary who illuminated its inhabitants with the +light of the faith, and had the glory of being the precursor of all those gospel +labourers, who with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lii" id="Page_lii">[lii]</a></span> +so much labour and expenditure of blood cultivated that wild but extensive +vineyard. He spent many years in this laborous undertaking, and several times +incurred the risk of his life, especially on one occasion when, in a sumptuous +pagoda, he threw down a multitude of idols, but at the same time confounded and +silenced by the vehement efficacy of his preaching the greatest masters of +Paganism. He returned to his country in 1569, and was nominated by King +Sebastian, bishop of Malacca, but this dignity he did not accept. He died in +1570, through exposing himself in charitable exertions to assist the sufferers +in a plague which then raged at Lisbon."</p> +<p>The narrative of his travels was published in black letter at Evora in +1569-70, 4to., under the title of "Tractàdo em que se contam muito por estenso +as cousas de China con suas particularidades y assi do Regno dormuz." In the +preface reference is made to a narrative of China by a fellow-countryman, one +Francisco Henriques, but he appears merely to refer to him as having presented +this relation to Sebastian I, King of Portugal, which seems to have been an +unpublished manuscript. An abbreviated translation of the narrative of his +travels is given by Purchas, in which he mentions "the storie of certaine +Portugals, prisoners in China," one of which he nameth Galotti Perera, from whom +he received great part of his Chinese intelligence. He is also referred to by +Mendoza, in the first chapter of the second book, as one from whom he "follows +many things in the process of his historie." This person is mentioned by Barbosa +Machado under<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_liii" id="Page_liii">[liii]</a></span> +the name of Galeoti Pereyra, brother of Ruy Pereira I, first Count of Feyra, and +as being captive in Funchien in China. His account appears to have been first +printed in Italian at Venice, from the original Portuguese MS., and an English +translation by R. Willes was given by Richard Eden in his <i>Historye of +Travaile in the West and East Indies.</i> As this, though comparatively short, +preceded the narrative of Mendoza now reprinted, and formed the main basis of +the account of Gaspar da Cruz, we think it right to supply the reader with +copious extracts from it, as being for these reasons a highly important and +interesting document. They are as follows:</p> +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>"This land of China is parted into 13 shyres, the which sometymes were eche +one a kyngdome by it selfe, but these many years they haue been all subject unto +one kyng. Fuquien is made by the Portugalles the first shyre, bycause there +their troubles bygan, and had occasion thereby to know the rest. In this shyre +be viii cities, but one principally more famous than others, called Fuquico, the +other seuen are reasonably great, the best known whereof unto the Portugalles is +Cinceo, in respect of a certain hauen ioyning thereunto, whyther in tyme past +they were wont for merchandyse to resort.</p> +<p>"Cantan is the second shyre, not so great in quantitie, as well accoumpted +of, both by the kyng thereof and also by the Portugalles, for that it lyeth +nearer vnto Malacca than any other part of China, and was first discryed by the +Portugalles before any other shyre in that prouince: this shyre hath in it seuen +cities.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_liv" id="Page_liv">[liv]</a></span></p> +<p>"Chequeam is the third shyre, the chiefest citie therein is Donchion, therein +also standeth Liampo, with other thirtiene or fourtiene boroughes: countrey +townes therein to many to be spoken of.</p> +<p>"The fourth shyre is called Xutiamfu, the principall citie therof is great +Pachin, where the kyng is alwayes resident. In it are fyftiene other very great +cities: of other townes therein, and boroughes well walled and trenched about, I +will say nothing.</p> +<p>"The fyft shyre hath name Chelim: the great citie Nanquin, chiefe of other +fyftiene cities, was herein of auncient tyme the royall seate of the Chinish +kynges. From this shyre, and from the aforesayde Chequeam forwarde, bare rule +the other kynges, untyll the whole region became one kyngdome.</p> +<p>"The sixt shyre beareth name Quianci, as also the principall citie thereof, +wherein the fyne claye to make vessels is wrought. The Portugalles beyng +ignorant of this countrey, and fyndyng great abundaunce of that fyne claye to be +solde at Liampo, and that very good cheape, thought at the first that it had +been made there; howbeit, in fine, they perceiued that the standing of Quinzi, +more neare unto Liampo than to Cinceo or Cantan, was the cause of so muche fine +clay at Liampo: within the compasse of Quinci shyre be other 12 cities.</p> +<p>"The seuenth shyre is Quicini, the eight Quansi, the nienth Confu, the tenth +Vrnan, the eleuenth Sichiua. In the first hereof there be 16 cities, in the next +fyftiene: howe many townes the other three haue we are ignorant as yet, as also +of the proper<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lv" id="Page_lv">[lv]</a></span> +names of the 12 and 13 shyres and the townes therein.</p> +<p>"This, finally, may be generally sayde heereof, that the greater shyres in +China prouince may be compared with mightie kyngdomes.</p> +<p>"In eche one of these shyres be set Ponchiassini and Anchiassini, before whom +are handled the matters of other cities. There is also placed in eche one a +Tutan, as you would say a gouernor, and a Chian, that is a visitor, as it were, +whose office is to goe in circuit and to see iustice exactly done. By these +meanes so upryghtly thinges are ordered there, that it may bee worthely +accompted one of the best gouerned prouinces in all the world.</p> +<p>"The king maketh alwayes his abode in the great citie Pachin, as muche as to +say in our language, as by the name thereof I am aduertised, the towne of the +kyngdome. This kyngdome is so large, that vnder fyue monethes you are not able +to traueyle from the townes by the sea syde to the court and backe agayne, no +not vnder three monethes in poste at your vrgent businesse. The posthorses in +this countrey are litle of bodie, but swyfte of foote. Many doe traueyle the +greater parte of this iourney by water in certayne lyght barkes, for the +multitude of ryuers commodious for passage from one citie to another.</p> +<p>"The kyng, notwithstandyng the hugenesse of his kyngdome, hath such a care +thereof, that every moone (by the moones they reckon their monethes) he is +aduertised fully of whatsoeuer thing happeneth therein, by these meanes +folowyng.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lvi" id="Page_lvi">[lvi]</a></span></p> +<p>"The whole prouince beyng diuided into shyres, and eche shyre hauyng in it +one chiefe and principall citie, whereunto the matters of all the other cities, +townes, and boroughes are brought, there are drawen in euery chiefe citie +aforesayde, intelligences of suche thinges as doe monethely fall out, and be +sent in writing to the court. If happely in one moneth euery post is not able to +goe so long a way, yet doeth there notwithstandyng once euery moneth arryue one +post out of the shyre. Who so commeth before the newe moone, stayeth for the +deliuery of his letters vntyll the moone be chaunged. Then lykewyse are +dispatched other postes backe into all the 13 shyres agayne.</p> +<p>"Before that we doe come to Cinceo we have to passe through many places, and +some of great importance. For this countrey is so well inhabited neare the sea +syde, that you cannot go one myle but you shall see some towne, borough, or +hostry, the which are so abundantly provided of all thinges, that in the cities +and townes they liue ciuily. Nevertheles such as dwel abrode are very poore, for +the multitude of them euery where is so great, that out of a tree you shal see +many tymes swarme a number of children where a man would not haue thought to +haue founde any one at all.</p> +<p>"From these places in number infinite, you shall come vnto two cities very +populose, and beyng compared with Cinceo, not possibly to be discerned which is +the greater of them. These cities are as well walled as any cities in all the +worlde. As you come in to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lvii" id="Page_lvii">[lvii]</a></span> +eyther of them, standeth so great and mightie a brydge, that the lyke thereof I +haue neuer seene in Portugall nor els where. I heard one of my felowes say, that +he told in one bridge 40 arches. The occasion wherefore these bridges are made +so great, is for that the countrey is toward the sea very plaine and low, and +ouerwhelmed euer as y<sup>e</sup> sea water encreaseth. The breadth of the +bridges, although it bee well proportioned vnto the length therof, yet are they +equally buylt, no higher in the middle than at eyther end, in such wyse that you +may directly see from y<sup>e</sup> one end to the other, the sydes are +wonderfully well engraved after the maner of Rome workes. But that we did most +marueyle at, was therewithall the hugenesse of y<sup>e</sup> stones, the lyke +wherof as we came into the citie, we dyd see many set up in places dishabited by +the way, to no small charges of theyrs, howbeit to little purpose, whereas no +body seeth them but such as doe come bye. The arches are not made after our +fashion, vauted with sundry stones set togeather; but paved, as it were, whole +stones reaching from one piller to an other, in suche wyse that they lye both +for the arches heades and galantly serue also for the hygh waye. I haue been +astunned to beholde the hugenesse of these aforesayde stones, some of them are <span class="smcap"> +XII</span> pases long and upwarde, the least a <span class="smcap">XII</span> +good pases long, and a halfe.</p> +<p>"The wayes echewhere are galantly paued with foure square stone, except it be +where for want of stone they vse to laye bricke: in this voyage wee traueyled +ouer certayne hilles, where the wayes were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lviii" id="Page_lviii">[lviii]</a></span> +pitched, and in many places no worse paued than in the playne grounde. This +causeth us to thinke, that in all the worlde there be no better workemen for +buildinges than the inhabitantes of China.</p> +<p>"The countrey is so well inhabited, that no one foote of ground is left +untilled; small store of cattell haue we seene this way, we sawe onely certayne +oxen wherewithall the countreymen doe plough theyr grounde. One oxe draweth the +plough alone, not onely in this shyre, but in other places also wherein is +greater store of cattell. These countrymen by arte doe that in tyllage which we +are constrayned to doe by force. Here be solde the voydinges of close stooles, +although there wanteth not the dunge of beastes; and the excrements of man are +good marchandise throughout all China. The dungfermers seeke in euery streete by +exchange to buye this durtie ware for hearbes and wood. The custome is very good +for keepyng the citie cleane. There is great aboundance of hennes, geese, +duckes, swyne, and goates; wethers haue they none: the hennes are solde by +weight, and so are all other thinges. Two pounde of hennes fleshe, goose, or +ducke, is worth two Foi of their money, that is, <i>d. ob.</i> sterling. +Swines flesh is solde at a peny the pounde. Beefe beareth the same pryce, for +the scarcitie thereof; howbeit northwarde from Fuquieo, and farther of from the +sea coast, there is beefe more plentie and solde better cheape; beefe onely +excepted, great aboundance of all these viandes we haue had in all the cities we +passed through. And if this countrey<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lix" id="Page_lix">[lix]</a></span> +were lyke vnto India, the inhabitants whereof eate neyther henne, beefe, nor +porke, but keepe that onely for the Portugalles and Moores, they would be solde +here for nothing. But it so fallyng out that the Chineans are the greatest +eaters in all the world, they doe feede uppon all thinges, specially on porke, +the fatter that is, vnto them the lesse lothsome. The highest price of these +thinges aforesayde I haue set downe, better cheape shall you sometymes buye +them, for the great plentie thereof in this countrey. Frogges are solde at the +same price that is made of hennes, and are good meate amongst them, as also +dogges, cattes, rattes, snakes, and all other vncleane meates.</p> +<p>"The cities be very gallant, specially near vnto the gates, the which are +marueylously great, and couered with iron. The gatehouses buylt on hygh with +towers, the lower parte thereof is made of bricke and stone, proportionally with +the walles; from the walles vpward, the buyldyng is of tymber, and many stones +in it one aboue the other. The strength of theyr townes is in the mightie walles +and ditches, artillarie haue they none.</p> +<p>"The streetes in Cinceo, and in all the rest of the cities we haue seene are +very fayre, so large and so streight that it is wonderfull to beholde. Theyr +houses are buylt with tymber, the foundations onely excepted, the which are layd +with stone; in eche syde of the streetes are paynteles or continuall porches for +the marchantes to walke vnder: the breadth of the streete is neuerthelesse +suche, that in<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lx" id="Page_lx">[lx]</a></span> +them <span class="smcap">XV</span> men may ryde commodiously syde by syde. As +they ryde they must needes passe vnder many hygh arches of triumph that crosse +ouer the streetes made of tymber, and carued diuersely, couered with tyle of +fine claye: vnder these arches the mercers doe vtter theyr small wares, and such +as lyst to stande there, are defended from rayne and the heate of the sunne. The +greater gentlemen haue these arches at their doores, although some of them be +not so myghtyly buylt as the rest.</p> +<p>"I shall haue occasion to speake of a certayne order of gentlemen that are +called Loutea; I will first therefore expound what this worde signifieth. Loutea +is as muche to say in our language as Syr, and when any of them calleth his +name, he answereth Syr: and as we doe say, that the kyng hath made some +gentleman, so say they that there is made a Loutea. And for that amongst them +the degrees are diuers both in name and office, I will tell you onely of some +principalles, beyng not able to aduertise you of all.</p> +<p>"The maner howe gentlemen are created Louteas, and doe come to that honour +and title, is by the gyuynge of a broad gyrdle not like to the rest, and a cap, +at the commandement of the kyng. The name Loutea is more generall and common +vnto moe, than equalitie of honour thereby signified, agreeth withall. Such +Louteas that doe serue their prince in weightie matters for iustice, are created +after triall made of their learning; but the other, whiche serue in smaller +affayres, as capitaynes, constables, sergeantes by lande and sea, receyuers, and +such lyke,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxi" id="Page_lxi">[lxi]</a></span> +wherof there be in euery citie, as also in this, very many, are made for fauour: +the chiefe Louteas are serued kneelyng.</p> +<p>"The Louteas are an idle generation, without all maner of exercises and +pastymes, excepte it be eatyng and drynkyng. Somtymes they walke abrode in the +fieldes to make the souldyers shoot at prickes with theyr bowes, but theyr +eatyng passeth: they wyll stande eatyng euen when the other do drawe to shoote.</p> +<p>"The inhabitants of China be very great idolaters, all generally do worshyppe +the heauens: and as we are woont to saye, God knoweth it, so say they at euery +worde, Tien Tautee, that is to saye, <i>the heauens do knowe it</i>. Some do +worshyp the sonne, and some the moone, as they thynke good, for none are bounde +more to one then to an other. In their temples, the which they do cal Meani, +they haue a great altar in y<sup>e</sup> same place as we have; true it is that +one may goe rounde about it. There set they up the image of a certayne Loutea of +that countrey, whom they haue in great reuerence for certaine notable thinges he +dyd. At the ryght hande standeth the deuyl, muche more vglie paynted then we do +vse to set hym out, whereunto great homage is done by suche as come into the +temple to aske counsell, or to drawe lottes: this opinion they haue of hym, that +he is malitious and able to do euyl. If you aske them what they do thynke of the +soules departed, they will answeare, that they be immortall, and that as soone +as any one departeth out of this life, he becometh a deuyle if he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxii" id="Page_lxii">[lxii]</a></span> +haue liued well in this worlde; if otherwyse, that the same deuyl changeth him +into a bufle, oxe, or dogge. Wherfore to this deuyl do they much honour, to hym +do they sacrifice, praying hym that he wyll make them lyke vnto hym selfe, and +not lyke other beastes. They haue moreouer an other sorte of temples, wherein +both uppon the altars and also on the walles do stande many idoles well +proportioned, but bare headed. These bare name Omithofon, accompted of them +spirites, but suche as in heaven do neither good nor euyll; thought to be suche +men and women as haue chastlye lyued in this worlde in abstinence from fyshe and +fleshe, fedde only with ryse and salates. Of that deuyl they make some accompte, +for these spirites they care litle or nothyng at all. Agayne, they holde opinion +that if a man do well in this lyfe, the heauens wyll geue hym many temporall +blessynges; but if he do euyll, then shall he haue infirmities, diseases, +troubles, and penurie, and all this without any knowledge of God.</p> +<p>"In the principall cities of the shyres be foure cheefe Louteas, before whom +are brought all matters of the inferiour townes throughout the whole realme. +Diuers other Louteas haue the maneagyng of iustice and receyuyng of rentes, +bounde to yeeld an accompte thereof vnto the greater officers. Other doo see +that there be no euyll rule keept in the citie: eache one as it behoueth hym. +Generally al these do impryson malefactours, cause them to be whypped and +racked, hoysing them vp and downe by the armes with a corde, a thyng very vsuall +there, and accompted no<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxiii" id="Page_lxiii">[lxiii]</a></span> +shame. These Louteas do vse great diligence in y<sup>e</sup> apprehending of +theeues, so that it is a wonder to see a theefe escape away in any towne, citie, +or village. Upon the sea neere vnto the shore many are taken, and looke euen as +they are taken, so be they fyrst whypped, and afterward layd in prison, where +shortly after they all dye for hunger and colde. At that tyme when we were in +pryson, there died of them aboue threescore and ten. Yf happely any one hauyng +the meanes to geat foode do escape, he is set with the condemned persones, and +prouided for as they be by the kyng, in such wyse as hereafter it shalbe sayde.</p> +<p>"Theyr whyps be certayne peeces of canes, cleft in the middle, in such sort +that they seeme rather playne then sharpe. He that is to be whipped lieth +grouelong on the ground. Upon his thighes the hangman layeth on blowes myghtely +with these canes, that the standers by tremble at theyr crueltie. Ten strypes +drawe a great deale of blood, twentie or thyrtie spoyle the fleshe altogeather, +fyftie or threescore wyll require long tyme to be healed, and yf they come to +the number of one hundred, then are they incurable."</p> +<p>"Wee are wont to call this countrey China, and the people Chineans; but as +long as we were prisoners, not hearing amongst them at any tyme that name, I +determined to learne howe they were called: and asked sometymes by them thereof, +for that they vnderstoode vs not when wee called them Chineans, I answered them +that all the inhabitantes of India<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxiv" id="Page_lxiv">[lxiv]</a></span> +named them Chineans, wherefore I prayed them that they would tell mee for what +occasion they are so called, whether peradventure any citie of theyrs bare that +name. Heerevnto they alwayes answered mee, to haue no suche name, nor euer to +haue had. Than dyd I aske them what name the whole countrey beareth, and what +they would answere beyng asked of other nations what countrymen they were: It +was tolde me that of auncient tyme in this countrey had been many kynges, and +though presently it were all vnder one, eche kyngdome neuertheless enioyed that +name it fyrst had: these kyngdomes are the prouinces I spake of before. In +conclusion they sayde, that the whole countrey is called Tamen, and the +inhabitantes Tamegines, so that this name China or Chineans is not hearde of in +that countrey. I doe thinke that the nearenesse of an other prouince thereabout +called Cochin-China, and the inhabitantes thereof Cochinesses, fyrst discouered +before that China was, lying not farre from Malacca, dyd gyue occasion both to +the one nation and to the other of that name Chineans, as also the whole +countrey to be named China. But their proper name is that aforesayde.</p> +<p>"I haue hearde moreouer that in the citie Nanquim remayneth a table of golde, +and in it written a kyng his name, as a memory of that residence the kynges were +wont to keepe there. This table standeth in a great pallace, couered alwayes +except it bee in some of theyr festiuall dayes, at what tyme they are wont to +let it be seene: couered neuerthelesse as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxv" id="Page_lxv">[lxv]</a></span> +it is, all the nobilitie of the citie goeth of duetie to doe it euery day +reuerence. The lyke is done in the head cities of all the other shyres in the +pallaces of the Ponchiassini, wherein these aforesayde tables doe stande, with +the kyng his name written in them, although no reuerence be done therevnto but +in solempne feastes.</p> +<p>"I haue lykewyse vnderstoode that the citie Pachin, where the kyng maketh his +abode, is so great, that to goe from one syde to the other, besydes the +subarbes, the which are greater than the citie it selfe, it requyreth one whole +day a horsebacke, going hackney pase. In the subarbes be many wealthy marchantes +of all sortes. They tolde me furthermore that it was moted about, and in the +motes great store of fyshe, wherof the kyng maketh great gaynes.</p> +<p>"They haue moreouer one thing very good, and that whiche made vs all to +marueyle at them, beyng Gentiles: namely, that there be hospitalles in all theyr +cities, alwayes full of people, we neuer sawe any poore body begge. We therefore +asked the cause of this: answered it was, that in euery citie there is a great +circuit, wherein be many houses for poore people, for blinde, lame, old folke, +not able to traueyle for age, nor hauyng any other meanes to lyue. These folke +haue in the aforesayde houses, euer plentie of rice duryng theyr lyues, but +nothyng els. Such as be receyued into these houses, come in after this maner. +Whan one is sicke, blinde, or lame, he maketh a supplication to the Ponchiassi, +and prouyng that to be true he wryteth, he remayneth<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxvi" id="Page_lxvi">[lxvi]</a></span> +in the aforesayde great lodgyng as long as he lyueth: besides this they keepe in +these places swyne and hennes, whereby the poore be releeued without goyng a +beggyng.</p> +<p>"The kyng hath in many ryuers good store of barges full of sea crowes, that +breede, are fedde, and do dye therein, in certayne cages, allowed monethly a +certayne prouision of ryce. These barges the kyng bestoweth vpon his greatest +magistrates, geuyng to some two, to some three of them, as he thynketh good, to +fyshe therewithall after this maner. At the houre appoynted to fyshe, all the +barges are brought togeather in a circle, where the riuer is shalowe, and the +crowes, tyed togeather vnder the wynges, are let leape downe into the water, +some vnder, some aboue, worth the lookyng vppon: eche one as he hath filled his +bagge, goeth to his owne barge and emptieth it, which done, he retourneth to +fyshe agayne. Thus hauyng taken good store of fyshe, they set the crowes at +libertie, and do suffer them to fyshe for theyr owne pleasure. There were in +that citie where I was, twentie barges at the least of these aforesayde crowes; +I wente almost euery day to see them, yet coulde I neuer be thoroughly satisfied +to see so straunge a kynde of fyshyng."</p> +</div> +<p>The Spaniards were long behind their neighbours the Portuguese in prosecuting +the important task of eastern investigation. The Papal division of the world +between the discoverers of the two nations by the boundary of a certain +meridian, made them follow the line of exploration to the westward.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxvii" id="Page_lxvii">[lxvii]</a></span></p> +<p>The Father Andres de Urdaneta, who, previous to entering himself as a monk of +the order of the Augustins, had been a skilful navigator, persuaded Philip II to +realize the conquest of the Philippines, where the voyages and the life of the +celebrated Magellan were brought to a close. This prince consequently issued +orders to the viceroy of Mexico, to send out an expedition under the command of +a native of Mexico, named Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, and desired that Andres de +Urdaneta should accompany him, together with four other Augustines, viz., Diego +de Herrera, Martin de Herrada, Pedro de Gamboa, and Andres de Aguirre. The fleet +arrived in 1565 at the island of Zebu. On the 1st of June the same year, the +Father Andres de Urdaneta returned to Mexico. In 1566 Legaspi built the town of +Zebu, and the Augustines established a monastery as a station for their missions +among the natives. The Spaniards, pursuing their conquests, arrived in 1571 at +the island of Luzon, the most northerly and the largest of this archipelago: +Legaspi here founded the city of Manilla.</p> +<p>The work of conversion and civilization was scarcely begun, when the island +was engaged in a quarrel by the attacks of the Malays of Borneo and Mindanao. +These pirates, too cunning to venture on an open struggle, landed suddenly on +the coast, slaughtered or extorted money from the missionaries, and carried away +several of the natives, whom they afterwards sold as slaves. In 1574 a more +serious aggression diverted attention from the attacks of these pirates:<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxviii" id="Page_lxviii">[lxviii]</a></span> +a Chinese corsair, who was called King Limahon, appeared before Manilla. For a +long time he had resisted the squadrons of his emperor, but at last, vanquished +by numbers and forced to flee, he entertained the project of conquering Luzon +with seventy-two vessels, which carried two thousand soldiers, bold adventurers, +besides the sailors and one thousand five hundred women. They effected a landing +on the 29th of November 1574, just after Lopez de Legaspi had been appointed +governor-general of the Philippines. The corsairs marched against the Spanish +town, which they expected to surprise; but a little corps of advanced guard, +under the orders of Captain Velasquez, having given the garrison time to rally, +a general battle took place, and ended in the defeat of the Chinese. Limahon in +vain essayed to renew the attack: repulsed afresh, he took refuge at the mouth +of the river Lingayen, in Pangasinan, the northern province of Luzon. At the +time of his attack, he had been closely followed by a Chinese captain, charged +to watch him, and who had a conference with the Spanish governor. The latter +thought this a favourable occasion for introducing the Gospel into China. Having +sent for Alfonso de Alvarado, provincial of the Augustins, a venerable and holy +old man, one of those whom Charles V had sent to the discovery of New Guinea, he +told him to select missionaries for the Celestial Empire. The provincial in his +joy offered to go there himself, old as he was; but the governor would by no +means consent to this proposal. The choice fell upon Martin de<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxix" id="Page_lxix">[lxix]</a></span> +Herrada, or Rada, a native of Pampeluna, in Navarre, who had already filled the +office of provincial, and who burned with such desire to convert the Chinese, +that after having studied their language, he had made a proposal to some +merchants of that nation who had come to the Philippines, that they should carry +him as a slave to their country, where by this means he hoped to introduce the +knowledge of the Gospel. They chose also Friar Geronimo Marin, a native of +Mexico, a man equally distinguished for his piety and learning, and in company +with these two missionaries, who they hoped would be able to remain a +considerable time in China and to spread the knowledge of the Gospel there, they +sent two soldiers, who were to bring back news respecting the progress of the +mission. Besides other presents, the governor gave the Chinese captain all the +slaves of his nation which the Spaniards had taken from Limahon, who was at that +time held under blockade, to take them back free to their country. The 5th of +July 1575, the friars landed at Tansuso [Gan-hai], whence, on their way to visit +the governor of Chincheo [Tsiuen-cheu] they passed through the town of Tangoa +[Tong-gan] in China.<a name="FNanchor_6_6" id="FNanchor_6_6"></a><a href="#Footnote_6_6" class="fnanchor">[6]</a> +The mandarin of Chincheo, of whom the captain who conducted them held his +commission, gave them a good reception; but as the ambassadors were sent by a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxx" id="Page_lxx">[lxx]</a></span> +simple lieutenant of the king of Spain, and not direct from the monarch, he +insisted that they should address him on their knees. This mandarin, after +having entertained them at a banquet, sent them with a good escort to the Tutan +or viceroy of the province. They then made a journey of thirty leagues, carried +in palanquins. At Aucheo [Focheou, so pronounced in the Fokien dialect] they +met with an honourable reception. Each of the monks received a present of six +pieces of silk tissue, which they crossed upon their breast in the manner of a +stole, and two bouquets of silver: the other members of the embassy also had +presents. As to the alliance proposed between Spain and China, and the +permission requested by the missionaries for the exercise of their apostolic +ministry, the viceroy referred them to the emperor. While waiting the reply from +Pekin, the monks bought many books in the Chinese language, and visited the +pagodas. The principal contained one hundred and eleven idols, all carved in +relief and gilded. Three in particular attracted their attention. The first was +a body with three heads, which looked at one another: they believed they saw in +it a vague symbol of the Trinity. The second was a woman who held a little +infant in her arms; they called her the Virgin Mother and the Divine Infant. The +third represented to them an apostle. The monks having been to examine the gates +of the city, this demand awakened the suspicions of the viceroy, who would +seldom permit them to go out after. Upon his desiring to see some piece of +writing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxi" id="Page_lxxi">[lxxi]</a></span> +by their hand, they copied for him the Lord's Prayer and the Ten Commandments, +putting the Chinese translation to the Spanish text; and the viceroy took great +pleasure in reading them. He only retarded their departure till the arrival of +the visitor of the province, who desired to see them. The curiosity of this +functionary once satisfied, he gave them rich presents for the Spanish governor +of the Philippines, saying that they might return when they brought Limahon dead +or alive. They then left Aucheo to return to Chincheo, where they made no +lengthened stay, the mandarin of this town attending them to the port of +Tansuso. After fresh entertainments, the Chinese captain who had brought them, +was charged with the task of reconducting them to Manilla, and they embarked on +the 14th of September 1575. <i>En route</i>, they learned that Limahon, who +had been blocked up by the Spaniards, had contrived to escape with part of his +troops, and had gained the island of Formosa.</p> +<p>The flight of Limahon disconcerted the Chinese captain who brought back the +missionaries, and who feared that he should be disgraced on this account when he +returned to China. This captain, to whom they explained the principal points of +the Christian faith, would have embraced it, had he not feared the punishment +inflicted in his country on those who forsake the national religion. He said +even that they would easily succeed in converting the Chinese, if they could +first gain over the emperor, by means of an embassy sent to him by the King of +Spain.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxii" id="Page_lxxii">[lxxii]</a></span></p> +<p>Herrada, thus prevented from preaching, had not been idle during his stay in +China; he composed a vocabulary of the Chinese language, now apparently unknown, +and drew up a succinct account of his voyage, respecting which we translate some +very curious remarks by the Friar Geronimo de Ramon, in his <i>Republicas del +Mundo</i>. He says that this treatise fell into his hands, but was taken away +by some one, he could not tell by whom, and never returned to him; a +circumstance which caused him much annoyance, because he wished to write the <i> +Republic of China</i>; but it turned out, he says, the better for him, for he +wrote in consequence to the Licenciate Juan de Rada, Alcalde of the Upper Court +of Navarre and brother of Martin, who sent him a great number of interesting +papers of his brother's. He then proceeds to speak of the high respectability +and credibility of De Rada, on account of his rank and distinguished piety. An +original letter by De Rada, however, giving a succinct account of his embassy is +inserted by the Friar Gaspar de San Augustin, in his <i>Conquistas de las Islas +Philipinas</i>, to which we refer the reader for full accounts of all the +movements of those zealous preachers of the gospel in the Philippines and in +China at that early period.</p> +<p>De Rada's treatise formed the basis of the narrative compiled by Mendoza, +which is now republished. On his return from China, his ship being stranded on +the island of Bolinao, he and his companions were stript of everything and left +naked; but were saved by the providential arrival of a Spanish armament, which<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxiii" id="Page_lxxiii">[lxxiii]</a></span> +conducted them safe to Manilla, where he died in 1577.</p> +<p>His narrative was transmitted to Philip II, in the year 1576, by the hands of +his companion, the Friar Geronimo Marin, and the king consequently nominated +three ambassadors; viz., Marin, the Father Juan Gonzalez de Mendoza (the +compiler of the work now reprinted, a native of Toledo, and who had left the +career of a soldier for the garb of a monk of the order of St. Augustine), and +Father Francisco de Ortega: all these were Augustinians. They were dispatched to +Mexico for the purpose of making suitable additions to the costly presents +provided by the king; but the viceroy of Mexico, instead of favouring their +immediate departure, threw so many obstacles in the way, that it was not till +1584 that the embassy was carried out, and it ultimately proved a complete +failure.</p> +<p>Meanwhile the work of evangelization was not confined to the Augustinians. +Some Franciscans of the province of St. Joseph, in Spain, were sent to their +assistance, and among these Pedro de Alfaro, the narrative of whose adventures +is given by Mendoza in the second book of the second part. The place and date of +his birth are not recorded. We know only that he arrived in Manilla from Spain +on the 2nd July 1578, with fourteen brothers of his order, of which he was the +superior, to assume the post of chief "costodio" of the province of St. Gregory +in Luzon, and that he built a church in that city. On his arrival, he soon +became acquainted with the mission of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxiv" id="Page_lxxiv">[lxxiv]</a></span> +Martin de Rada in China, and conceived an earnest desire to penetrate that +almost inaccessible empire. He therefore solicited permission for that purpose +from Francisco de Sande, Alcalde of the royal audience of Mexico, Governor of +the Philippines; but the failure of the former mission, and the fear of +compromising the newly opened relations between the countries, caused a refusal. +Upon this the zealous missionary resolved upon embarking without permission. He +took with him Juan Bautista de Pizaro, Augustin de Tordesilla, and Sebastiano de +Becotia, all three Franciscans, three Spanish soldiers, four natives of the +Philippines, and a young Chinese taken from Limahon, to serve as an interpreter.</p> +<p>Without any nautical experience, they trusted themselves to a little boat, +and managed to pass, as if by miracle, through the fleet of vessels which +guarded the coast, and entered the port of Canton. On being led before a judge +and asked what they sought, and how they had found their way, they freely stated +the facts, and announced that their wish was to teach the way to heaven to the +inhabitants of China. A native Christian, however, who acted as interpreter, +considering his and their safety rather than the truth, adroitly modified their +statement, and declared that they were holy men like the bonzes, that they had +had no idea of visiting China, but in sailing from the Philippines to the +Hilocos they had suffered shipwreck and lost most of their crew. Their only +resource had been this little bark, which had unexpectedly brought them into +this unknown<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxv" id="Page_lxxv">[lxxv]</a></span> +port. The mandarin who examined them enquired what they had in the vessel, and +was told that they had no weapons or merchandize, but only their books and +articles used in their worship. He was much interested with the sight of these +when they were brought, but expressed surprise that they had been saved in such +a storm. The ingenious interpreter replied, that they had been saved as the most +valuable objects they possessed. The result of this examination was a formal +permission to land. They were not, however, allowed to preach. For some time +they suffered much from want, but were at length liberally supplied from the +public funds with the necessaries of life. Misrepresentations meanwhile were +made respecting them, which subjected them to a second lengthy examination, +which resulted in their being sent to Fucheou by order of the viceroy of that +city, in order that everything they possessed might be inspected. This journey +enabled them to make the observations on the country recorded by Mendoza in the +second volume. The viceroy asked them some questions and handed them over to his +deputy, who treated them with much courtesy. After a stay of several days in +Fucheou, the Timpintao or deputy sent them back to Canton, upon arriving at +which place they were ordered to prepare to leave the kingdom. This command, in +their then state of destitution, overwhelmed them with dismay, and they made +strenuous efforts, but without success, to gain some assistance in these trying +circumstances. Some of them received a licence to go to Macao, and others<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxvi" id="Page_lxxvi">[lxxvi]</a></span> +to Luzon. Those who resolved upon returning to the Philippines proceeded to +Tsiuencheu, where they embarked, and reached Luzon on the 2nd February 1580.</p> +<p>The various and repeated disasters, consequent upon the zealous efforts of +these adventurous friars, may well explain the failure of the mission of which +Mendoza was a member. As a compensation for his failure, however, he adopted a +course which was calculated to be far more practically useful. He collected the +accounts of the various Portuguese and Spanish priests, which have been already +alluded to; viz., Gaspar da Cruz, Martin de Rada, Pedro de Alfaro, etc., and +brought them together into one volume for publication. In this task he must have +received valuable assistance from his colleague in the mission, Geronimo de +Marin, who, in company with De Rada, had been an eye-witness of the most +important facts detailed throughout the work. To these were added, as a sort of +appendix, an "Itinerario del Nuevo Mundo", in which is inserted a comparatively +short account of the adventures of another party of Franciscans in China, in the +year 1581, at the head of whom was Father Martin Ignazio [de Loyola], a relation +of the celebrated founder of the Jesuits. It is but a repetition of similar +disasters to those already recounted, the whole party narrowly escaping with +their lives.</p> +<p>The ill success of the Augustinians and Franciscans did not deter the +well-known perseverance of the Jesuits, who, of all the monkish orders, have<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxvii" id="Page_lxxvii">[lxxvii]</a></span> +undoubtedly done the most for the diffusion of Christianity; and although it is +not our province here to relate the details of their progress, it appears but an +interesting sequel to the discouragements we have related, to mention the final +triumph of the eminent Matteo Ricci, in the year 1600, in gaining access to the +emperor at Pekin, and being finally permitted to settle in that capital. Nor can +we refrain in this place, and at this particular juncture of Chinese affairs, +from presenting the reader with the following translated extract from a letter +written by that distinguished man in 1584, together with some observations by +its recipient, one Geronimo Roman, factor of the Philippines at Macao. The +document referred to was first printed by M. Ternaux Compans, in his <i> +Archives des Voyages, ou collection d'anciennes relations inédites ou très-rares</i>, +and is, as he observes, especially curious for the suggestions it contains with +reference to the conquest of China. It is as follows:—</p> +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>"The power of China rests rather upon the great number of towns and the +multitude of inhabitants, than upon the valour of the people. There are more +than sixty millions of rated persons inscribed on the royal registers, exclusive +of the public functionaries and those people who are too poor to pay taxes. All +the neighbouring kingdoms pay tribute to the King of China, excepting Japan, +which has freed itself recently; it is on this account that the Chinese are +accustomed to consider their country as the centre of the world, and to despise +all other nations. They are very much dreaded by all the kings in the vicinity,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxviii" id="Page_lxxviii">[lxxviii]</a></span> +because they can assemble, in a moment, so considerable a fleet, that it +frightens them by the number of vessels; the Chinese, however, are but poor +warriors, and the military is one of the four conditions which are considered +mean among them. Nearly all the soldiers are malefactors, who have been +condemned to perpetual slavery in the king's service; they are only fit to war +with thieves. Thus, whenever two or three Japanese vessels happen to make a +descent upon the coast, the crews penetrate into the interior, even seize upon +the large towns, pillage and put everything to fire and sword, and no one dares +to resist them. But, being badly led themselves, they always end by falling into +some ambuscade, and very few of them return to Japan. It also happens sometimes +that brigands intrench themselves upon a mountain, in the interior of the +country, and all the force of the empire is insufficient to dislodge them. It is +said, moreover, that the Tartars ravage the frontiers of the empire; in short, +it appears to me the most difficult thing in the world to regard the Chinese as +warriors. They have no more spirit than women, and are ready to kiss the feet of +any one who shows his teeth at them. They spend two hours every morning in +combing and plaiting their hair. Running away is no dishonour with them; they do +not know what an insult is; if they quarrel they abuse one another like women, +seize each other by the hair, and when they are weary of scuffling become +friends again as before, without wounds or bloodshed. Moreover it is only the +soldiers who are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxix" id="Page_lxxix">[lxxix]</a></span> +armed; others are not permitted to have even a knife in their houses; in short, +they are only formidable from their numbers. The walls of the towns are, at +most, but fit to protect them from robbers; they are built without any +geometrical knowledge, and have neither <i>revers</i> nor ditches....</p> +<p>"The above is [an extract from] Father Resi [Ricci]'s letter forwarded to me +by Father Ruggiero; I think it necessary to add the following observations:—</p> +<div class="blockquot"> +<p>"The King of China maintains a numerous fleet on this coast, although he is +not at war with any one. In an island called Lintao, which is situated near this +town [Macao], there is an arsenal, the director or haytao of which is +continually occupied in superintending the building and equipment of vessels. +The island furnishes timber, but every other necessary for them has to be +imported from the continent. There are always more than two hundred and fifty +armed vessels in this province of Canton, as far as Chincheo, where a separate +jurisdiction begins, and the coasts of which are guarded by another fleet. The +admiral has the title of Chunpin; it is a very high rank, although inferior to +the tutan; he has a numerous guard and many drums and trumpets, which make a +most agreeable music to the ears of the Chinese, but an insufferable din to +ours.</p> +<p>"These vessels go out a little when it is fine weather, but hasten back at +the least wind. They have some small iron guns, but none of bronze; their powder +is bad, and never made use of but in firing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxx" id="Page_lxxx">[lxxx]</a></span> +salutes; their arquebuses are so badly made that the ball would not pierce an +ordinary cuirass, especially as they do not know how to aim. Their arms are +bamboo pikes, some pointed with iron, others hardened by fire; short and heavy +scimitars, and cuirasses of iron or tin. Sometimes a hundred vessels are seen to +surround a single corsair, those which are to windward throw out powdered lime +to blind the enemy, and, as they are very numerous, it produces some effect. +This is one of their principal warlike stratagems. The corsairs are generally +Japanese or revolted Chinese.</p> +<p>"The soldiers of this country are a disgraceful set. The other day they had a +quarrel with some other Chinese who were carrying provisions to market, and beat +them; the latter went to complain to the governor of Macao, who caused forty +soldiers to be arrested and beaten with bamboos. They came out afterwards crying +like children. They are mean, spiritless, and badly armed knaves. There is +nothing formidable in thousands of such soldiers. Besides what can the soldiers +be in a country where their position is looked upon as dishonourable and +occupied by slaves. Our Indians of the Philippines are ten times more +courageous.</p> +<p>"With five thousand Spaniards, at the most, the conquest of this country +might be made, or at least of the maritime provinces, which are the most +important in all parts of the world. With half a dozen galleons, and as many +galleys, one would be master of all the maritime provinces of China, as well as +of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxxi" id="Page_lxxxi">[lxxxi]</a></span> +all that sea and the archipelago which extends from China to the Moluccas."</p> +</div> +</div> +<p>Mendoza's work was first published at Rome in 1585, in a small octavo form, +under the following title:</p> +<div class="blockquot"> + <p>"Historia de las cosas mas notables, ritos y +costumbres del gran reyno de la China, sabidas assi por los libros de los mesmos +Chinas, como por relacion de religiosos y otras personas que an estado en el +dicho reyno. Hecha y ordenada por el mvy R. P. Maestro Fr. Joan Gonzalez de +Mendoça de la orden de S. Agustin, y penitenciario appostolico a quien la +Magestad Catholica embio con su real carta y otras cosas para el Rey de aquel +reyno el año 1580. Al illustrissimo S. Fernando de Vega y Fonseca del consejo de +su Magestad y su presidente en el Real de las Indias. Con vn Itinerario del +nueuo Mundo. <i>Con privilegio y licencia de su Sanctidad.</i> En Roma, a +costa de Bartholome Grassi, 1585, en la stampa de Vincentio Accolti."</p> +</div> +<p>This edition, of which there is a copy in the British Museum, having on its +title-page the autograph of Sir Hans Sloane—is described by Brunet as "rare". +The text comprises four hundred and forty pages: it is preceded by the Latin +Privilege of Pope Sixtus V, dated June 13th; Mendoza's dedication to Fernando de +Vega, dated Rome, June 17th; a note or post-script "al lector", in which Mendoza +alludes to the recent receipt of letters from Father Andres de Aguirre, +provincial of the Philippines, conveying the startling intelligence that the +King of China and his subjects were ready and willing to embrace the Catholic<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxxii" id="Page_lxxxii">[lxxxii]</a></span> +faith; this is followed by Mendoza's Preface to the reader, and two sonnets in +Spanish, the first entitled: "Soneto de ... en la reduçion del Reyno de la China +a la Iglesia Catholica." This interesting and important little volume is also +remarkable as being the first European work in which Chinese characters were +printed.</p> +<p>We learn from Brunet that two editions of the original Spanish were published +the following year (1586), one at Madrid, the other at Barcelona: it was again +printed at Medina del Campo in 1595, and at Antwerp in 1596.</p> +<p>An Italian translation by Francesco Avanzo was published at Venice in 1586, +8vo.; at Rome and Genoa in the same year, 4to.; and again at Venice in 1587, in +12mo.; 1588 and 1590 in 8vo.</p> +<p>The English and French translations appeared in the same year, viz., 1588; +the rare black-letter English version now reprinted, being made by Parke at the +instance of Hakluyt himself, as we learn from the translator's dedication to the +celebrated navigator Thomas "Candish" (Cavendish), which is dated on new-year's +day, 1589.</p> +<p>The French translation, which was made by Luc de la Porte, was reprinted at +Paris in 1589 and 1600; and with a slightly varied title at Geneva in 1606, at +Lyon in 1606, and at Rouen in 1604.</p> +<p>A Latin version by Marcus Henning was published at Frankfort in 1589, 8vo.; +and that by Joachimus Brulius appeared at Antwerp in 1655, 4to.</p> +<p>Adelung (<i>Fortsetzung zu Jöchers Lexikon</i>) states that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_lxxxiii" id="Page_lxxxiii">[lxxxiii]</a></span> +a German version was published at Frankfort in 1589, 4to.</p> +<p>On his return, as a recompense for his services, Mendoza was made bishop of +Lipari in 1593. In 1607 he went to America with the title of Vicar Apostolic, +and in the same year was made bishop of Chiapa; and in 1608 was translated to +the bishopric of Popayan. He was the author of several other works, historical +and theological. The year of his death is not exactly known, but it was about +the year 1620. Ossinger, in his <i>Bibliotheca Augustiniana</i>, describes him +as a most eminent historian, a very eloquent orator, and a highly accomplished +preacher.</p> + +<h2 class="p6">THE HISTORIE OF THE<br /><br /> +<span class="s09">GREAT AND MIGHTIE KINGDOME</span><br /><br /> +<span class="s08">OF CHINA, AND THE SITUATION</span><br /> +<span class="s07">THEREOF:</span><br /><br /> +<br /> +<span class="s09">Togither with the great riches, huge</span><br /><br /> +<span class="s08">citties, politike gouernement, and</span><br /><br /> +<span class="s07">rare inuentions in the same.</span></h2> + +<div class="figcenter"> +<img src="images/i089.jpg" width="167" height="93" alt="Decoration 1" /> +</div> + +<p class="center p2">Translated out of Spanish by <i>R. Parke</i>.</p> + +<p class="center p6"><span class="s06">TO THE</span><br /> +RIGHT WORSHIPFULL AND FAMOUS GENTLEMAN,<br /> +M. THOMAS CANDISH, ESQUIRE, INCREASE OF<br /> +HONOR AND HAPPIE ATTEMPTES.</p> + +<p>It is now aboue fiue and thirty yeares passed, right worshipfull, since that +young, sacred, and prudent Prince, king Edward the sixt of happie memorie, went +about the discouerie of Cathaia and China, partly of desire that the good young +king had to enlarge the Christian faith, and partlie to find out some where in +those regions ample vent of the cloth of England, for the mischiefs that grew +about that time neerer home aswell by contempt of our commodities, as by the +arrestes of his merchantes in the Empire, Flanders, France, and Spaine: +forsseeing withall how beneficiall ample vent would rise to all degrees +throughout his kingdome, and specially to the infinite number of the poore sort +distressed by lacke of worke. And although by a voyage hereuppon taken in hande +for this purpose by Sir Hugh Willobie and Richard Chauncellour, a discouerie of +the bay of Saint Nicolas in Russia fell out, and a trade with the Muscouites, +and after another trade for a time with the Persians by way of the Caspian sea +ensued, yet the discouerie of the principall intended place followed not in his +time, nor yet since, vntill you tooke your happie and renowmed voyage about the +worlde in hande, although sundrie attemptes, at the great charges of diuers +honorable and well disposed persons, and good worshipfull merchants and others +haue beene made since the death of that good king, in seeking a passage thither +both by the North-east, and by the Northwest. But since it is so (as wee<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[2]</a></span> +vnderstande) that your worshippe in your late voyage hath first of our nation in +this age discouered the famous rich ilandes of the Lu Zones, or Philippinas, +lying neare vnto the coast of China, and haue spent some time in taking good +view of the same, hauing brought home three boyes borne in Manilla, the chiefe +towne of the said Ilands, besides two other young fellowes of good capacitie, +borne in the mightie Iland of Iapon, (which hereafter may serue as our +interpretors in our first traficke thither), and that also your selfe haue +sailed along the coast of China, not farre from the Continent, and haue taken +some knowledge of the present state of the same, and in your course haue found +out a notable ample vent of our clothes, especially our kersies, and are in +preparing againe for the former voyage, as hee that would constantly perseuer in +so good an enterprise: we are to thinke that the knowledge and first discouerie +of the same, in respect of our nation, hath all this time beene by the Almightie +to you onely reserued, to your immortall glorie, and to the manifest shew of his +especiall fauour borne towards you, in that besides your high and rare attempt +of sailing about the whole globe of the earth, in so short a time of two yeares +and about two monethes, you have shewed your selfe to have that rare and +especiall care for your countrie, by seeking out vent for our clothes, that +ought vpon due consideration to moue many thousands of English subiects to pray +for you, and to loue and honor your name and familie for euer. For as you haue +opened by your attempt the gate to the spoile of the great and late mightie, +vniuersall, and infested enimie of this realme, & of al countries that professe +true religion: so haue you by your great care wrought a way to imploie the +merchants of Englande in trade, to increase our Nauie, to benefite our +Clothiers, and (your purpose falling out to your hoped effect) to releeue more +of the poorer sort, then all the hospitals and almes houses can or may, that +haue beene built in this realme, since the first inhabiting thereof.</p> +<p>And sir, if to this your late noble attempt, it might please you, by your +incouragement, and by the help of your purse to adde<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span> +your present furtherance for the passage to be discouered by the northwest, (for +proofe whereof there bee many infallible reasons, and diuerse great experiences +to be yeelded) our course with our commodities to the rich Iland of Iapon, to +the mightie empire of China, and to the Ilandes of the Philippinas, for the vent +that you haue found out, should be by the halfe way shortened, and you should +double and manyfolde treble the credite of your fourmer late enterprise, and +make your fame to mount, and yourself to liue for euer in a much higher degree +of glorie, then otherwise it might be, or that by any other mean you could +possibly deuise: In which action so highly importing the generall state of this +lande I haue perfect experience that many worshipfull and wealthie marchants of +this citie and other places would most willingly ioyne their purses with yours: +and to play the blabbe, I may tell you they attende nothing with greater desire +and expectation, then that a motion hereof being made by some happie man, your +selfe and they might friendly and seriously ioyne together for the full +accomplishing of this so long intended discouerie: And to descende to some +particulars, there is one speciall reason that giueth an edge vnto their +desires, proceeding from the late worthie attemptes of that excellent and +skilful pilot M. John Dauis, made for the search of the aforesaid northwest +passage these three late yeares, hauing entred into the same foure hundred +leagues further than was euer hitherto thoroughly knowen, and returned with an +exact description thereof, to the reasonable contentment for the time, of the +aduenturers, and chiefly of the worshipfull M. William Sanderson, whose +contributions thereunto, although they haue beene verie great and +extraordinarie, yet for the certaine hope or rather assurance that he conceiueth +vpon the report of the Captaine himselfe and all the rest of any skill employed +in these voyages, remayneth still constant, and is readie to disburse as yet to +the freshe setting on foote of this enterprise entermitted by occasion of our +late troubles, euen this yeare againe, for the finall perfection of so +profitable and honorable a discouerie, a farre greater portion then in reason +would<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span> be +required of any other man of his abilitie. And albeit, sir, that you haue taken +in your late voyage, besides the knowledge of the way to China, the intelligence +of the gouernement of the countrie and of the commodities of the territories and +prouinces of the same, and that at the full, according to the time of your short +abode in those partes, yet neuerthelesse for that of late more ample +vnderstanding hath beene in more length of time, by woonderfull great endeuour +taken by certaine learned Portingals and Spaniardes of great obseruation, and +not long agoe published in the Spanish tongue, I haue for the increase of the +knowledge of the subiectes of Englande, and specially for the illuminating of +the mindes of those that are to take the voyage next in hande to Iapan, China, +and the Philippinas, translated the same worke into English, and committed it to +print, passing ouer Paulus Venetus, and sir John Mandeuill, because they wrote +long agoe of those regions: which labour, to say trueth, I haue vndertaken at +the earnest request and encouragement of my worshipfull friend Master Richard +Hakluit late of Oxforde, a gentleman, besides his other manifolde learning and +languages, of singular and deepe insight in all histories of discouerie and +partes of cosmographie: who also for the zeale he beareth to the honour of his +countrie and countrimen, brought the same first aboue two yeares since ouer into +this court, and at this present hath in hande a most excellent and ample +collection of the sundrie trauailes and nauigations of our owne nation, a matter +long intended by him, and seruing to the like beneficiall and honorable purpose, +which I hope will shortly come to light to the great contentation of the wiser +sort.</p> +<p>In the meane season, hauing nowe at length finished according to my poore +skill and leasure this my translation, I thought best to dedicate and commende +the same to your worshipfull patronage, as the man that I holde most worthie of +the same, and most able of our nation to iudge aright of the contentes thereof, +and to correct the errors of the author whensoeuer you shall meete with them: +beseeching you to accept in good part the trauaile and good meaning<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span> +of the translator: and so wishing vnto you health, increase of knowledge, with +fortunate and glorious successe in your further couragious attempts, I leaue you +to the protection of the Almightie.</p> +<p class="i4">From London the first of Ianuarie 1589.</p> +<p class="i6">Your worships alwaies to command,</p> +<p class="i8"><span class="smcap">Robert Parke.</span></p> +<div class="figcenter p4"> +<img src="images/i095.jpg" width="200" height="108" alt="Printer's Logo" /> +</div> + +<h2 class="p6"><span class="s08">THE PRINTER,<br /> +TO THE CHRISTIAN READER.</span></h2> + +<p>Whereas (good courteous Reader) in this historie describing the kingdome of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span> +China with the countries there adiacent, thou shalt finde many times repeated, +and that in some things too gloriously, the zeale of certaine Spanish Friers +that laboured in discouerie of the saide China, and the declaration of certaine +myracles (but falsely reported) by them to haue beene wrought, togither with +examples of diuerse their superstitious practices: which happily may giue +offence vnto some in reading: thou must vnderstande that this is to be rather +imputed vnto the first writer of this historie in Spanish, than to any fault of +mine: for the Spaniardes (following their ambitious affections) doo vsually in +all their writinges extoll their owne actions, euen to the setting forth of many +vntruthes and incredible things: as in their descriptions of the conquestes of +the east and west Indies, etc., doth more at large appeare. Notwithstanding all +which, our translator (as it seemeth) hath rather chosen to be esteemed <i> +fidus interpres</i>, in truely translating the historie as it was, though +conteyning some errors, then to be accounted a patcher or corrupter of other +mens workes.</p> +<p>But howsoeuer either our first authour, or the translator, haue shewed +themselues affectioned, sure I am that the knowledge of this kingdome will not +onely be pleasant, but also verie profitable to our English nation: and by +playing the good Bee, in onely accepting herein that which is good, I doubt not, +but the reading of this historie will bring thee great contentment, and delight.</p> +<p style="text-align: right"><span class="smcap">Vale. </span></p> + +<h2 class="p6"><span class="s08">THE HISTORIE</span><br /> +<span class="s05">OF THE</span><br /> +<span class="s08">MIGHTIE KINGDOME OF CHINA,</span><br /> +<span class="s06">IN THE WHICH IS CONTAINED THE NOTABLE THINGS<br /> +OF THAT KINGDOME, TOUCHING THAT WHICH<br /> +IS NATURALL.</span></h2> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. I.</p> +<p class="intro">The description of the kingdome and the confines that it hath belonging.</p> + +<p>This great and mightie kingdome of China, which we do meane to treat of in +this Historie, hath beene discouered by cleere and true notice, within this +tenne yeares, by Spanyards that were dwellers in the Ilands Philippinas, that +are three hundreth leagues distant from the said kingdome: Notwithstanding, that +long time before, there was relation giuen, by way of the Portingall Indias, by +such as dwelt in Macao, and did trafike to Canton, a citie of the same kingdome +of China. But this was by relation so, that the one nor the other could +satisfie, for that there was founde varietie in that which was true, till the +yeere of 1577. Frier Martin de Gorrada,<a name="FNanchor_7_7" id="FNanchor_7_7"></a><a href="#Footnote_7_7" class="fnanchor">[7]</a> +prouincial of the Augustine friers, who were the first discouerers of the said +Ilands Philippinas, and ministred first the holy baptisme amongst them, with his +companions, frier Hieronimo Martin, Pedro Sarmiento, and Myghell de Loarcha, +cheefe officers of the citie of Marrila<a name="FNanchor_8_8" id="FNanchor_8_8"></a><a href="#Footnote_8_8" class="fnanchor">[8]</a> +in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span> said +Ilands, by the order and commandement of Guido de Labassares, gouernour thereof, +did enter into the saide kingdome of China, led and gouerned by a captaine +belonging to the king of the said kingdome, called Omoncon.</p> +<p>Of the comming of this Omoncon vnto the Ilands Philippinas, and of his +hardines to carrie the aforesaid vnto the firme land, he being commanded to the +contrarie vpon paine of death, and how he was receiued, and great courtesie +shewed, and of other things verie curious, you shall finde in the second part of +this historie, where as is the substance and whole relation of all that was +brought vnto the king of Spaine.</p> +<p>You shall vnderstande that this mightie kingdome is the Orientalest part of +all Asia, and his next neighbour towards the Ponent is the kingdome of +Quachinchina,<a name="FNanchor_9_9" id="FNanchor_9_9"></a><a href="#Footnote_9_9" class="fnanchor">[9]</a> +whereas they doo obserue in whole all the customes and rites of China. The +greatest part of this kingdome is watred with the great Orientall Ocean sea, +beginning at the Iland Aynan,<a name="FNanchor_10_10" id="FNanchor_10_10"></a><a href="#Footnote_10_10" class="fnanchor">[10]</a> +which is hard by Quachinchina, which is 19 degrees towards the North, and +compassing towards the South, whereas their course is northeast. And beyond +Quachinchina towards the North, the Bragmanes<a name="FNanchor_11_11" id="FNanchor_11_11"></a><a href="#Footnote_11_11" class="fnanchor">[11]</a> +do confine, which are much people, and verie rich, of golde, siluer, and +pretious stones, but in especiall, rubies: for there are infinit. They are +proude and hawtie men, of great corage, wel made, but of browne colour: they +haue had (but few times) warre with them of China, in respect for that betwixt +both the kingdomes, there are great and mightie mountaines and rockes that doth +disturbe them. And harde vnto this nation ioyneth the Patanes<a name="FNanchor_12_12" id="FNanchor_12_12"></a><a href="#Footnote_12_12" class="fnanchor">[12]</a> +and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span> Mogores,<a name="FNanchor_13_13" id="FNanchor_13_13"></a><a href="#Footnote_13_13" class="fnanchor">[13]</a> +which is a great kingdome, and warlike people, whose head<a name="FNanchor_14_14" id="FNanchor_14_14"></a><a href="#Footnote_14_14" class="fnanchor">[14]</a> +is the Gran Samarzan:<a name="FNanchor_15_15" id="FNanchor_15_15"></a><a href="#Footnote_15_15" class="fnanchor">[15]</a> +They are the true Scythas or Massagetas, of whom it is affirmed that they were +neuer ouercome by any other nation: they are a people well proportioned and +white: by reason they dwel in a cold countrie. Betwixt the West and the South is +the Trapobana, or Samatra, a kingdome very rich of gold, pretious stones, & +pearles: and more towards the South, are the two Iauas, the great and the lesse, +and the kingdome of the Lechios:<a name="FNanchor_16_16" id="FNanchor_16_16"></a><a href="#Footnote_16_16" class="fnanchor">[16]</a> +and in equall distance, are the Iapones: yet notwithstanding those that are more +indifferent to this kingdome are the Tartarians, which are on the selfe firme +land or continent, and are alonely diuided by a wal, as shal be declared in the +9 chapter of this booke. These Tartarians haue had many times wars with them of +China: but at one time (as you shall perceive) they got the whole kingdome of +China, and did possesse the same for the space of 93 yeares, till such time as +they of China did rebell and forced them out again. At this day they say that +they are friends one with another, and that is, for that they bee all Gentiles, +and do vse all one manner of ceremonies and rites. They doo differ in their +clenes<a name="FNanchor_17_17" id="FNanchor_17_17"></a><a href="#Footnote_17_17" class="fnanchor">[17]</a> +and lawes, in the which the Chinas doth exceede them very much. The Tartarians +are very yellow and not so white: and they go naked from the girdlested vpwards, +and they eate raw flesh, and do annoint themselues with the blood of raw flesh, +for to make them more harder and currish, by reason whereof they doo so stinke, +that if the aire doth come from that part where they be, you shall smel them +afar off by the strong sauor. They haue for certainty, the truth of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span> +the immortalitie of the soule (although it be with error), for they say that the +soule doth enter into other bodies, and that soule that liued well in the first +bodie, doth better it from poore to rich, or from age to youth: and if it liued +evill, to the contrarie in worse. The sons of the Tartarians do very much +obserue and keepe the commandement in obeying their parents, for that they doo +wholly accomplish the same without failing any iot of their will, vnder paine to +be seuerly and publikelie punished. They confess one God, whom they worship, and +haue him in their houses carved or painted, and every day they doe offer vnto it +incense, or some other sweet smelles: they do call him the high God, and do +craue of him vnderstanding and health. They haue also another god, which they +say is son vnto the other; they do call him Natigay: this is their god of +terestriall things. They haue him likewise in their houses, and every time they +go to eate they doo annoint his face with the fattest thing they haue to eate: +that being doone they fall to eating, hauing first giuen their gods their +pitance. They are a kinde of people that verie seldome doo fable a lie, although +their liues should lie thereon, and are verie obedient vnto their king: but in +speciall in their warres, in the which euerie one doth that he is appointed to +doo: they are led by the sound of a drome or trumpet, with the which their +captaines do gouerne them with great ease, by reason that they are trained vp in +the same from their youth. And many other things are amongst them, in the which +they do resemble them of China, (who) if they did receiue the faith of our Lord +Jesu Christ, it is to be belieued that the Tartarians would do the same, for +that they are taken for men very ducible, and do imitate verie much them of +China.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. II.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the temperature of the kingdome of China.</p> + +<p>The temperature of this mightie kingdome is diuersly, by reason that almost +the whole bignesse therof is from the south to the north, in so great a length +that the iland of Aynan being neere vnto this land, in 19 degrees of altitude, +have notice of some prouinces that are in more than 50 degrees, and yet they do +vnderstand that beyond that there bee more vpon the confines of Tartaria. It is +a strange thing to be seene, the strange and great difference betwixt the +colours of the dwellers of this kingdome. In Canton, a mightie citie, whereas +the Portingales had ordinarie trafficke with them of China, for that it was nigh +vnto Macao, where as they had inhabited long since, and from whence they do +bring all such merchandise as is brought into Europe. There is seene great +diuersities in the colours of such people as doe come thither to trafficke, as +the said Portingales do testifie.</p> +<p>Those which are borne in the citie of Canton, and in al that cost, are browne +people, like vnto them in the citie of Fez or Barbarie, for that all the whole +countrie is in the said paralel that Barberie is in. And they of the most +prouinces inwards are white people, some more whiter than others, as they draw +into the cold countrie. Some are like vnto Spanyards, and others more yealow, +like vnto the Almans,<a name="FNanchor_18_18" id="FNanchor_18_18"></a><a href="#Footnote_18_18" class="fnanchor">[18]</a> +yelow and red colour.</p> +<p>Finally, in all this mightie kingdome, to speake generally, they cannot say +that there is much cold or much heat, for that the geographers do conclude and +say it is temperate, and is vnder a temperate clime, as is Italy or other +temperate countries, wherby may be vnderstood the fertilitie of the same, which +is (without doubt) the fertilest in all the world,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span> +and may compare with the Peru and Nuoua Espannia, which are two kingdomes +celebrated to be most fertill: and for the verification, you shall perceiue in +this chapter next folowing, wherin is declared such things as it doth yeeld and +bring forth, and in what quantitie. And yet aboue all things (according unto the +sayings of fryer Herrada,<a name="FNanchor_19_19" id="FNanchor_19_19"></a><a href="#Footnote_19_19" class="fnanchor">[19]</a> +prouinciall, and his companions, whose relation I will follow in the most part +of this hystorie, as witnesses of sight), vnto whom we may giue certaine +credite, without any exception. They say that the countrie is so full of youth +that it seemeth the women are deliuered euery moneth, and their children, when +they are little, are extreame faire; and the country is so fertill and fat, that +it yeldeth fruit three or four times in the yeere, which is the occasion that +all things is so good cheape, that almost it seemeth they sell them for nothing.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. III.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the fertilitie of this kingdome, and of such fruits and other things +as it doth yeld.</p> + +<p>The inhabitants in this countrie are perswaded, of a truth, that those which +did first finde and inhabite in this lande, were the nevewes of Noe (who, after +they had traueiled from Armenia, wheras the arke stayed, wherin God did preserue +their grandfather from the waters of the flood), went seeking a land to their +contentment; and not finding a countrie of so great fertilitie and temperature +like vnto this, wherein was all things necessarie for the life of man, without +comparison: they were compelled, with the aboundance thereof, to inhabite +therein, vnderstanding that if they should search throughout all the world, they +should not finde the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span> +like; and I thinke they were not deceiued, according as now it is to be seene, +and what may be considered in the proces of this chapter, of such fruits as the +earth doth yeeld. And although there is declared here of such as shall suffice +in this worke, yet is there left behind a great number more; of whose +properties, as well of herbes and beasts, which of their particulars may be made +a great volume, and I doo beleeue that in time there will be one set forth.</p> +<p>The great trauell and continual laboure of the inhabitants of this countrie, +is a great helpe vnto the goodnes and fertilitie therof, and is so much that +they do neither spare nor leaue mountains nor vallies, neither riuers, but they +do sow and plant all such things as they perceiue that the place wil yeeld, +according unto the goodnesse thereof: as orchards with fruite, great fields of +wheat, barlie, rice, flaxe and hempe, with many other things: all which traueile +vnto them is verie easie, remembering with what great libertie they do inioy +their goods, and the great and infinit number of people that there is, as well +for handie craftes as for to till and cultiuate the grounde. In all this mightie +countrie they do not suffer vacabunds nor idle people, but all such (ouer and +aboue that they are greeuouslie punished), they are holden for infamous: neither +doo they consent nor permit any of them that are naturally borne there to go out +of their countries into other strange countries; neither haue they any wars at +this present, which was the thing that in times past did consume much of their +people. The king dooth content himselfe onely with his owne kingdome (as one +that is helde the wisest in all the world). Beside all this, they are naturally +inclined to eate and drinke wel, and to make much of themselves in apparel, and +to haue their houses well furnished with household stuffe; and to the augmenting +hereof, they do put themselues in great labor and trauaile, and are great +dealers and trafickers: al which, with the fertilitie of the countrie aboue +said, is the occasion that iustlie it might<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> +haue the name to be the most fertilest in all the whole world.</p> + +<p>This country doth yeeld all kind of herbs, as doth Spaine, and of many kindes +mo: also all manner of fruites, like as in Spaine, with diuers other sorts, the +names whereof are not yet knowne, for that they do differ very much from ours; +but yet the one and the other are of a marueilous excellent tast, as they doo +say. They haue three sorts of orenges, the one verie sweete, which doth exceede +sugar in their sweetnesse: the other sort not so sweet as the first: the third +sort are somewhat sower, but verie delightfull in the tast. Also they haue a +kinde of plummes<span class="sidenote">Excellent plummes.</span>, that they doo +call <i>lechias</i>,<a name="FNanchor_20_20" id="FNanchor_20_20"></a><a href="#Footnote_20_20" class="fnanchor">[20]</a> +that are of an exceeding gallant tast, and neuer hurteth any body, although they +shoulde eate a great number of them. It yeldeth great aboundance of great +melons, and of an excellent sauour and tast, and verie bigge. Also a kinde of +russet appels that be very great, of a good tast. I doo not heere declare of +other fruites, nor of their names, because I will not seeme tedious vnto the +reader, nor spende the time herein, but will treat of other things of more +importance.</p> + +<p>In all parts of this kingdome there is great store of sugar<span class="sidenote">Excellent white sugar good cheape.</span>, which is the +occasion that it is so good cheape: for you shall have a quintal of verie +excellent white and good sugar, when it is most deerest, for the value of sixe +ryals of plate. There is great abundance of honie, for that their delight is in +hiues, by reason whereof not only honie<span class="sidenote">Honie and wax.</span>, but waxe is very good cheape; and there +is so great quantity therof, that you may lade ships, yea fleetes thereof. They +do make great store of silke<span class="sidenote">Excellent good silke.</span>, and excellent good, and give it verie perfite +colours, which dooth exceed very much the silke of Granada, and is one of the +greatest trades that is in all that kingdome.</p> + +<p>The veluets, damaskes, sattens, and other sortes of webs, which is there +made, is of so small a price, that it is a wonder to speake it, in especiall +unto them that doo know how their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span> +prises be in Spaine and in Italie. They do sell none of their silkes there by +the yard, neither any other kinde of websterie, though it be lynnen; but by the +waight, wherein there is least deceit. They haue great store of flaxe<span class="sidenote">Great store of flaxe and hempe.</span>, wherwith +the common people doo apparell themselues: also hempe for the cawlking of their +ships, and to make ropes and hasers. And on their drie and tough landes, +although they be stonie, they gather great stoore of cotton wooll<span class="sidenote">Cotton, wool, wheat, and barlie, rie, oates.</span>. They doo sowe +wheate, barlie, rye, and oates, and manie other kindes of graine; and the one +and the other doo yeelde great increase. In the marrish groundes (of which there +be many), by reason of moyst and great aboundance of riuers that be in this +countrie, they doo sowe rice<span class="sidenote">Great abundance of rice.</span>, which is a common victuall or maintiniment vnto +all people of the kingdome, and vnto them that dwell neere them; and they doo +gather so greate aboundance that when it is most dearest you shall haue a haneg<a name="FNanchor_21_21" id="FNanchor_21_21"></a><a href="#Footnote_21_21" class="fnanchor">[21]</a> +for a ryall of plate: of the which, and of all other graines aforesaid, the +countrie was woont to yeeld them, and foure times in the yeere there increase.</p> + +<p>On their high grounds, that are not good to be sowne, there is great store of +pine trees, which yeelde fruite very sauorie: chestnuts<span class="sidenote">Chestnuts.</span> greater, and of better +tast, then commonly you shall finde in Spaine: and yet betwixt these trees they +do sow maiz, which is the ordinarie foode of the Indians of Mexico and Peru, and +great store of panizo,<a name="FNanchor_22_22" id="FNanchor_22_22"></a><a href="#Footnote_22_22" class="fnanchor">[22]</a> +so that they doe not leaue one foote of grounde vnsowen. And of trueth, almost +in all the whole countrie, you shall not finde any ground that is barren or +without profite, what by the naturall vertue of the country, and also by the +manuring and helping of it.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. IV.</p> +<p class="intro">Here I do proceed in the fertilitie of this kingdome, and of such things +as it doth yeeld.</p> + +<p>Besides the fertilitie of this countrie beforesaide, all the fields be verie +faire to behold, and yeelde maruelous odoriferous smelles, by reason of the +great quantitie of sweete flowers of diuers sorts. It is also garnished with the +greene trees that be planted by the riuers sides and brookes, whereof there is +great quantitie. And there is planted there orchards and gardens, with banketing +houses of great pleasure, the which they doo vse verie much for their recreation +and auoiding the troubles of minde. The Loytias, or gentlemen, doo vse to plant +great forrests and thicke woods, whereas doo breed many wilde boores, bucks, +hares, and conyes, and diuers other beasts<span class="sidenote">All kind of beasts.</span>: of whose skins they make very +excellent furres<span class="sidenote">Excellent furres, muske.</span>, but in especiall of <i>martas ceuellias</i>,<a name="FNanchor_23_23" id="FNanchor_23_23"></a><a href="#Footnote_23_23" class="fnanchor">[23]</a> +of which there is a great number. There is great aboundance of muske, the which +they do make of a little beast that doth feede of nothing else but of a roote +which is of a maruellous smell, that is called camarus, as big as a man's +finger. They do take them and beat them with blowes till they be brused all to +peeces; then they do put them in a place whereas they may soonest putrifie; but +first they do bind very fast such parts whereas the blood may run out of their +brused bones, all to peces, remaining within them. Then after, when they thinke +they be putrified, then they do cut out smal peeces, with skinne and all, and +tie them vp like bals or cods, which the Portugals (who doth by them) do call <i> +papos</i>: and this is the finest that is brought out of all Indies (if there +be no deceit vsed in it), for many times they will put amongst it small peeces +of lead, and other things of weight. There is also great store<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span> +of kyne, that are so little worth that you may buy a very good one for eight +rials of plate; and beefes<span class="sidenote">Great store of beefes.</span>, that are bought for halfe the mony: one whole +venison is bought for two rials; great store of hogs, whose flesh is as holsome +and good as our mutton in Spaine. There is great aboundance of goates<span class="sidenote">Deere, hogs, and goates.</span>, and of +other beasts that are to be eaten, which is the occasion that they are of little +value. The flying foules that doo breed about the lakes and riuers are of so +great quantitie<span class="sidenote">Great store of wildfoule.</span> that there is spent daily, in small villages in that countrie, +many thousands, and the greatest sort of them are teales. The fashion how they +do breed and bring them vp shal be declared in a chapter particularly; for that +which is said shal not seeme impossible. They be sold by waight<span class="sidenote">Foule solde by waight.</span>, and likewise +capons and hens, and for so smal value that two pounds of their flesh being +plucked, is worth ordinarily two Foys, which is a kinde of mony like vnto the +quartes<a name="FNanchor_24_24" id="FNanchor_24_24"></a><a href="#Footnote_24_24" class="fnanchor">[24]</a> +of Spaine; hogs flesh, two pounds for a Foy and a halfe, which is six marauadiz. +Likewise all other victuals after the same rate, as it doth plainly appeare by +the relation made by the friers.</p> + +<p>There are also many herbs for medicines, as very fine reubarbe<span class="sidenote">Reubarbe and other medicinall hearbs.</span>, +and of great +quantitie, and wood called Palo de China; great store of nutmegs, with the which +they may lade fleetes, and of so lowe a price that you may buy foure hundreth +for a ryall of plate; and cloues, sixe pound for halfe a ryall of plate; and the +<span class="sidenote">Foure hundred of nutmegs for six-pence. Cloues, sixe pound for 3 pence; the like of pepper.</span> +like in pepper. Synamon, one rowe, which is 25 pound, for four ryals of plate, +and better cheape. I do leave to speake of many other hearbs medicinable and +profitable for the vse of man: for that if I should write the particular vertue +of euerie of them, it would require a great volume. Of fish, both swimming and +shell fish of all sorts, that they haue with them is to be wondred at: not onely +vpon the sea coasts, but also in the remote places of that kingdome, by reason +of the great riuers, which be nauigable vnto such places. Besides all this it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span> +is verie rich of mines of golde and siluer, and other mettals, the which (gold +and siluer excepted) they do sell it so good cheape that a quintal of copper, +<span class="sidenote">Mines of gold and siluer and other mettals. Iron and +Steele 4 shilling a quintal. Siluer is worth more than gold. Great store of +pearles.</span> +yron, or steele is to be bought for eight rials of plate. Gold is better cheape +there then it is in Europe, but siluer is more woorth. There is founde great +store of pearles in all this kingdome: but the most part of them are not rounde, +by the which you may gather and vnderstande the goodnesse and fertilitie of the +same. And that the first that did discouer and inhabite that kingdome were not +deceiued, for that they founde all things necessarie vnto the preseruing of the +life of man, and that in aboundance: for the which, with iust reason, the +inhabitants may thinke themselues to possesse the best and fertilest kingdome in +all the whole world.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. V.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the antiquitie of this kingdome.</p> + +<p>As before is said, this kingdome is of so ancient antiquity, that there is +opinion that the first that did inhabite this countrie, were the neuewes of Noe. +But the light which is found in the histories of China, is that from the time of +Vitey, who was their first king, and did reduce their kingdome vnto an empire, +and hath and doth indure vnto the king that now rayneth: as you shall vnderstand +in the place where we shall make mention of the kings of that countrie, whereas +you shal vnderstand by iust computations, that vnto this day, there hath rayned, +naturall and vsurped, to the number of 243 kings<span class="sidenote">243 kings.</span>. The sonne doth succeede the +father in the kingdome, and for want of a sonne, the next kinsman doth succeed: +and for that they do take (after the vse of the emperors of Turkie) so many +wiues as pleaseth them: it seldome falleth out to lacke heires, for that the +first sonne that is borne of either of his wiues is right heire vnto the +kingdome: and the rest of his sonnes he doth appoint them<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span> +cities where as they do dwel priuately: and there they are prouided of all +things necessarie for them, conformable vnto their degrees, with expresse +commission vpon paine of death neuer to go out of them, neither to returne vnto +the court, except they be sent for by the king. So after this conclusion, all +those that are kinsfolke vnto the king, are resident and kept in a mightie and +populous citie, called Causi,<a name="FNanchor_25_25" id="FNanchor_25_25"></a><a href="#Footnote_25_25" class="fnanchor">[25]</a> +whereas those whome the king and his counsel do thinke and see to be men of +great wisdome, or giuen to martiall affaires, they doo commande that they neuer +goe forth of their houses, to auoide occasions of suspition whereby might grow +alterations and treasons against the king. The dwelling places of these +prouinces, are mightie and of a huge bignesse: for that within the compasse of +them, they haue all manner of contentment necessary for them: as gardens, +orchards, fishing ponds of diuers sorts, parkes and groues, in the which are all +kinde flying foules, fish and beasts, as are to be found in the mountaines and +riuers. And it is walled round about with a stone wall, so that euery house of +these seemeth to be a towne. They giue themselues much vnto musike, wherewith +they doo passe away the time. And for that they are giuen to pleasure and ease, +they are commonly corpulent and fatte, verie faire conditioned and quiet, +liberall vnto strangers. These princes, in what place soeuer they are, the +gouernours of the cities are bound to visite them euery festiuall day. Likewise +if they doo passe on horsebacke by their doores, they must alight and walke on +foote while they haue passed it: and if they be borne in a litle chaire, +likewise to come out of the same, and to walk on foote with silence, till they +be past. And for that they shall not plead ignorance, the gates of these princes +houses are all painted red: so that they being brought vp from their youth, in +this straight, close, and idle life, it is not vnto them tedious, but dooth +rather reioyce in the same.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. VI.</p> +<p class="intro">The bignesse of this kingdome of China, and of such measures +as they do vse in trauaile.</p> + +<p>This mightie kingdome, which we commonly call China, without knowing any +cause or foundation wherefore we should so cal it, those countries neere ioyning +vnto the same, do call it Sangley: and they in their naturall toonge do cal it +Taybiner,<a name="FNanchor_26_26" id="FNanchor_26_26"></a><a href="#Footnote_26_26" class="fnanchor">[26]</a> +the which is to be vnderstood, nothing but a kingdome: and is the most biggest +and populous that is mentioned in all the world, as it shalbe apparant in the +discourse of this hystorie, and in the wonderfull things that shalbe treated of +in the next chapter following. All the which is taken out of the bookes and +hystories of the said Chinos, whereas they do make mention of the mightinesse +thereof, and of the 15 prouinces that are comprehended in the same: the which +bookes and hystories were brought vnto the citie of Manilla, printed and set +forth in China, and were translated into the Spanish toong, by interpreters of +the saide nations. And for that they were baptised and became Christians, they +remaine as dwellers amongst vs in these ilandes, the better to obserue and keepe +the lawes of baptisme, and to flie the paine and punishment the which they +should receiue for dooing the same: for that they turned Christians and receiued +the faith without the license of the king and counsell, which is forbidden vppon +paine of death, and is executed with great violence, and without remission. This +mightie kingdome is in circuit or compasse about 69516 die,<a name="FNanchor_27_27" id="FNanchor_27_27"></a><a href="#Footnote_27_27" class="fnanchor">[27]</a> +which is a kind of measure that they do vse: which being reduced into the +Spanish account, is almost<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span> +3000 legues, and in length 1800 leagues, this is to be vnderstood the whole 15 +<span class="sidenote">The China is in compass 3000 leagues and 1800 leagues +long.</span> +prouinces: the which are garnished with many cities and townes, besides a great +number of villages, as you may plainely see in the chapter following. By the +said booke, it is found that the Chinos haue amongst them but only three kind of +measures: the which in their language are called <i>lii</i>, <i>pu</i>, and <i> +icham</i>, which is as much as to say, or in effect, as a forlong, league, or +iorney: the measure which is called <i>lii</i>, hath so much space as a mans +voice in a plaine grounde may bee hearde in a quiet day, halowing or whoping +with all the force and strength he may: and ten of these <i>liis</i> maketh a <i> +pu</i>, which is a great Spanish league: and ten <i>pus</i> maketh a dayes +iourney, which is called <i>icham</i>, which maketh 12 long leagues. By the +which account it is founde that this kingdome hath the number of leagues as +afore is saide: yet, by the account of other bookes, they do finde it bigger and +of more leagues. Yet frier Martin de Herrada, prouinciall of the Austen friers +in the Ilands Philippinas, who is an excellent geometrician and cosmographer, +did cast the account with great diligence, by their owne descriptions, and doth +finde it to amount vnto the sum aforesaid, to be 1800 leagues long and 3000 +leagues in compasse, beginning at the prouince of Olam, which is that towards +the south, and nearest vnto Malacia,<a name="FNanchor_28_28" id="FNanchor_28_28"></a><a href="#Footnote_28_28" class="fnanchor">[28]</a> +and so alongst the countrie towards the north east for the space of 600 leagues.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. VII.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the 15 prouinces that are in this kingdome.</p> + +<p>This mightie kingdome is diuided into fifteene prouinces, that euery one of +them is bigger then the greatest kingdome<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span> +that we doo vnderstand to be in all Europe. Some doo esteeme those cities to be +metropolitans, where as is resident, the gouernors, presidents, or viz rées, +which in their natural toong are called Cochin: of the prouinces, two of them, +which are called Tolanchia and Paguia, are gouerned by the king in person with +his royall counsel. The occasion why the king is alwayes resident or abiding in +one of these two prouinces which are two of the mightiest and most popularst of +people, is not for that in them he is most at his content, or receiue more +pleasure in them then in any of the other: but onely for that they doo confine +vpon the kingdome of Tartaria, with whom in times past they had ordinary and +continuall wars: and for that the king might with more ease put remedie in such +harmes receiued, and defend with better oportunitie the rage of his enimie, he +did ordaine and situate his pallace and court in them two. And for that it hath +beene of antiquitie many yeeres past, it hath remained hitherto, and appeareth +to continue still the habitation of the kings of that kingdome, as by desert for +the excellencie of the clime, and aboundance of all things necessarie.</p> +<p>The names of the fifteene prouinces are as followeth:—Paguia,<a name="FNanchor_29_29" id="FNanchor_29_29"></a><a href="#Footnote_29_29" class="fnanchor">[29]</a> +Foquiem,<a name="FNanchor_30_30" id="FNanchor_30_30"></a><a href="#Footnote_30_30" class="fnanchor">[30]</a> +Olam,<a name="FNanchor_31_31" id="FNanchor_31_31"></a><a href="#Footnote_31_31" class="fnanchor">[31]</a> +Sinsay,<a name="FNanchor_32_32" id="FNanchor_32_32"></a><a href="#Footnote_32_32" class="fnanchor">[32]</a> +Sisuam,<a name="FNanchor_33_33" id="FNanchor_33_33"></a><a href="#Footnote_33_33" class="fnanchor">[33]</a> +Tolanchia,<a name="FNanchor_34_34" id="FNanchor_34_34"></a><a href="#Footnote_34_34" class="fnanchor">[34]</a> +Cansay,<a name="FNanchor_35_35" id="FNanchor_35_35"></a><a href="#Footnote_35_35" class="fnanchor">[35]</a> +Oquiam,<a name="FNanchor_36_36" id="FNanchor_36_36"></a><a href="#Footnote_36_36" class="fnanchor">[36]</a> +Aucheo,<a name="FNanchor_37_37" id="FNanchor_37_37"></a><a href="#Footnote_37_37" class="fnanchor">[37]</a> +Honan,<a name="FNanchor_38_38" id="FNanchor_38_38"></a><a href="#Footnote_38_38" class="fnanchor">[38]</a> +Xanton,<a name="FNanchor_39_39" id="FNanchor_39_39"></a><a href="#Footnote_39_39" class="fnanchor">[39]</a> +Quicheu,<a name="FNanchor_40_40" id="FNanchor_40_40"></a><a href="#Footnote_40_40" class="fnanchor">[40]</a> +Chequeam,<a name="FNanchor_41_41" id="FNanchor_41_41"></a><a href="#Footnote_41_41" class="fnanchor">[41]</a> +Susuam,<a name="FNanchor_42_42" id="FNanchor_42_42"></a><a href="#Footnote_42_42" class="fnanchor">[42]</a> +and Saxij.<a name="FNanchor_43_43" id="FNanchor_43_43"></a><a href="#Footnote_43_43" class="fnanchor">[43]</a> +Almost all these prouinces,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span> +but in particular tenne of them which are alongst the sea costs, are full of +deepe riuers of sweete water and navigable, vpon whose branches are situated +many cities and townes, whereof you may not onely haue the number of them, but +also their names: for that these Chinos are so curious people, that in their +books are named besides the cities and townes, the banketing houses and houses +of pleasure, which the gentlemen haue for their recreation. And for that it will +be more trouble than profite to inlarge any further in this matter, I will refer +it vnto the next chapter, where I will intreate of the cities and townes that +either of these prouinces hath, and pass ouer all the rest, as not necessarie; +for our intent is to set forth the bignes of this kingdome.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. VIII.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the cities and townes that every one of these prouinces hath in +himselfe.</p> + +<p>These fifteene prouinces, which with better truth might be called kingdomes, +according vnto the greatnes of them, as you may perceiue by the number of cities +and townes that each of them hathe, besides villages, the which if I should adde +herevnto, would be an infinite number.</p> +<p>The number of cities and townes that euery prouince hath. First, the prouince +of Paguia, where as ordinarily the king and his counsel is resident, hath 47 +cities and 150 townes.</p> +<table summary="Provincial Cities"> +<tr> +<td>Canton</td> +<td>hath 37 cities and 190 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Foquien</td> +<td>hath 33 cities and 99 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Olam</td> +<td>hath 90 cities and 130 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Synsay</td> +<td>hath 38 cities and 124 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Sisuan</td> +<td>hath 44 cities and 150 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Tolanchia</td> +<td>hath 51 cities and 123 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Cansay</td> +<td>hath 24 cities and 112 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Ochian</td> +<td>hath 19 cities and 74 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Ancheo</td> +<td>hath 25 cities and 29 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Honan</td> +<td>hath 20 cities and 102 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Xaton</td> +<td>hath 37 cities and 78 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Quicheu</td> +<td>hath 45 cities and 113 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Chequeam</td> +<td>hath 39 cities and 95 townes.</td> +</tr> +<tr> +<td>Susuan</td> +<td>hath 42 cities and 105 townes.</td> +</tr> +</table> + +<p>By which account appeareth to be 591 cities and 1593 townes, beside villages +and houses of pleasure, which are an infinite number: by the which you may +consider that this kingdome doth deserve to be called great, and compared with +the best and principalst that is heard of in al the whole world. The Chinos do +vse in their pronunciation to terme their cities with this sylable, Fu, that is +as much as to say, citie, as Taybin fu, Canton fu, and their townes with this +sylable, Cheu. They have some villages that are so great, that it lacketh but +onely the name of a towne. All their cities for the most part are situated by +the riuers sides: such as are nauigable, the cities are moted rounde about, +which make them to bee verie strong, not only the cities but townes are walled +round about with high and strong wals of stone, one faddome high, and all the +rest is of bricke, but of so hard a substance that it is not to be broken almost +with pickaxes. Some cities hath their wals so broad, that 4 and 6 men may walke +side by side on them: they are garnished with many bulwarks and towers, a small +distance the one from the other, with their battlements and faire galleries, +where as many times their vizroyes doeth goe to recreate themselues with the +gallant sight of the mountains and riuers, with their fields so odoriferous. +There is betwixt the wals of their cities and the mote of the same a broade +space, that six horsemen may ride together; the like space is within, betwixt +the walles and the houses, whereas they may walke without impediment. Their wals +are kept in such good reparation, by reason of their great care and diligence, +that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> they +seeme to be but new made, and yet in some cities there is founde mention of two +thousand yeeres since the first foundation. In every city the king doth ordaine +a justice, and giveth him great rents onely to visit them, and make them to be +renewed and repaired where as is requisite, and is done vpon the kings cost: for +out of his rents in such cities and townes is given them all that is needful to +be asked. The high waies in all this kingdome are made and kept plaine with +great care and diligence, and the entering into the cities and townes are very +sumptuous and with great maiestie, they have three or foure gates bound with +yron very strong. Their streetes very well paved, and so broad that 15 horsemen +may ride together in them, and so straight, that although they be very long, yet +you may discouer the end. On both the sides are portals, vnder which be their +shops full of all sorts of merchandises very curious, and of all occupations +that you will desire: In the streets, a good space the one from the other, are +made manie triumphall arkes of extreme bewtie: they are made of masons worke, +very curiously painted after the fashion of the old antiquitie of Rome. All +their houses ordinarily haue three doores, that in the middest is great, the +other be lesser, but of a maruellous gallant proportion. The king is alwayes +resident in the citie of Suntien,<a name="FNanchor_45_45" id="FNanchor_45_45"></a><a href="#Footnote_45_45" class="fnanchor">[45]</a> +<span class="sidenote">The mightie citie called Suntien, or Quinsay.<a name="FNanchor_44_44" id="FNanchor_44_44"></a><a href="#Footnote_44_44" class="fnanchor">[44]</a></span> +which in their language is as much to say, the citie of heauen. Of which citie +the Chinos do declare many things which seemeth to be true, for that if you do +talke with many of them, and at sundrie times and places, yet doo they not varie +the one from the other: and according to their report, it should be the greatest +in all the worlde, in these dayes. They who do make it to be least, do affirme, +that to goe from gate to gate, leauing the suburbs, had need of a summers day +and a good horse to do it: it is also called Quinsay, as Marcus Paulus doth call +it.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. IX.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the wonderfull buildings in this kingdome, and of mightie wall or +circuit in the same of 500 leagues long.</p> + +<p>In this kingdom in al places, there be men excellent in architecture: and the +necessaries that they haue to build with is the best that is in the world. For +as it is said in the chapter past, they haue a kinde of white earth of the which +they make brickes, of so great hardnesse and strength, that for to breake them, +you must haue pickaxes, and vse much strength: and this is the cause that in all +the kingdome there is mightie buildings and verie curious. Putting apart the +kings pallace where hee is resident in Tabin<a name="FNanchor_46_46" id="FNanchor_46_46"></a><a href="#Footnote_46_46" class="fnanchor">[46]</a> +(for of that you shall haue a particular chapter), in all such cities that bee +the heads of the prouinces, is resident a vizroy or gouernour, and dwelleth in +the house that (in euery such citie) the king hath ordained on his proper cost: +all the which, to conclude, are superbious and admirable, and wrought by +marueilous art, and are as bigge as a great village, by reason that they haue +within them great gardens, water ponds and woods compassed about: in the which +(as it is declared in the 4 chapter) is great quantitie of hunt and flying +foules. Their houses commonly be verie gallant and after the manner of Rome, and +generallie at the doores and gates of them are planted trees in gallant order: +the which maketh a gallant shadow and seemeth well in the streets. All these +houses are within as white as milke, in such sort that it seemeth to be +burnished paper. The floares are paued with square stones, verie broad and +smooth; their seelings are of an excellent kind of timber, verie well wrought +and painted, that it seemeth like damaske and of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span> +the colour of gold, that sheweth verie well: euerie one of them hath three +courts and gardens full of flowers and herbes for their recreation. And there is +none of them but hath his fish poole furnished, although it bee but small. The +one side of their courts is wrought verie gallant, like as it is in counting +houses, vpon the which they haue many idols carued, and wrought of diuers kinds +of mettals: the other three parts or angles of their courts are painted with +diuers things of verie great curiositie. But aboue all things they are +marueilous cleane, not only in their houses, but also in their streets: in the +which commonly they haue three or foure necessarie or common places of ease, +verie curiously ordained and placed; for that the people, being troubled with +their common necessitie, shall not foule the streetes, and therefore they haue +this prouision: the like is vsed in all wayes throughout the kingdom. Some +cities there be, whose streets be nauigable, as in Bruxels in Flanders, Mexico +in the Indians, and as in Venice in Italie; which is the occasion that they are +better serued and prouided, for that their barkes and boates doo enter laden +with all kinde of victuals harde to their doores.</p> +<p>The highways throughout all this kingdome, are the best and gallantest paued +that euer hath beene discouered: they are verie plaine, yea vnto the mountaines, +and they are cut by force of labour and pickaxes, and maintained with brick and +stone, the which by report of them which hath seen it, is one of the worthiest +things that is in all the realme. There are many mightie bridges, and of a +wonderfull making, and some wrought vpon boats, as it is in Syvill: but in +especiall vpon such riuers as are broad and deepe. In the citie of Fucheo,<a name="FNanchor_47_47" id="FNanchor_47_47"></a><a href="#Footnote_47_47" class="fnanchor">[47]</a> +there is a towre right against the house of the kings chiefe receiuer, and it is +affirmed by those that haue seene it, to surmount any building that hath beene<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span> +amoungst the Romans: the which is raised and founded vppon fortie pillars, and +everie pillar is of one stone, so bigge and so high that it is strange to tell +them, and doubtfull to the hearers to beleeue it: for which cause I thinke it +best not to declare it in particular, as I do in all things where as I doo finde +it difficult to be beleeued, and where I haue no certaine author to verifie the +truth.</p> + +<p>There is in this kingdome a defence or wall that is fiue hundred leagues<span class="sidenote">A wal of 500 leagues long.</span> +long, and beginneth at the citie Ochyoy,<a name="FNanchor_48_48" id="FNanchor_48_48"></a><a href="#Footnote_48_48" class="fnanchor">[48]</a> +which is vppon the high mountaines, and runneth from the west vnto east. The +king of that countrie which made it was called Tzintzon, and it was for his +defence against the Tartaries, with whom he had warres; so that the wall doth +shut vp all the frontier of Tartaria. But you must vnderstande that foure +hundred leagues of the saide wall is naturall of it selfe, for that they be high +and mightie rockes, verie nigh together: but in the other hundred leagues is +comprehended the spaces or distance that is betwixt the rockes, the which he +caused to be made by mens handes of verie strong worke of stone, and is of seuen +fathom brode at the foote of it, and seuen fathom high. It beginneth at the +partes of the sea, in the prouince of Canton,<a name="FNanchor_49_49" id="FNanchor_49_49"></a><a href="#Footnote_49_49" class="fnanchor">[49]</a> +and stretcheth foorth by that of Paguia and Cansay, and doth finish in the +prouince of Susuan.<a name="FNanchor_50_50" id="FNanchor_50_50"></a><a href="#Footnote_50_50" class="fnanchor">[50]</a> +This king, for to finish this wonderful<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span> +worke, did take of euerie three men one thorough his kingdome, and of fiue, two; +who for that they trauailed in their labour so long a iourney, and into +different clymes (although that out of those provinces that were nearest there +came great store of people), yet did they almost all perish that followed that +worke.</p> +<p>The making of this superbious and mightie worke, was the occasion that his +whole kingdome did rise vp against the king, and did kill him, after that he had +raigned fortie yeares, and also a sonne of his that was called Agnitzi. The +report of this wall is helde to be of a verie truth, for that it is affirmed by +all the Chinos that doo traficke to the Islands Philippinas and to Canton, and +Machao, and be all confirmable in their declaration as witnesses, because they +haue seene it: and it is the farthest parts of all the kingdome, whereas none of +vs vnto this day hath beene.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. X.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the dispositions, countenance, with apparell and other exercises of +the people of this countrie.</p> + +<p>Both men and women of this countrie are of a good disposition of their +bodies, well proportioned and gallant men, somewhat tall: they are all for the +most part brode faced, little eyes and flat noses, and without bearde saue only +upon the ball of the chinne: but yet there be some that haue great eyes and +goodly beardes, and their faces well proportioned, yet of these sorts (in +respect of the others) are verie few: and it is to bee beleeued that these kinde +of people doo proceede of some strange nation, who in times past when it was +lawfull to deale out of that countrie, did ioyne one with another.</p> +<p>Those of the prouince of Canton (which is a whot<a name="FNanchor_51_51" id="FNanchor_51_51"></a><a href="#Footnote_51_51" class="fnanchor">[51]</a> +country)<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span> be +browne of colour like to the Moores: but those that be farther within the +countrie be like unto Almaines,<a name="FNanchor_52_52" id="FNanchor_52_52"></a><a href="#Footnote_52_52" class="fnanchor">[52]</a> +Italians and Spanyardes, white and redde, and somewhat swart. All of them do +suffer their nailes of their left hande to grow very long, but the right hand +they do cut: they haue long haire, and esteeme it very much and maintaine it +with curiositie: of both they make a superstition, for that they say thereby +they shall be carried into heauen. They do binde their haire up to the crowne of +their heade, in calles of golde verie curious, and with pinnes of the same.</p> + +<p>The garments which the nobles and principals do vse, bee of silke of +different colours, of the which they haue excellent good and verie perfite: the +common and poore people doo apparell themselues with another kinde of silke more +courser, and with linnen, serge, and cotton: of all the which there is great +abundance. And for that the countrie for the most part is temperate, they may +suffer this kinde of apparell, which is the heauiest that they doo vse: for in +all the whole kingdome they have no cloth, neither doo they suffer it to be +made, although they have great aboundance of woolle, and very good cheape: they +<span class="sidenote">Great abundance of wool and good cheape.</span>do vse their coates according vnto our old vse of antiquitie, with long skirts +and full of plaites, and a flappe ouer the brest to be made fast under the left +side, the sleeues verie bigge and wide: upon their coates they doo vse cassockes +or long garments according vnto the possibilitie of either of them, made +according as wee doo vse, but only their sleeues are more wider. They of royall +bloode and such as are constituted vnto dignitie, do differ in their apparell +from the other ordinarie gentlemen: for that the first haue their garments laide +on with gold and siluer downe to the waste, and the others alonely garnished on +the edges, or hem: they do vse hose verie well made and stitched, shoes and +buskins of veluet, verie curious. In the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span> +<span class="sidenote">Shooes and buskines of veluet.</span> +winter (although it be not very colde,) they haue their garments furred with +<span class="sidenote">Great abundance of Marters furres.</span> +beasts skins, but in especiall with Martas Ceuellinas, of the which they haue +great aboundance (as aforesaid) and generally they do vse them at all times +about their necks. They that be not married doo differ from them that be +married, in that they do kirrle their haire on their foreheade, and wear higher +hattes. Their women do apparell themselues verie curiouslie, much after the +fashion of Spaine: they vse many iewels of gold and precious stones: their +gownes haue wide sleeues; that wherewith they do apparel themselues is of cloath +of gold and siluer and diuers sortes of silkes, whereof they haue great plentie, +as aforesaid, and excellent good, and good cheape: and the poore folkes doo +apparell themselues with veluet, vnshorne veluet and serge. They haue verie +faire haire, and doo combe it with great care and diligence, as do the women of +Genouay, and do binde it about their heade with a broad silke lace, set full of +pearles and precious stones, and they say it doth become them verie well: they +doo vse to paint themselues, and in some place in excesse.</p> + +<p>Amongst them they account it for gentilitie and a gallant thing to haue +little feete, and therefore from their youth they so swadell and binde them +verie straight, and do suffer it with patience: for that she who hath the least +feete is accounted the gallantest dame. They say that the men hath induced them +vnto this custome, for to binde their feete so harde, that almost they doo loose +<span class="sidenote">An il vse and custome.</span> +the forme of them, and remaine halfe lame, so that their going is verie ill, and +with great trauell: which is the occasion that they goe but little abroad, and +fewe times doo rise vp from their worke that they do; and was inuented onely for +the same intent. This custome hath indured manie yeares, and will indure many +more, for that it is stablished for a law: and that woman which doth breake it, +and not vse it with her children, shalbe counted as euill, yea shalbe punished +for the same. They<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span> +are very secreat and honest, in such sort that you shall not see at any time a +woman at her window nor at her doores: and if her husband doo inuite any person +to dinner, she is neuer seene nor eateth not at the table, except the gest be a +kinsman or a very friende: when they go abroade to visite their father, mother, +or any other kinsfolkes, they are carried in a little chaire by foure men, the +which is made close, and with lattises rounde about made of golde wyre and with +siluer, and curteines of silke; that although they doo see them that be in the +streete, yet they cannot be seene. They haue many servants waiting on them. So +that it is a great maruell when that you shall meete a principall woman in the +streete, yea you will thinke that there are none in the citie, their keeping in +is such: the lameness of their feet is a great helpe therevnto. The women as +well as the men be ingenious; they doo vse drawne workes and carued works, +<span class="sidenote">Ingenious people.</span> +excellent painters of flowers, birds and beasts, as it is to be seene vpon +beddes and bords that is brought from thence. I did see my selfe, one that was +brought vnto Lysborne in the yeare 1582, by Captaine Ribera, chiefe sergant of +Manilla, that it was to be wondred at the excellencie thereof: it caused the +kings maiestie to haue admyration, and he is a person that little wondreth at +things. All the people did wonder at it: yea the famous imbroiderers did +maruaile at the curiousnesse thereof. They are great inuenters of things, that +although they haue amongst them many coches and wagons that goe with sailes, and +<span class="sidenote">Wagons with sailes.</span> +made with such industrie and policie that they do gouerne them with great ease: +this is crediblie informed by many that haue seen it: besides that, there be +many in the Indies, and in Portugall, that haue seene them painted vpon clothes, +and on their earthen vessell that is brought from thence to be solde: so that it +is a signe that their painting hath some foundation. In their buying and selling +they are verie subtill, in such sort that they will depart a haire. Such +merchants as do keepe<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span> +shoppes (of whom in euery citie there is a great number) they haue a table or +signe hanging at their doore, whereon is written all such merchandise as is +within to be sold.</p> +<p>That which is commonly sold in their shops is cloth of golde and siluer, +<span class="sidenote">Cloth of gold tissue and silke.</span> +cloth of tissue, silkes of diuers sorts and excellent colours: others there be +of poorer sort that selleth serges, peeces of cotton, linnen and fustian of all +colours; yet both the one and the other is verie goode cheape, for that there is +great aboundance, and many workemen that do make it. The apothecarie that +selleth simples, hath the like table: there be also shops full of earthen +<span class="sidenote">Porsilan.</span> +vessels of diuers making, redde, greene, yellow, and gilt; it is so good cheape +that for foure rials of plate they giue fiftie peeces: very strong earth, the +which they doo breake all to peeces and grinde it, and put it into sesternes +with water, made of lime and stone; and after that they haue well tumbled and +tossed it in the water, of the creame that is vpon it they make the finest sort +of them, and the lower they go, spending that substance that is the courser: +they make them after the forme and fashion as they do here, and afterward they +do gild them, and make them of what colour they please, the which will never be +lost: then they put them into their killes and burne them. This hath beene seene +and is of a truth, as appeareth in a booke set foorth in the Italian toonge, by +Duardo Banbosa,<a name="FNanchor_53_53" id="FNanchor_53_53"></a><a href="#Footnote_53_53" class="fnanchor">[53]</a> +that they do make them of periwinkle shelles of the sea: the which they do +grinde and put them under the ground to refine them, whereas they lie 100 years: +and many other things he doth treat of to this<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span> +effect. But if that were true, they should not make so great a number of them as +is made in that kingdome, and is brought into Portugall, and carried into the +Peru, and Noua Espania,<a name="FNanchor_54_54" id="FNanchor_54_54"></a><a href="#Footnote_54_54" class="fnanchor">[54]</a> +and into other parts of the world: which is a sufficient proofe for that which +is said. And the Chinos do agree for this to be true. The finest sort of this is +neuer carried out of the countrie, for that it is spent in the seruice of the +king, and his gouernours, and is so fine and deere, that it seemeth to be of +fine and perfite cristal: that which is made in the prouince of Saxii<a name="FNanchor_55_55" id="FNanchor_55_55"></a><a href="#Footnote_55_55" class="fnanchor">[55]</a> +is the best and finest. Artificers and mechanicall officers doo dwell in streets +appointed, whereas none do dwell amongst them, but such as be of the same +occupation or arte: in such sort that if you doo come at the beginning of the +<span class="sidenote">All occupations be in streets by themselves.</span> +street, looke what craft or art they are there, it is to be vnderstood that all +that streete are of that occupation. It is ordayned by a law and statute, that +<span class="sidenote">The son inherits his fathers occupation.</span> +the sonne shall inherite his fathers occupation, and shall not vse any other +without licence of the justice: if one of them bee verie rich and will not +worke, yet he cannot let but haue in his shop men that must worke of his +occupation. Therefore they that do vse it, by reason that they are brought vp in +it from their youth, they are famous and verie curious in that which they do +worke, as it is plainelie seene in that which is brought from thence to Manilla, +and into the Indies, and vnto Portugall. Their currant monie of that kingdome is +made of golde and siluer, without any signe or print, but goeth by waight: so +that all men carrieth a ballances with them, and little peeces of siluer and +golde, for to buy such things as they haue neede of. And for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span> +things of a greater quantitie they haue bigger ballances in their houses, and +waights, that are sealed, for to giue to euery man that which is theirs: for +therein the iustices haue great care. In the gouernement of Chincheo<a name="FNanchor_56_56" id="FNanchor_56_56"></a><a href="#Footnote_56_56" class="fnanchor">[56]</a> +they haue copper monie coyned, but it is nothing woorth out of that prouince.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l30 p6" /> +<h2><span class="s08">THE HISTORIE</span><br /> +<span class="s05">OF THE</span><br /> +<span class="s08">MIGHTIE KINGDOME OF CHINA,</span><br /> +<span class="s05">WHEREIN SHALBE DECLARED, OF THE RELIGION THAT IS AMONGST THE<br /> +PEOPLE, AND OF THEIR IDOLS THAT THEY DO WORSHIP,<br /> +AND OF OTHER THINGS TOUCHING THAT THEY<br /> +DO VSE ABOUE NATURE.</span></h2> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="center">THE SECOND BOOKE.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. I.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the number of gods that they doo worship, and of some tokens and +paintings that is found amongst them that do represent a mysterie +of our +Christian religion.</p> + +<p>In the two prouinces, Paguina an[d] Tolanchia, wheras we haue said, the king +of the countrie is ordinarily resident, for that they do bound vpon Tartary, +with whom they haue continuall warres: and againe the most principall and +politike people be in those places, ouer and aboue all the other.</p> +<p>Amongst the figures of all their idols that they do haue, the Chinos doo say +that there is one of a strange and maruellous making, vnto whom they do great +<span class="sidenote">A strange image.</span> +reuerence: they doo paint him a bodie with three heads, that doth continually +looke the one on the other: and they say that it dooth signifie, that all three +be of one good will and essence, and that which pleaseth the one pleaseth the +other: and to the contrarie, that which is grieuous and displeaseth the one, is +grieuous and displeaseth the other two: the which being<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span> +interpreted Christianly, may be vnderstoode to be the mysterie of the holy +<span class="sidenote">A mysterie of the Trinitie.</span> +Trinitie, that wee that are Christians doo worship, and is part of our faith: +the which, with other things, seemeth somwhat to be respondent to our holy, +sacred, and Christian religion: so that of verie truth we may presume that Saint +<span class="sidenote">S. Thomas preached in this kingdome.</span> +Thomas the Apostle<a name="FNanchor_57_57" id="FNanchor_57_57"></a><a href="#Footnote_57_57" class="fnanchor">[57]</a> +did preach in this kingdome, who as it is declared in the lesson on his day, +<span class="sidenote">The martyrdom of Saint Thomas.</span> +whereas he was martyred in the city of Calamina, for his faith and holy Gospel +that he preached.</p> +<p>It is verified that when this glorious apostle did passe into the Indies, hee +trauelled through this kingdome of China, where as it appeareth he did preach +the holy Gospel and mysterie of the Holy Trinitie: whose picture in the manner +aforesaid doth indure vnto this day, although those people, by the great and +long blindnesse which they are in with their errors and idolatrie, doo not +perfectly knowe what that figure with three heads doth represent or signifie. +The better for to beleeue that which is said, or at least to vnderstande that it +is so, is that it is found in the writings of the Armenians, that amongst them +are in reputation and of great authoritie: and there it saith, that this +glorious apostle did passe through this kingdome of China, when he went into the +Indies, where he was martyred, and that he did preach there the holy Gospell, +although it did profite verie little, for that the people were out of order, and +occupied in their warres: and therefore this apostle did passe into the Indies, +and left some of the countrie (although but a few) baptised and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span> +instructed, that when it should please God, they might haue occasion to perseuer +in that which was taught them.</p> +<p>They haue also amongst them (as it is said) certaine pictures, after the +fashion and with the ensignes of the twelue apostles, which is a helpe to the +verifying of that aforesaide: although if you doo aske of the people who they +are, they doo answere that they were men, and great philosophers that did liue +vertuouslie, and therfore they are made angels in heauen. They doo also vse +amongst them the picture of a woman verie faire with a man childe in her armes, +whereof they say shee was deliuered and yet remained a virgine, and was daughter +vnto a mightie king: they do reuerence her verie much, and do make prayer vnto +her: more then this, they cannot say of this mysterie, but that she liued a holy +life and never sinned.</p> +<p>Frier Gaspar de la Cruz, a Portugall of the order of Saint Dominicke, was in +the citie of Canton, where he did write many things of this kingdome,<a name="FNanchor_58_58" id="FNanchor_58_58"></a><a href="#Footnote_58_58" class="fnanchor">[58]</a> +and with great attention, whom I do follow in many things in the proces of this +hystorie, and he saith, that he being vpon a small island that was in the +middest of a mightie riuer, there was a house in manner of a monasterie of +religious people of that country, and being in it, he saw certaine curious +things of great antiquitie: amongst them he saw a chappel, like vnto an oratorie +or place of prayer, verie well made, and curiouslie dressed: it had certaine +staires to mount into it, and compassed about with gilt grates, and was made +fast: and looking vpon the altar, the which was couered with a cloth verie rich, +hee sawe in the midedst of the same an image of a woman of a meruailous +perfection, with a childe hauing her armes about hir necke, and there was +burning before her a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span> +lampe: he being amased at this sight he did demande the signification: but there +was none that could declare more thereof then that which is said before. Of this +which hath been said, it is easily to be beleeued how that the Apostle S. Thomas +did preach in this kingdom, for that it is seene these people haue conserued +these traditions many yeares past, and doo conserue the same: which is a signe +and token that they had some notice of the true God, whose shadows they do +represent. There is amongst them many errors, and without any foundation, and is +not of them to be seene nor perceiued til such time as by faith they shall knowe +the right God: as may bee seene in the chapters, where we shall speake of these +matters.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. II.</p> +<p class="intro">I do prosecute the religion they haue, and of the idols they do +worship.</p> + +<p>Ouer and aboue that which is saide, these idolators and blind people (being +men so prudent and wise in the gouernment of their common wealth, and so subtill +and ingenious in all arts) yet they do vse many other things of so great +blindnes and so impertinent, that it doth make them to wonder, which +attentiuelie doo fall in the consideration: yet is it not much to be meruailed +at, considering that they are without the cleere light of the true Christian +religion, without the which the subtilest and delicatest vnderstandings are lost +and ouerthrowne. Generally amongst them they doo vnderstand that the heauen is +the creator of all things visible and inuisible: and therefore they do make a +shew of it in the first caract or letter of the crosse row, and that the heauen +hath a gouernour to rule all such things as are comprehended<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span> +there aboue: whom they call Laocon Izautey,<a name="FNanchor_59_59" id="FNanchor_59_59"></a><a href="#Footnote_59_59" class="fnanchor">[59]</a> +which is to be vnderstood in their language: the gouernour of the great and +mightie God, this they do worship as the principall, next vnto the sun. They say +that this gouernour was not begotten, but is eternal, and hath no body, but is a +spirit. Likewise they do say that with this there is another of the same nature, +whom they call Causay,<a name="FNanchor_60_60" id="FNanchor_60_60"></a><a href="#Footnote_60_60" class="fnanchor">[60]</a> +and is likewise a spirit, and vnto this is giuen power of the lower heauen, in +whose power dependeth the life and death of man. This Causay hath three +subiectes whom he doth commande, and they say they bee likewise spirites, and +they doo aide and helpe him in things touching his gouernment. They are called +Tauquam, Teyquam, Tzuiquam, either of them hath distinct power the one ouer the +other: they say that Tauquam hath charge ouer the raine, to prouoke water for +the earth, and Teyquam ouer humane nature to bring forth mankinde, ouer warres, +sowing the ground, and fruites. And Tzuiquam ouer the seas and all nauigators. +They doo sacrifice vnto them, and doo craue of them such things as they haue +vnder their charge and gouernment: for the which they do offer them victuals, +sweate smels, frontals and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span> +carpets for their altars: likewise they promise many vowes, and represent plaies +and comedies before their idols, the which they do verie naturallie.</p> +<p>Besides this, they haue for saints such men as haue surmounted other in +wisdome, in valour, in industrie, or in leading a solitarie or asper life: or +such as haue liued without doing euill to any. And in their language they cal +them Pausaos, which be such as we do call holy men.</p> +<p>They likewise doo sacrifice vnto the diuell, not as though they were ignorant +that he is euill, or condemned, but that he shoulde doo them no harme, neither +on their bodies nor goods. They haue manie strange gods, of so great a number, +that alonely for to name them is requisite a large hystorie, and not to be +briefe as is pretended in this booke. And therefore I will make mention but of +their principals, whom (besides those which I haue named) they haue in great +reuerence.</p> +<p>The first of these they doo call Sichia, who came from the kingdome of +Trautheyco,<a name="FNanchor_61_61" id="FNanchor_61_61"></a><a href="#Footnote_61_61" class="fnanchor">[61]</a> +which is towards the west: this was the first inuenter of such religious people, +as they haue in their countrie both men and women, and generally doth liue +without marrying, in perpetuall closenesse; and all such as doo immitate this +profession do weare no haire, which number is great, as hereafter you shall +vnderstand: and they greatly obserue that order left vnto them.</p> +<p>The next is called Quanina, and was daughter vnto the king Tzonton, who had +three daughters; two of them were married, and the third, which was Quanina, hee +woulde also haue married, but she would neuer consent thereunto: saying that she +had made a vow to heauen to liue chast, whereat the king her father was verie +wroth, and put her into a place like vnto a monastrie, whereas she was made to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span> +carrie wood and water, and to worke and make cleane an orcharde that was there. +The Chinos do tell many tales of this maide, for to be laughed at: saying, that +the apes came from the mountaines for to help her, and how that saints did bring +her water, and the birds of the aire with their bylles did make cleane her +orchard, and that the great beastes came out of the mountaines and brought her +woode. Her father perceiuing that, imagining that she did it by witchcraft, or +by some art of the diuell (as it might well bee), commanded to set fire on that +house whereas she was: then she seeing that for her cause that house was set on +fire, she would haue destroyed her selfe with a siluer pinne, which she had to +trim vp her haire: but vpon a sodanne at that instant there fel a great shower +of raine and did put out the fire, and shee departed from thence and hid her +selfe in the mountaines, whereas she liued in great penance and led a holy life. +And her father, in recompense of the great sinne and evill he committed against +her, was turned to a lepar, and full of wormes, in such sort that there was no +phisition that could cure him: by reason whereof hee was constrained to repaire +vnto his daughter to seeke cure (which being aduised of the same by reuelation +of a deuine spirit); then her father, being certified thereof, did craue pardon +at her handes, and did repent him verie much of that which he had done, and did +worshippe vnto her, the which she seeing, resisted her father therein, and put a +saint before him, that he should worship it and not her, and therewith shee +straight waies returned vnto the mountaines, whereas she died in great religion. +This they haue amongest them for a great saint, and doe pray vnto her to get +pardon for their sinnes of the heaven, for that they do beleeve that she is +there.</p> +<p>Besides this, they haue another saint which they call Neoma, and was borne in +a towne called Cuchi, in the prouince of Ochiam. This they saye was daughter +vnto a principall man of that towne, and would neuer marrie, but<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span> +left her owne naturall soyle and went vnto a little iland, which is right ouer +against Ingoa, whereas she liued a verie straight life, and shewed manie false +miracles. The occasion why they haue her in reputation of a saint is: There was +a certaine captaine of the king of China, whose name was Compo; he was sent vnto +a kingdome not farre from thence to make warre against the king. It so chaunced +that he, with his nauie, came to an anker at Buym, and being readie to departe, +hee would haue wayed his ankers, but by no meanes he could not mooue them: being +greatly amazed thereat, and looking foorth, he sawe this Neoma sitting on them. +Then the captaine came vnto her, and told her with great humilitie, that he was +going to warres by commandement of the king. And that if so be she were holie, +that she would giue him counsell what were best for him to do: to whom she +answered and sayd, that if he would haue the victorie ouer them that hee went to +conquer, that he should carrie her with him. He did performe that which she +said, and carried her with him vnto that kingdome, whose inhabitantes were great +magicians, and threw oyle into the sea, and made it seeme that their shippes +were all on fire. This Neoma did worke by the same art, and did vndoe that which +the other did practise or imagine, in such sort, that their magicke did profitte +them nothing, neither could they doe anie harme vnto them of China. The which +being perceiued by them of y<sup>e</sup> kingdome, they did yeeld themselues to +be subjectes and vassales vnto the king of China. The captaine beleeued this to +be a myracle, yet notwithstanding he did coniure her (as one of good +discretion), for that thinges might fall out to the contrarie; and the better to +certifie his opinion, whereby hee might the better giue relation thereof vnto +the king, he said: Ladie, turne me this rodde the which I haue in my hand drie, +to become greene and florishing, and if you can so do, I will worship you for a +saint. Then she at that instant did not onely make it greene,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span> +but also to haue an odoriferous smell. The which rod he put vpon the poope of +his ship for a remembrance, and for that he had a verie prosperous and good +viage, he did attribute it vnto her. So that vnto this day, they haue her in +reputation of a saint, and carrie her picture vppon the poope of their ships, +and such as be trauellers to the sea doo offer vnto her sacrifices.</p> +<p>These aforesaide they doo esteeme for their principall saints, yet besides +all these they haue an infinite number of carued idols, which they doo place +vpon alters in their tempels: the quantity of them is such that in my presence +it was affirmed by frier Geronimo Martin, he that entred into China, and is a +man of great credite woorthy to giue credite vnto, that amongst many other +things, he was in one of their temples in the cittie of Vcheo, where as hee did +count one hundred and twelue idols: and besides this they haue manie in the high +wayes and streetes, and vppon their principall gates of the citie, the which +they haue in small veneration, as you shall perceiue in this chapter following: +whereby it is plainlie to be seene, in what subiection they are vnto errours and +idolatrie, such as doo lacke the trueth of true Christian religion.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. III.</p> +<p class="intro">How little they doo esteeme their idols whome they worshippe.</p> + +<p>These miserable idolaters doo so little esteeme their idols, that it is a +great hope and confidence, that at what time soeuer the gospel shal haue any +entry into that country, straightwayes they will leaue off all their +superstitions: in particular in casting of lots, which is a thing much vsed +throughout all that kingdome: also this will be a great helpe thereunto, for +that they are generally men of good vnderstanding, and ducible and subiect vnto +reason, in so<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span> +ample sort (as is declared by that religious Dominicke aforesaid), he being in +Canton in a temple whereas they were sacrificing vnto their idols, being mooued +with great zeale to the honour of God, did throw certaine of them downe to the +grounde. When these idolaters did see his boldnesse, which seemed vnto them to +be without reason, they laide hands on him with an infernall furie, with +determination for to kill him: then he did request of them that before they did +execute it, that they would heare what he would say: the which his petition +seemed vnto the principals that were there to bee iust, and commanded all the +people to withdrawe themselues, and to heare what he woulde say. Then he, with +the spirit that God did put in him, said, that they should aduertise themselues, +for that God our Lorde and creator of heauen and earth, had giuen vnto them so +good vnderstandings, and did equall them vnto the politikest nations in all the +world: that they should not imploy it vnto euil, neither subiect themselues to +worship vnto stones and blocks of wood, which haue no discourse of reason, more +then is giuen them by the workmen that did make them, and it were more reason +the idols should reuerence and worship men, because they haue their similitude +and likenesse: with these words, and other such like in effect, they were all +quieted, and did not only approoue his saying to be true, but did giue him great +thankes, excusing themselues: saying, that vntill that time there was none that +euer did giue them to vnderstand so much, neither how they did euill in doing +their sacrifices, and in token of gratefulnes (leauing their idols on the +ground, and some broken all to pieces) they did beare him company vnto his +lodging. Hereby you may vnderstand with what facilitie, by the helpe of +almightie God, they may be reduced vnto our Catholicke faith: opening (by the +light of the gospel) the doore which the diuell hath kept shut by false +delusions so long time, although the king, with all his gouernors and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span> +ministers, hath great care that in all that kingdome there be none to induce +nouelties, neither to admit strangers or any new doctrin without license of the +said king, and of his roial counsel, vpon pain of death, the which is executed +with great rigor. They are people very ducible and apt to bee taught, and easie +to bee turned from their idolatrie, superstition, and false gods: the which they +haue in smal veneratiō as aforesaid. With great humility they do receiue and +approue corrections of their weaknes, and do know the vauntage that is betwixt +the gospell and their rights and vanities, and do receiue the same with a verie +good will, as it hath beene and is seene in manie Chinos that haue receiued +baptisme in the citie of Manila, vpon one of the Ilands Philippinas, whereas +they do dwell, and leaue their owne naturall countrie for to enioy that which +they vnderstande to bee for the saluation of their soules. So that those who +haue receiued baptisme are become verie good Christians.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. IV.</p> +<p class="intro">Of lots which they doo vse when they will doe anie thing of importance, +and howe they doe inuocate or call the diuell.</p> + +<p>The people of this countrie do not alonely vse superstitions, but they are +also great augurisers or tellers of fortunes, and do beleeue in auguries, as a +thing most certaine and infallible, but in especiall by certaine lots which they +<span class="sidenote">They cast lottes.</span> +do vse at all times, when they beginne any jorney, or for to doe anything of +importance, as to marie a sonne, a daughter, or lend anie money, or buy any +lands, or deale w<sup>t</sup> merchandise, or any other thing whose end is +incertaine or doubtfull. In all these matters they do vse lottes, the which they +do make of two sticks, flat on the one side, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span> +round on the other, and being tyed togither with a small threede, throwe them +before their idols. But before they do throwe them, they do vse great ceremonies +in talke, and vse amorous and gentle wordes, desiring them to giue them good +fortune. For by them they doe vnderstand the successe to be good or euill in +their iourney, or any other thing that they do take in hande. Likewise they do +promise them, if they do giue them good fortune, to offer vnto them victuales, +frontalles, or some other thing of price. This being done, they throwe downe +their lots, and if it so fall out that the flat side be vpper, or one flat side +and the other round, they haue it for an euill signe or token. Then they returne +vnto their idols, and say vnto them manie iniurious words, calling them dogs, +infamous, villaines, and other names like in effect. After they haue vttered +vnto them all iniuries at their pleasure, then they beginne againe to fawne vpon +them, and intreat them with milde and sweet words, crauing pardon of that which +is past, and promising to giue them more gifts then before they did, if their +lot do fal out wel. Then, in the like manner as before, they do proceed, and +throw the lots before the idols: but if it fal not out according vnto their +expectation, then they returne againe with vituperous and vile words: but if to +their desire, then with great praises and promises. But when that in matters of +great importance, it is long before their lots do fall well, then they take them +<span class="sidenote">They throw their gods under their feet.</span> +and throwe them to the grounde, and treade vppon them, or else throwe them into +the sea, or into the fire, whereas they let them burne a while: and sometimes +they doo whippe them vntill such time as the lottes doo fall as they would haue +them, which is the rounde side vpwards, and is a token of good successe vnto +that for which they do cast their lottes. Then if the lottes doo fall out vnto +their content, they doo make vnto them great feastes with musicke and songes of +great praise, and doo offer vnto them geese, duckes, and boyled rise. But if the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span> +thing whereon they doo cast their lottes bee of importance, then they doo offer +<span class="sidenote">A hogs head for a sacrifice.</span> +vnto them a hogges heade boyled, dressed with hearbes and flowers, the which is +esteemed aboue all other thinges, and therewith a great pot with wine. Of all +that they doo offer, they doo cut off their billes, and the clawes of the +fowles, and the hogges snowte, and do throw vpon it graines of rise, and +sprinkling it with wine, they set it in dishes vpon the altar, and there they do +eate and drinke, making great feast and cheere before their idols.</p> + +<p><span class="sidenote">Another kind of lots.</span> +Another kinde of lots they doo vse, in putting a great number of little +stickes into a pot, and vpon everie one of them is written a letter: and after +that they haue tumbled and tossed them together in the pot, they cause a child +to put in his hand and take out one, and when they haue seene the letter, they +seeke in a booke which they haue for that purpose the leafe that beginneth with +that letter, and looke what they doo finde written therein, they do interpret of +it conformable vnto the thing that they cast their lots for.<a name="FNanchor_62_62" id="FNanchor_62_62"></a><a href="#Footnote_62_62" class="fnanchor">[62]</a></p> + +<p>Generally in all this country when they finde themselues in any trouble, they +<span class="sidenote">Inuocation to the diuell.</span> +do inuocate and call vpon the diuell, with whom they do ordinarily talke (euen +as we do cal vpon God in our neede): of him they doo demande what way and order +they might take to cleere themselues thereof, as they did in the presence of +frier Pedro de Alfaro, of the order of Saint Francis, in the yeare of our Lorde +1580, at such<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span> +time as he came from China, as may be seene in his relation. The order that they +haue in inuocating or calling on the diuell, is as followeth. They cause a man +to lie vpon the ground, his face downwards, then another beginneth to reade vpon +a booke singing, and part of them that are present do answere vnto him, the rest +do make a sound with little bels and tabers; then within a little while after, +the man that lieth on the ground beginneth to make visages and iestures, which +is a certaine token that the diuell is entered within him: then do they aske of +him what they doo desire to know; then he that is possessed doth answere, yet +<span class="sidenote">The diuell telleth lies.</span> +for the most part they bee lies that hee doth speake; although hee doo keepe it +close, yet doth hee giue diuers reasons vnto that which hee dooth answere, for +that alwayes they doo answere either by worde or by letters, which is the +remedie they have when that the diuell will not answere by worde. And when that +he doth answere by letters, then do they spread a redde mantle or couerlet vpon +the ground, and throw thereon a certaine quantitie of rice dispersed equally in +euery place vpon the couerlet; then do they cause a man that cannot write to +stand there with a sticke in his hand; then those that are present do begin to +sing and to make a sounde as at the first inuocation, and within a little while +the diuell doth enter into him that hath the sticke, and causeth him to write +vpon the rice, then do they translate the letters that are there formed with the +sticke, and being ioyned altogether, they finde answere of that they do +demaunde; although for the most part it falleth out as aforesaide, as vnto +people that do communicate with the father of all lying, and so do their +answeares fall out false and full of leasings. If that at any time he do tell +them the truth, it is not for that he dooth it by nature or with his will, but +to induce them vnder the colour of a truth to perseuir in their errors, and they +do giue credite vnto a thousand lies: in this sort doo they inuocate the diuell, +and it is so ordinarie a thing throughout al the kingdome, that there is nothing +more vsed nor knowne.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span></p> +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. V.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the opinion they haue of the beginning of the worlde, and of +the +creation of man.</p> + +<p>Although the Chinos be generally verie ingenious, and of a cleere +vnderstanding, yet in their owne respect they say that all other nations in the +worlde be blinde, except the Spaniards, whom they have knowne but of late time; +they haue amongst them both naturall and morall philosophie, the which is read +publikely amongst them, and also astrologie.</p> +<p>But nowe touching the beginning of the worlde, and the creation of man: they +have many errors, wherof some of them shalbe declared in this chapter, taken out +of their owne books, and specially out of one that is intituled the beginning of +the world.</p> + +<p><span class="sidenote">Strange opinions.</span> +They say that at the beginning, the heaven, the earth, and the water were a +masse or lumpe ioyned in one. And that there is one resident in heaven, whom +they call by name Tayn, hee by his great science did separate heaven and earth +the one from the other, so that the heaven remained hie in the state that it is, +and the earth following his naturall inclination, as grave and heauie, did +remaine whereas it is. They say that this Tayn did create a man of nothing, who +they call Panzon,<a name="FNanchor_63_63" id="FNanchor_63_63"></a><a href="#Footnote_63_63" class="fnanchor">[63]</a> +and likewise a woman, who they call Pansona. This Panzon, by the power that was +given him by Tayn, did create of nothing another man, who they call Tanhom,<a name="FNanchor_64_64" id="FNanchor_64_64"></a><a href="#Footnote_64_64" class="fnanchor">[64]</a> +with thirteen other brothers. This Tanhom was a man of great science, in so +ample sort, that hee did give name vnto all created things, and did know by the +assignement and doctrine of Tayne the vertue of them all, and to apply them<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span> +to heale all manner of diseases and sicknesses: this Tanhom and his brethren, +but especially the eldest, who was called Teyencom,<a name="FNanchor_65_65" id="FNanchor_65_65"></a><a href="#Footnote_65_65" class="fnanchor">[65]</a> +he had twelve; his first begotten, called Tuhuncom, had nine, so had al the +rest very many. They do believe that the linage and generation of these did indure for more than ninty thousand yeeres, and in the end and conclusion of +them did end all humaine nature; for that it was the will of Tayn, who did first +create the man and woman of nothing, for to be reuenged on certaine iniuries +that they did vnto him, and for euery one that he had shewed vnto them, they did +almost knowe so much as himselfe, and would not acknowledge any superioritie, as +they did promise him, at such time as hee did give vnto him the secreat of all +his science. At that time did the heauen fall downe, then did Tayn raise it vp +againe, and created another man vpon the earth named Lotzitzam;<a name="FNanchor_66_66" id="FNanchor_66_66"></a><a href="#Footnote_66_66" class="fnanchor">[66]</a> +<span class="sidenote">Marvellous varieties.</span> +hee had two hornes, out of the which proceeded a verie sweete sauour, the which +sweet smell did bring forth both men and women. This Lotzitzam vanished away, +and left behind him in the world manie men and women, of whom did proceede all +nations that now are in it. The first that this Lotzitzam brought foorth was +called Alazan, and lived nine hundred yeares; then did the heauen create another +man called Atzion, whose mother, called Lutin, was with childe with him, onely +in seeing a lyons head in the aire: he was borne in Truchin in the province of +Santon, and liued eight hundred yeares. At this time was the worlde replenished +with much people, and did feede on nothing but on wilde hearbs and raw things: +then was there borne into the worlde one called Vsao, who gave them industrie to +make and do many things, as to vse the trees to make defence to save them from +wilde beasts, which did them much harme, and to kill them, and make garments of +their skinnes. After him came one called Huntzui, who did inuent the vse of +<span class="sidenote">The first invention of fire.</span> +fire, and instructed them what they should doo, and how to rost<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span> +and boyle their victuals, and how to barter and sell one thing for another. They +did understande one another in their contradictions by knots made vpon cords, +for that they had not the vse of letters nor any mention thereof. After that, +they say that a certain woman, called Hautzibon, was deliuered of a son named +Ocheutey,<a name="FNanchor_67_67" id="FNanchor_67_67"></a><a href="#Footnote_67_67" class="fnanchor">[67]</a> +who was the inuentor of many things and ordained mariage, and to play on many +<span class="sidenote">Strange opinions.</span> +and diuers instruments. They do affirme that he came from heauen by myracle for +to doo good vpon the earth: for that his mother going by the way did see the +print of a mans foote, and putting her foote on it, she was straight wayes +invironed with a lightning, with whom she was conceiued, and with child with +this son. This Ocheutey had a son called Ezoulom,<a name="FNanchor_68_68" id="FNanchor_68_68"></a><a href="#Footnote_68_68" class="fnanchor">[68]</a> +who was the inuentor of phisicke and astrology, but, in especiall, matters +touching lawe and iudgement. Hee showed them how to till the lande, and inuented +<span class="sidenote">The invention of plough and spade.</span> +the plough and spade; of this man they do tell manie wonderfull and maruellous +things, but amongst them all, they say that he did eate of seuen seuerall kindes +of hearbes that were poyson, <span class="sidenote">Sic. orig.</span> +and did him no harme; he liued 400 hundred yeares; +his son was called Vitey, the first they had amongst them; hee reduced all +<span class="sidenote">The first king of China.</span> +things to be vnder gouernement, and to haue it by succession, as shalbe declared +in the chapter whereas I will treate of the king of this mightie kingdome that +now liueth. These and many other varieties and toyes they saie of the beginning +of the world, whereby may be vnderstood how little men may do without the fauour +of God, and the light of the catholike faith, yea, though they be of the most +subtilest and finest wit that may be imagined.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p> +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. VI.</p> +<p class="intro">How they hold for a certaintie that the soule is immortall, and that he +shal haue another life, in the which it shalbe punished or rewarded +according vnto the workes which he doth in this world; and how they +pray for the dead.</p> + +<p>By that aforesaid it appeareth to be of a truth that the apostle S. Thomas +did preach in China, and we may presume that all which wee haue seene dooth +remaine printed in their hearts from his doctrine, and beareth a similitude of +the truth and a conformity with the things of our catholike religion. Now +touching this that wee will treate of in this chapter, of the immortalitie that +they believe of the soule, and of the rewarde or punishment which they shall +have in the other life, according vnto the workes doone in company with the +bodie, which appeareth to be the occasion that they do not live so euill as they +might, not hauing the knowledge of this truth.</p> +<p>I do hope by the power of his diuine maiestie that they wil easily be brought +vnto the true knowledge of the gospel. They say and do affirme it of a truth, +that the soule had his first beginning from the heauen, and shall neuer haue +<span class="sidenote">The soul is immortal.</span> +ende, for that the heauen hath given it an eternall essence. And for the time +that it is within the body that God hath ordained, if it do liue according to +such lawes as they have, without doing euill or deceit vnto his neighbor, then +it shalbe caried vnto heaven, wheras it shal liue eternally with great ioy, and +shalbe made an angel: and to the contrarie, if it liue ill, shall go with the +diuels into darke dungeons and prisons, whereas they shall suffer with them +torments which neuer shall haue end. They doo confesse that there is a place +whither such soules as shalbe made angels doo go to make themselues cleane of al +such euil as did cleaue unto them, being in the bodie: and for that it should be +speedelier doone, the good<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span> +deeds which are done by their parents and friends doo helpe them verie much. So +that it is very much vsed throughout al the kingdome to make orations and +praiers for the dead,<a name="FNanchor_69_69" id="FNanchor_69_69"></a><a href="#Footnote_69_69" class="fnanchor">[69]</a> +for the which they have a day appointed in the moneth of August. They do not +make their offrings in their temples, but in their houses, the which they doo in +<span class="sidenote">Strange obsequies.</span> +this manner following. The day appointed, all such as do beare them companie +vntill their sacrifices are concluded for the dead, which are such as we do cal +here religious men, euery one hath his companion and walketh the streets, and +dooth report the daies and houses where they will be, for that it cannot be +doone altogether. So when they come vnto the house whereas they must doo their +offices, they enter in, and do prepare that euery one do make oration and +sacrifice according to their fashion for the dead of that house, vnderstanding +that by their helpe they shalbe made cleane from their euils, which is an +impediment that they cannot be angels nor inioy the benefite which is ordained +for them in heauen. One of these that is like vnto a priest, dooth bring with +him a taber, and other two little bords, and another a little bell. Then they do +make an altar, wheron they do set such idols as the dead had for their saints +liuing; then do they perfume them with frankensence and storax and other sweet +smels: then do they put fiue or six tables ful of victuals for the dead and for +the saints: then straightwayes, at the sound of the taber, little bords, and +bels (which is a thing more apt for to dance by, as by report of them that have +heard it), they begin to sing certaine songs which they haue for that purpose: +then do the nouices goe vp vnto the altar, and do offer in written paper those +orations which they did sing to the sound of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span> +those instruments. This being done, they sit down and begin anew to sing as +before. In the end of their prayers and songs, he who doth this office, doth +sing a prayer, and in the end thereof (with a litle borde that he hath in his +hand for the purpose) he striketh a blow vpon the table, then the other do +answere in the same tune, declining their heades, and doe take certaine painted +papers, and guilt papers, and doe burne them before the altar. In this sort they +are all the night, which is the time that ordinarily they do make their +<span class="sidenote">They make their sacrifices in the night.</span> +sacrifices, the which being done, the priests and those that be in the house, do +eat the victuals that was set vpon the tables, wherein they doo spend the +residue of the night till it be day. They say that in doing this they do purifie +and make cleane the soules, that they may goe and become angels. The common +<span class="sidenote">Great superstition.</span> +people do beleeue of truth that the soule that liueth not well, before they go +into hell (which shall not be before the end of the world, according as they do +thinke in their error), in recompence of their euill life, the heauens doo put +them into the bodies of buffes and other beasts; and those which liue well, into +the bodies of kings and lords, whereas they are very much made of and well +serued. These and a thousande toies in like sort, making that the soul dooth +mooue out of one into another, as certaine old philosophers did affirme it to +bee, who were as blind and as far from the truth as they.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. VII.</p> +<p class="intro">Of their temples, and of certaine manner of religious people, both men +and women, and of their superiors.</p> + +<p>There are found in this kingdome many moral things, the which do touch verie +much our religion, which giueth vs to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span> +vnderstand that they are people of great vnderstanding, in especiall in naturall +things, and that it should be of a certainty, that the holy apostle of whom we +have spoken, did leaue amongst them by his preachings occasion for to learne +manie things that do shew vnto vertue; one of the which is, that there is found +amongst them many monasteries in their cities and townes, and also in the +fieldes, wherein are manie men and women that do liue in great closenes and +obedience, after the fashion of other religious monasteries. They haue amongst +them (that is knowne) onely foure orders, euery one of them hath their generall, +who dwelleth ordinarily in the citie of Suntien, or Taybin, whereas is the king +and his counsell. These their generals they doo call in their language <i> +tricon</i>, who doo prouide for euery prouince a prouinciall, to assist and +visite all the conuents, correcting and amending such faults as is found, +according vnto the institution and manner of liuing. This prouinciall doth +ordaine in euery conuent one, which is like vnto the prior or guardian, whom al +the rest do reuerence and obey. This generall is for euer till he doo die, +except they doo finde in him such faults that he doth deserue to be depriued; +yet they do not elect their prouincials as we do vse, but it is doone by the +king and his counsell, alwayes choosing him that is knowne to be of a good life +and fame, so that fauour carrieth nothing away. This generall is apparelled all +in silke, in that colour that his profession dooth vse, either black, yeallow, +<span class="sidenote">Gallant colours for religious men.</span> +white, or russet, which are the fower colours that the foure orders doo vse: hee +neuer goeth foorth of his house, but is carried in a little chaire of iuorie or +golde, by foure or sixe men of his habite. When any of the conuent doth talke +vnto him, it is on their knees; they haue also amongst them a seale of their +monasterie, for the dispatching of such businesse as toucheth their religion. +These haue great rentes giuen them by the king for the sustayning of themselues +and their suruants. All their conuents hath great rentes in general; part<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span> +giuen them by the king, and part of charitie, giuen them in those cities or +townes whereas they haue their houses, the which are many and verie huge. They +doo aske their charitie in the streets, singing with the sounde of two little +bords, and other instruments. Every one of them when they do begge, doth carrie +in their hands a thing, wherein are written certaine praiers, that they say is +for the sins of the people; and all that is giuen them in charitie they lay it +vpon the said thing, wherewith they do vnderstand (in their blind opinion) that +their spirit is cleare of all sinne. In general their beards and heads are +shauen, and they weare one sole vesture, without making any difference, +according vnto the colour of their religion. They do eate altogether, and haue +their sels according to the vse of our friers, their vestures or apparel is +ordinary of serge of the said foure colours. They haue beads to pray on, as the +papists vse, although in another order; they doe assist al burials for to haue +charity; they do arise two houres before day to pray, as our papists<a name="FNanchor_70_70" id="FNanchor_70_70"></a><a href="#Footnote_70_70" class="fnanchor">[70]</a> +do their mattins, and do continue in the same vntill the day doo breake: they +doo praie all in one voice, singing in verie good order and attention, and all +<span class="sidenote">Gallant bels.</span> +the time of their praying they do ring belles, whereof they haue in that +kingdome the best and of the gallantest sounde that is in all the world, by +reason that they are made almost all of steele; they pray vnto the heauen, whom +they take for their god, and vnto Sinquian, who they say was the inuenter of +that their manner of life, and became a saint. They may leaue their order at all +times at their pleasure, giuing their generall to vnderstand thereof.</p> + +<p>But in the time that they are in that order they cannot marrye, neither deale +with anye woman, vpon paine to bee punished asperly.<a name="FNanchor_71_71" id="FNanchor_71_71"></a><a href="#Footnote_71_71" class="fnanchor">[71]</a> +At such time as one doth put himselfe in religion, the father or next kinsman of +him that taketh<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> +the order, doth inuite all them of the conuent, and doth make them a great and +solemne banket; yet you must vnderstand that the oldest sonne of any man cannot +<span class="sidenote">The eldest sonne is prohibited to take orders.</span> +put himself in any monasterie, but is prohibited by the lawes of the countrie, +for that the eldest sonne is bound to sustaine his father in his old age. When +that any of these religious men do die, they doo wash him, and shaue him, before +they do burie him, and do all weare mourning apparell for him. The religious man +or woman that is once punished for any fault, cannot afterward turne and receiue +the habite at any time. They haue a certaine marke giuen vnto them in token of +their fault, and that is a borde put about their necke, so that it is seene of +all people. Euerie morning and euening they do offer vnto their idolles +frankensence, benjamin, wood of aguila,<a name="FNanchor_72_72" id="FNanchor_72_72"></a><a href="#Footnote_72_72" class="fnanchor">[72]</a> +and cayolaque,<a name="FNanchor_73_73" id="FNanchor_73_73"></a><a href="#Footnote_73_73" class="fnanchor">[73]</a> +the which is maruelous sweete, and other gummes of sweet and odoriferous smels. +When that they will lanch any ship into the water after that it is made, then +these religious men, all apparelled with rich roabes of silke, do go to make +sacrifices vpon the poopes of them, wheras they haue their oratories, and there +they doo offer painted papers of diuers figures, the which they doo cut in +peeces before their idols, with certaine ceremonies and songes well consorted, +and ringing of little belles, they do reuerence vnto the diuell. And they do +paint him in the fore castle, for that he shall do no harme vnto the shipps: +that being done, they do eate and drinke<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span> +till they can no more. And with this they thinke it is sufficient for the +shippe, that all such viages as shee shall make shall succeede well, the which +they haue amongst them for a thing most certaine: and if they did not blesse +them in this order, all things would fall out to the contrarie.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. VIII.</p> +<p class="intro">The order that they haue in burying of the dead, and the mourning +apparell they haue.</p> + +<p><span class="sidenote">A strange kind of buriall.</span> +It seemeth vnto me not farre from our purpose, to declare in this place, how +they vse in this kingdome to burie the dead, and it is surely a thing to be +noted: the manner is as foloweth. When that any one doth die, at the very +instant y<sup>t</sup> he yeeldeth vp y<sup>e</sup> gost, they do wash his bodie +all ouer from top to toe, then do they apparell him with the best apparell that +he had, all perfumed with sweet smels. Then after he is apparelled, they do set +him in y<sup>e</sup> best chaier that he hath; then commeth vnto him his father +and mother, brethren and sisters and children, who kneeling before him, they do +take their leaue of him, shedding of many teares, and making of great moane, +euery one of them by themselues. Then after them in order commeth all his +kinsfolkes and friends; and last of all his servants (if he had any), who in +like case do as the other before. This being done, they do put him into a coffin +or chest, made of verie sweete wood (in that countrie you haue verie much); they +do make it very close, to avoid the euil smel. Then do they put him on a table +with two bankes, in a chamber verie gallantly dressed and hanged with the best +clothes that can be gotten, couering him with a white sheete hanging downe to +the ground, whereon is painted the dead man or woman, as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span> +naturall as possible may be. But first in the chamber whereas the dead bodie is, +or at the entrie, they set a table with candles on it, and full of bread and +fruits of diuers sorts. And in this order they keepe him aboue ground 15 dayes, +in y<sup>e</sup> which time euery night commeth thether their priests and +religious men, whereas they sing praiers and offer sacrifices, with other +ceremonies: they bring with them many painted papers, and do burne them in the +presence of the dead bodie, with a thousand superstitions and witch-craftes: and +they do hang vpon cordes (which they haue for the same purpose) of the same +papers before him, and many times do shake them and make a great noyse, with the +which they say it doth send the soule straight vnto heauen.</p> +<p>In the end of the 15 daies, all which time the tables are continually +furnished with victuals and wine, which the priests, their kinsfolkes and +friends, that do come to visite them, do eat. These ceremonies being ended, they +take the coffin with the dead bodie, and carrie him into the fields, accompanied +with all his kinsfolks and friends, and with their priests and religious men, +carrying candles in their hands, wheras ordinarily they do burie them on a +mountaine, in sepulchres, that for the same purpose in their life time they +caused to be made of stone and masons worke: that being doone, straight waies +hard by y<sup>e</sup> sepulture, they do plant a pine tree, in y<sup>e</sup> +which place there be many of them, and they be neuer cut downe except they be +ouerthrowne with the weather, and after they be fallen they let them lie till +they consume of themselues, for that they be sanctified. The people y<sup>t</sup> +do beare him company to the graue, do go in uery good order like a procession, +and haue with them many instruments, which neuer leaue playing till such time as +the dead is put into the sepulcher. And that burial which hath most priests and +musicke is most sumptuous, wherin they were woont to spend great riches. They +sing to the sound of the instruments many orations vnto<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span> +their idols, and in the end they do burne vpon the sepulcher many papers, +whereon is painted slaues, horse, gold, siluer, silkes, and many other things, +the which they say, that the dead body doth possesse in the other world whether +he goeth to dwell. At such time as they do put him into the grave, they doo make +great bankets and sports with great pastime, saying of a truth, that looke what +soeuer they doo at that time, the angels and saints that are in heauen doe the +like vnto the souls of the dead that is there buried. Their parents, familiars, +and servants, in all this time doo weare mourning apparell, the which is verie +asper,<a name="FNanchor_74_74" id="FNanchor_74_74"></a><a href="#Footnote_74_74" class="fnanchor">[74]</a> +for that their apparell is made of a verie course wolle, and weare it next vnto +their skins, and girt vnto them with cords, and on their heads bunnets of the +same cloth, with verges brode like vnto a hat hanging downe to their eyes; for +father or mother they do weare it a hole yeare, and some two yeares, and if his +son be a gouernor (with licence of the king), he doth withdraw himself many +times, leauing the office he hath, the which they esteeme a great point of +honor, and have it in great account, and such as are not so much in aliance do +apparell them in died linnen certaine monethes. Likewise their parents and +friendes, although these doo weare it but for the time of the buriall.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. IX.</p> +<p class="intro">Of their ceremonies that they vse in the celebrating the Marriages.</p> + +<p>The people of this kingdome haue a particular care to giue state vnto their +children in time, before that they be ouercome or drowned in vices or lasciuious +liuing. The which care is the occasion, that in this countrie, being so<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span> +great, there is lesse vice vsed than in any other smaller countries: whose ouer +much care doth cause them many times to procure to marrie their children being +verie yoong: yea, and to make consort before they bee borne, with signes and +tokens, making their writings and bandes for the performance of the same in +publike order. In all this kingdome—yea, and in the Ilands Philippinas—it is a +customable vse, that the husband doth giue dowrie vnto the wife with whom he +doth marrie; and at such time as they doe ioyne in matrimonie, the father of the +bride doth make a great feast in his owne house, and doth inuite to the same the +father and mother, kinsfolkes and friends, of his sonne in lawe. And the next +day following, the father of the bridegroome, or his next parent, doth the +like vnto the kinsfolkes of the bride. These bankets being finished, the +husbande doth giue vnto his wife her dowrie in the presence of them all, and she +doth giue it vnto her father or mother (if she haue them) for the paines they +tooke in the bringing her vp. Whereby it is to be vnderstoode, that in this +kingdome, and in those that doe confine on it, those that haue most daughters +<span class="sidenote">They that haue most daughters are most richest.</span> +are most richest; so that with the dowries their daughters do giue them, they +may well sustaine themselues in their necessitie; and when they die, they doo +giue it that daughter that did giue it them, that it may remaine for their +children, or otherwise vse it at their willes. A man may marrie with so manie +<span class="sidenote">They may marrie with many wiues.</span> +wiues as he can sustaine, so it be not with his sister or brothers daughter; and +if any doo marrie in these two degrees, they are punished very rigorously. Of +all their wiues, the first is their legitimate wife, and all the rest are +accompted but as lemanes or concubines. These married men doo liue and keepe +house with his first wife, and the rest he doth put in other houses; or if he be +a merchant, then he doth repart them in such villages or townes whereas hee doth +deale in, who are vnto him as seruantes in respect of the first. When the father +doth die, the eldest sonne, by<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span> +his first wife, doth inherite the most part of all his goods, and the rest is +reparted in equall partes amongest the other children, both of his first wife +and of all the other wiues. For lacke of a sonne by his first wife, the first +borne of the other wiues doth inherite the most part: so that few times, or +neuer, there is none that dieth without heyres, eyther by his first wife, or by +the others. And if it so fall out that any of these his wiues do commit +adulterie (the which seeldome chaunceth, by reason of their keeping in, and +great honestie, as also it is great infamie unto the man that doth offer any +<span class="sidenote">Honest women.</span> +such thing), then may the husband, finding them togither, kill them: but after +that first furie being past, he cannot but complaine of the adulterers vnto the +Justic, and although it be proued verie apparent, yet can they giue them no more +punishment but beate them cruelly vpon their thyghes, as is the custome and lawe +of the countrie, as shalbe declared vnto you in his place. Then may the husband +afterwardes sell his wife for a slave, and make money of her for the dowrie he +gaue her. Notwithstanding, there be amongst them that for interest will +dissemble the matter—yea, and will seeke opportunities and occasion. Yet if such +be spied or knowen, they are righteously punished. They say in the prouinces +that bee neere vnto Tartaria, and in the selfe same Tartaria they doo vse a +custome and manner of marriage very strange, that is: the vizroys or gouernors +doo limit and appoint a time when that all men and women shall meete together, +such as will marrie, or receive the order of religion.</p> + +<p><span class="sidenote">A strange kind of marriage.</span> +The time being accomplished, all such as would be married, do meete together +in a citie of that prouince appointed for that purpose; and when they come +thither, they doo present themselues before 12 auncient and principall men, +appointed there by the king for the same purpose, who doo take a note of their +names, both of men and women, and of what state and degree they are, and of +their substance for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span> +to dowrie their wiues with whom they shalbe married. Then do they number all the +men and women that be there, and if they do find more men than women, or, to the +contrarie, more women than men, then they cast lots, and do leaue the number +that doth so beare in register til the next yeare; y<sup>t</sup> they may be the +first that shalbe married. Then sixe of those ancient men do put the men in +three parts; the rich they put in one part, without any consideration of +gentilitie or beautie, and those that are rich in a meane in an other parte, and +the poor in the thirde part. In the meane time that these sixe men be occupied +in the reparting of the men, the other sixe doe repart the women in three +parts—to say in this manner, the most fairest in one part, and them not so faire +in an other, and the fowlest in an other. This diuision being made, then do they +marrie them in this order: vnto the riche men they doo giue the fairest, and +they doo giue for them the prise that is appointed by the judges, and vnto them +that are not so rich they do giue them that are not so faire, without paying for +them anye thing at all; and vnto the poore men they giue the fowlest, with all +that which the rich men do pay for the faire women, diuiding it into equall +partes. Sure it is a notable thing if it bee true. This being done, they are all +married in one daie, and holpen (although peraduenture not all content), the +marriages being doone, there is greate feastes made, in such houses as the king +hath ordeyned in euerye citie for the same purpose, the which are furnished with +beds, and all other necessaries belonging thereunto, for that the new married +people may be serued of all that is needful for the time that the feast do +indure. This solemnitie beeing finished, which they saye doth indure fiftie +dayes, these newe married people doo goe vnto their owne houses. You must +vnderstande that this custome of marriage is ordeyned for the common and poore +people, and not for lords nor gentlemen, who are not bound to obey this +ordinaunce, but to marrie whereas they like best, euerie one<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span> +to seeke and marrie with his equall, or else by an order which the king hath set +downe vnto the viceroys and gouernors, what to be done therein.</p> +<p>When that the King of China is married, then dooth he choose thirtie +concubines, the principallest persons in all his kingdome, the which hee dooth +keepe and maintayne within his pallace so long as hee doth liue. But after that +hee is dead, and his funerall ended, as is accustomed, then doth the heire or +successor of the kingdome apparell these thirtie women maruelous gorgeously, +with many iewelles; then doth hee cause them to set in an estrado, or rich +pallet, gallantly dressed and furnished, in one of the three halles (as shall be +declared in the second chapter of the third booke), with their faces couered, in +such sort as they may not be seene nor knowen; and being set in this order, then +doth there enter in thirtie gentlemen of the principallest of the kingdome, +(those whom the king left named in his testament), the which goeth by +antiquitie, or according vnto order set by the king; and eyther of them doth +take one of these ladies by the hand, and looke howe they found them, so they +doo carrie them with their faces covered till they bring them home to their +houses, whereas they haue them for their wiues, and do maintaine and keepe them +all the dayes of their liues. Towards the mainteyning of them, the king doth +leaue in his testament great reueneues, and the successor in the kingdome doth +accomplish and performe the same with great diligence and care.</p> +<p>In old time, when that the kinges of China would marrie one of his children +or kingsfolkes, he did make in his pallace a great and solemne banket, to the +which he did inuite all the principallest lordes and gentlemen of his court, +commaunding to bring with them their sonnes and daughters, who did accomplish +the same, striuing who should apparell their children most richest and most +gallantest. The banket being done, the young princes do go whereas are these<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span> +young ladies, euerie one placed in order according to their age, and there he +doth chuse his wife according to his owne will or desire, and where he liketh +best. But at this time, this custome is left off, for that the princes and +gentlemen do marry with their kinsfolkes, so that it be not in the first or +seconde degree: yet many times they do not keepe the second.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. X.</p> +<p class="intro">How that in all this mightie kingdome there is no poore folks walking in +the streets nor in the temples a begging, and the order that the king +hath giuen for the maintayning of them that cannot worke.</p> + +<p>Manie things of great gouernment hath beene and shall be declared in this +historie worthy to be considered: and in my opinion, this is not the least that +is contained in this chapter, which is such order as the king and his counsell +<span class="sidenote">A good order to avoid idle people.</span> +hath giuen, that the poore may not go a begging in the streetes, nor in the +temples whereas they make orations vnto their idols: for the auoiding therof the +king hath set downe an order, vpon great and greeuous penaltie to be executed +vpon the saide poore, if they do begge or craue in the streetes, and a greater +penaltie vpon the citizens or townes men, if they do giue vnto any such that +beggeth; but must incontinent go and complaine on them to the justice, who is +one that is called the justice of the poore, ordayned to punish such as doo +breake the lawe, and is one of the principallest of the citie or towne, and hath +no other charge but only this. And for that the townes be great and many, and so +full of people, and an infinite nomber of villages, whereas it cannot be chosen +but there is many borne lame, and other misfortunes, so that he is not idle, but +alwaies occupied in giuing order to remedie the necessities of the poore without +<span class="sidenote">I would the like were with vs.</span> +breaking of the lawe. This iudge, the first day that hee doth enter into his +office, hee commandeth that whatsoeuer children be borne a creeple in any part +of his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span> +members, or by sicknes be taken lame, or by any other misfortune, that +incontinent their fathers or mothers doo giue the iudge to vnderstande thereof, +that he may prouide for all things necessarie, according vnto the ordinance and +will of the king and his counsell; the which is, the man child or woman child, +being brought before him, and seene the default or lacke that it hath, if it be +so that with the same it may exercise any occupation, they giue and limit a time +vnto the parents, for to teach the child that occupation ordayned by the iudge, +and it is such as with their lamenes they may vse without any impediment, the +which is accomplished without faile; but if it so be, that his lameness is such +that it is impossible to learne or exercise any occupation, this iudge of the +poore doth command the father to sustaine and maintaine him in his owne house +all the dayes of his life, if that hee hath wherewithall; if not, or that hee is +fatherlesse, then the next rich kinsman must maintaine it; if he hath none such, +then doth all his parents and kinsfolkes contribute and pay their partes, or +giue of such thinges as they haue in their houses. But if it hath no parentes, +or they be so poore that they cannot contribute nor supply any part therof; then +doth the king maintaine them in verie ample manner of his owne costes in +hospitalles, verie sumptuous, that he hath in euerie citie throughout his +kingdome for the same effect and purpose: in the same hospitalles are likewise +maintayned all such needie and olde men as haue spent all their youth in the +<span class="sidenote">A very good order.</span> +wars, and are not able to maintaine themselues: so that to the one and the other +is ministered all that is needefull and necessarie, and that with great +diligence and care: and for the better accomplishing of the same, the iudge doth +put verie good order, and dooth appoint one of the principallest of the citie or +towne, to be the administrator, without whose licence, there is not one within +that hospitall that can goe foorth of the limittes: for that license is not +granted vnto anie, neyther doo they demand it, for that there they are prouided +of all thinges<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span> +necessarie so long as they doo liue, as well for apparell as for victualles. +Besides all this, the olde folkes and poore men within the hospitall, doo bring +vpp hennes, chickens, and hogges for their owne recreation and profit, wherein +they doo delight themselves. The iudge doth visite often times the administrator +by him appointed. Likewise the iudge is visited by an other that commeth from +the court, by the appointment of the king and the counsell to the same effect: +and to visite all such hospitalles as bee in the prouinces limited in his +commission, and if they doo finde any that hath not executed his office in right +<span class="sidenote">A mirror for vs to look vpon.</span> +and iustice, then they doo displace them, and punish them verie rigorouslie: by +reason whereof all such officers haue great care of their charges and liue +vprightly, hauing before their eyes the straight account which they must giue, +and the cruell rewarde if to the contrarie.</p> + +<p>The blinde folkes in this countrie are not accounted in the number of those +that of necessitie are to bee maintayned by their kinsfolkes, or by the king; +for they are constrayned to worke; as to grind with a querne<a name="FNanchor_75_75" id="FNanchor_75_75"></a><a href="#Footnote_75_75" class="fnanchor">[75]</a> +wheate or rice, or to blowe smythes bellowes, or such like occupations, that +they haue no neede of their sight. And if it be a blind woman, when she commeth +vnto age, she doth vse the office of women of loue, of which sorte there are a +great number in publike places, as shall be declared in the chapter for that +purpose. These haue women that doo tende vpon them, and doo paint and trim them +vp, and they are such that with pure age did leaue that office. So by this order +in all this kingdome, although it be great, and the people infinite, yet there +is no poore that doo perish nor begge in the streetes, as was apparent vnto the +Austen and Barefoote fryers, and the rest that went with them into that +countrie.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l30 p6" /> +<h2><span class="s08">THE THIRD BOOKE</span><br /> +<span class="s05">AND</span><br /> +<span class="s08">HISTORIE</span><br /> +<span class="s05">OF THE</span><br /> +<span class="s08">GREAT AND MIGHTIE KINGDOME OF CHINA,</span><br /> +<span class="s05">IN THE WHICH IS CONTAYNED MANY NOTABLE THINGS WOORTHIE<br /> +TO BE CONSIDERED OF, TOUCHING MORALL<br /> +AND POLLITIKE MATTERS.</span></h2> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. I.</p> +<p class="intro">How manie kinges hath beene in this kingdome, and their names.</p> + +<p>In the fourth chapter of the first booke, I did promise particularly to +declare howe many kinges haue beene in this kingdome, and their names. Nowe to +accomplish the same, I will beginne and declare the succession of them from +<span class="sidenote">Vitey, the first king of China.</span>Vitey (who was the first that did reduce the kingdome to one empire gouernment) +vnto him that dooth reigne at this daye, remitting that which shall lacke vnto +the chapter aforesaide: whereas shall be found the number of the kinges, and how +many yeares since the first beginning of this kingdome, and the manner of the +succession.<a name="FNanchor_76_76" id="FNanchor_76_76"></a><a href="#Footnote_76_76" class="fnanchor">[76]</a></p> + +<p> +This Vitey was the first king of China (as it appeareth by<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span> +their histories, where as they doo make particular mention). But amongest other +thinges that they do declare of the kinges person, they do say that he was in +height so much as seuen measures, which is accustomed in China; and euerie +<span class="sidenote">Which is foure yeardes quarter and halfe.</span> +measure is two thirdes of a Spanish vare, which is by good account foure vares<a name="FNanchor_77_77" id="FNanchor_77_77"></a><a href="#Footnote_77_77" class="fnanchor">[77]</a> +and two terses<a name="FNanchor_78_78" id="FNanchor_78_78"></a><a href="#Footnote_78_78" class="fnanchor">[78]</a> +in length: he was sixe palmes broade in the shoulders, and was as valiant in his +deedes as in bignesse of his bodie: he had a captaine called Lincheon, who was +not onely valiant, but politike and of great wisedome, by reason whereof with +his valour and strength he did subiect vnto Vitey all the whole countrie that he +doth now possesse, and caused all people to feare him. They do attribute that +<span class="sidenote">The first inuention of garments and dying of colours.</span> +this Vitey did first inuent the vse of garmentes for to weare, and by the dying +of all manner of colours, of making of shippes: hee likewise inuented the sawe +to sawe tymber; but aboue all thinges he was a great architector, and an +inuenter of buildinges, whereof hee made verie manie and verie sumptuous, which +doo indure vnto this day in the remembraunce of his name: he did also inuent the +wheele to turne silke, the which is vsed to this day in all the kingdome: hee +was the first that did use to weare golde, pearles, and precious stones for +iewelles, and to weare cloth of golde, siluer, and silke in apparell: he did +repart all the people of the countrie into cities, townes, and villages, and did +ordaine occupations, and commaunded that no man should vse any other but that +which his father did vse, without his particular licence, or the gouerners of +his kingdome. And that should not be granted without great occasion for the +same.</p> +<p>All of one occupation were put in streetes by themselues,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span> +the which order is vsed vnto this day throughout al the kingdome; so that if you +doo desire to know what occupation is in anye street, it is sufficient to see +the first house thereof, although it be very long: for it is verie certaine that +they be all of one occupation and not mingled with any other. Amongst all other +things he ordeyned one thing of great consideration, that was, no woman to be +<span class="sidenote">No woman to be idle.</span> +idle, but to worke, either in her husbands occupation, or in sowing or spinning. +This was a law so generall amongst them, that the queene her selfe did obserue +and keepe it.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">A strange kind of hearb.</span> +They saye that he was a great astrologician, and had growing in the court of +his pallace a certaine hearbe, the which did make a manner of demonstration when +that any did passe by it, whereby it did shewe if any were euill intentioned +against the king. Many other things they do declare which I let passe, because I +would not be tedious vnto the reader, referring the dreames and fondnesse of +these idolaters vnto the iudgement of your discretion: for vnto the discreete is +sufficient to touch of euerie thing a little. He had foure wiues, and by them +fiue and twentie sonnes; he reyned a hundreth yeares: there was betwixt this +king and he which did build the great wall (that was spoken of in the ninth +chapter of the first booke) one hundred and sixteene kinges, all of the lynage +of this Vitey. All the which did raigne, as appeareth by their histories, two +thousand two hundreth and fiftie seuen yeares. I do not here declare their +names, because I would not be tedious, although they be particularly named in +their histories; but here I will set downe them that I finde necessarie to be +spoken of for the succession vnto him that now reygneth.</p> +<p>The last king of the lynage of this woorthie Vitey, was called Tzintzon: this +did make the mightie and great wall aforesaide. Finding himselfe to be greatly +troubled with the king of Tartarie, who did make warre vppon him in many places +of his kingdom, he did ordaine the making thereof,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span> +and for the furnishing of the same, he did take the third man of the countrie to +the worke; and for that manie people did die in this tedious worke, by reason +they went so farre from their owne houses, and in diuers climes cleane contrarie +vnto that where as they were bred and borne: it grew that the king was hated and +abhorred of all people, in such sort that they did conspire his death, which in +effect they did accomplish and slew him, after he had reigned fortie yeares: and +also his sonne and heyre, who was called Aguizi. After the death of this +Tzintzon and his sonne, they did ordaine for their king one that was called +Anchosan, a man of great valour and wisedome; hee reigned twelue yeeres: a sonne +of his did succeede him in the kingdom, called Futey, and he reigned seuen +yeares. After the death of this king, who died very young, his wife did reigne +and gouerne, and was of his owne lineage: she did maruellously gouerne that +kingdome for the space of 18 yeares, and for that shee had no issue naturall of +her bodie, a sonne of her husbands y<sup>t</sup> he had by an other wife did +succeede in the kingdome, and reigned three and twentie yeares: a son of his did +succeede him, called Cuntey, and reigned 16 yeares and eight monthes: a son of +his called Guntey, did reigne 54 yeares: a sonne of his did succeede him called +Guntey, and reigned thirteene yeares: his sonne, called Ochantey, did succeede +him, and reigned 25 yeares and three monthes: his son, called Coanty, succeeded +him, and reigned 13 yeares and two monthes. After him reigned his sonne Tzentzey +26 yeares and 4 monthes: then succeeded his son called Anthrey, and reigned no +more but 6 yeares; his sonne, Pintatey, did inherite and reigned 5 yeares. This +Pintatey when he died was not married, and therefore a brother of his did +succeede him, called Tzintzuny, and reigned but 3 yeares and 7 monethes: after +him succeeded a younger brother called Huy Hannon, and reigned sixe yeares: his +sonne, called Cubun, did succeed him, and reigned 32 yeares:<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span> +his sonne, Bemthey, did inherite and reigned 18 yeares: after him his son, +Vnthey, and reigned 13 yeares: Othey succeeds him, and reigned 17 yeares; his +sonne, called Yanthey, reigned but 8 monethes, and left a sonne, called Anthey, +who reigned 19 yeares, whose eldest sonne, called Tantey, died incontinent after +his father, and reigned only 3 monthes, and his brother, called Chyley, reigned +one yeare; his son, called Linthey, reigned 22 yeares; his sonne, called +Yanthey, did succeede him, and reigned 31 years. This Yanthey (the historie +saieth) was a man of small wisedome, which was the occasion that he was abhorred +and hated of those of his kingdome. A nephew of his, called Laupy, did rebell +against him; he had two sociates for to helpe him, gentlemen of the court; they +were two brethren and verie valiant, the one was called Quathy, the other +Tzunthey; these two did procure to make Laupy king. His vncle the king +vnderstoode thereof, and was of so litle valor and discretion, that he could +not, neither durst he put remedie in the same, which caused commotions and +common rumors amongst the people. But in especiall there was foure tyrantes +ioyned in one, and all at one time, they wer called, Cincoan, Sosoc, Guansian, +and Guanser. Against these Laupy did make warre vnder colour to helpe his vncle, +but after a while, that the warre indured, he concluded and made peace with +Cincoan, and he married with one of his daughters, who straight wayes made warre +against the other three tyrants with the helpe of his father in lawe.</p> +<p>At this time this mightie kingdome was diuided in three partes, and beganne +the tyrannie as you shall vnderstande: the one and principall part fell vpon +Laupy by the death of his vncle, the other to Sosoc, and the other vnto Cincoan +his father in law. In this sort remained the kingdome in diuision a while, til +such time as Cuthey, sonne vnto Laupy, did reigne in his fathers steede. Then +did there a tyrant rise vp against him, called Chimbutey, and slew him: he by<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span> +his great valour did bring the kingdome all in one as before, after that it had +bin in diuision 41 yeares, and reigned after that alone 25 yeares: his sonne, +named Fontey, did succeede him, and reigned 17 yeares. And to make short of this +linage, there was 15 kinges, and reigned 176 yeares; against the last of them, +who was called Quioutey, there did arise against him tyrannously Tzobu. Of this +linage there was eyght kinges, who reigned 62 yeares: against the last of them, +called Sutey, there arose one called Cotey, of whose lynage there was fine +kings, and reigned twentie foure yeres; the last of them, called Otey, was +slaine by Dian. There was of this lynage foure kings that reigned 56 yeres: +against the last of them rose vp Tym, and there was of this race fiue kinges, +and reigned one and thirty yeares: against the last of this house rose vp Tzuyn. +And there was of this linage three kings, and reigned seuen and thirtie yeares, +against the last of these rose vp Tonco. This and all the rest of his lynage did +gouerne maruelous well; which was the occasion that they endured the longer +time. There was of them one and twentie kinges, and reigned 294 yeares; the last +of them, called Troncon, did marrie with one that had beene his fathers wife, +called Bausa, a verie faire woman: hee tooke her out of a monasterie, where she +was a nunne, onely to marrie with her: she vsed such policie that he was slaine, +and did gouerne the kingdome after, alone, one and fortie yeares. The historie +sayth that she was dishonest, and that with extremitie, and vsed the companie of +the best and principallest of the realme; and not content with that, she married +with one of base lynage, one fit for her purpose, because she was so vicious. +They say that before she did marrie, she caused to be slaine the sonnes she had +by her first husbande, for that she had a desire that a nephew of hers should +succeede her in the kingdome. Then those of the kingdome perceiuing her intent, +and wearie of her by reason of her ill liuing, sent out to seeke a bastard sonne +of her husbandes,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span> +who was fledde away, and with a common consent they raysed him for king. He was +called Tautzon: he caused cruell and rigorous iustice to be done vpon his +stepmother, as was reason for her euilles, and an example to all those of the +kingdome, who by a president of her ill liuing beganne to straggle: there was of +his lynage seuen kinges, that reigned 130 yeares: against the last, called +Concham, arose Dian; of this linage there were but two kinges, and reigned +eighteene yeares. Against the second and last arose Outon, and was of his linage +three kinges, and reigned but fifteene yeares: against the last there arose +Outzim; of this there was but two kinges, and reigned nine yeares and three +monethes; there arose against the last Tozo: he and his sonne reigned foure +yeares: with the sonne of this one Auchin did fight and slewe him in the combat, +and succeeded him in the kingdome: hee with other two of his lynage reigned +tenne yeares; against the last of these arose vp one of the lynage of Vitey, the +first king, and slewe him; hee was called Zaytzon; there was of this lynage +seuenteene kinges, and reigned with all peace and quietnesse three hundred and +twentie yeares: the last of this lynage was called Tepyna, with whom did fight +the gran Tartaro called Vzon, who entred into China with a mightie armie, and +got all the kingdome; and it was possessed with nine Tartare kings, the which +reigned 93 yeares, and intreated the inhabitantes with great tyrannie and +seruitude: the last of these was called Tzintzoum; this was more cruel vnto the +Chinos then any of the rest, which was the occasion that all the kingdome did +ioyne together in one, and did elect a king, called Gombu, a man of great valour +and of the lynage of ancient kinges past, who by his great woorthinesse and +ioyning much people together, did so much that hee did driue all the Tartaros +out of the kingdome, with the death of many thousands of them, who obstinately +and without iustice did with all tyrannie keepe that kingdome in possession: +there<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span> was of +this lynage twelue kinges with this that now reigneth: the eleuen kinges past +reigned two hundreth yeares: he that now possesseth the kingdome is called +Boneg, who by the death of his elder brother that died by a fall hee had from +his horse, did inherite the kingdome: he is of 21 yeares of age (as they saye) +and hath his mother aliue, of whom, as yet, there is nothing written: so that I +can write nothing in particular, but that they say he is a gallant gentleman, +and welbeloued of his subiects, and a great friende vnto iustice. He is married +with a cosen of his, and hath one sonne.</p> +<p>Those of his linage hath got of the Tartares many countries since they were +driven out of China, the which are on the other side of the mightie wall. God +for His mercie's sake bring them to the knowledge of His holy lawe, and +accomplish a prophesie that they have amongst them, by the which they are given +to vnderstand that they shall be ruled and brought in subiection by men with +great eyes and long beards—a nation that shall come from countries farre off, by +whom they shalbe commanded, which signifieth to be Christians. The king of this +countrie is had in so great reputation amongest his subiects, that in all the +prouinces where he is not resident, in the chiefe cities whereas are the +vizroyes or gouernors, they haue a table of gold, in the which is portred the +king that nowe reigneth, and couered with a curtin of cloth of gold, verie +riche, and thether goeth euery day the loytias, which are the gentlemen, men of +lawe, and ministers of justice, and do by dutie reuerence vnto it, as though the +kinge were personally present. This table and picture is discouered the first +day of their feasts which they doo celebrate, and is at the newe moone of euery +month, on the which day all people do repaire and do reuerence vnto the picture +with the same respect as they would doo if he were present: they do call the +king Lord of the Worlde, and Sonne of Heaven.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. II.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the court and pallace of the king, and of the citie where as he is +resident; and how that in all the kingdome there is not one that is +lord over subiects by propertie.</p> + +<p>The habitation of this king, and almost of al his predecessors, hath bin and +is commonlie in the citie of Taybin or Suntien: the occasion is (as they saye) +for that it is neerest vnto the Tartarians, with whom continually they have had +wars, that they might the better put remedie in any necessitie that shoulde +happen, or, peraduenture, for that the temperature or clime of that place is +more healthfull than the other prouinces, or the dwelling to be of more +pleasure, as it is giuen to vnderstand by that worde Suntien, which in their +language is as much to say the celestiall citie; it is of such bignesse that, +for to crosse it ouer from gate to gate, a man must traueile one whole day, and +<span class="sidenote">A citie of a daies iourney long.</span> +have a good horse, and put good diligence, or else he shal come short: this is, +besides, the subburbes, which is as much more ground. Amongst the Chinos is +found no varietie in the declaration of this mightie city, and of the great +riches that is in it, which is a signe to be of a truth for that they agree all +in one. There is so much people in it, what of citizens and courtiers, that it +is affirmed that, vpon any vrgent occasion, there may be ioyned together two +hundreth thousand men, and the half of them to bee horsemen. At the entring into +this citie toward the orient, is situated the mightie and sumptuous pallace of +the king, where he remaineth ordinarily, although hee hath other two: the one in +the midst of the citie, and the other at the end towards the west. This first +pallace they do testifie is of such huge bignesse, and so much curiositie, that +it is requisite to haue foure days at the least to view and see it all. First it +is compassed<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span> +about with seuen walles, very huge; and the space that is betwixt one wall and +other doth contain ten thousand souldiers, which doo watch and gard the king's +house dayly: there is within this pallace three score and nineteen halls, of a +marueilous rich and curious making, wherein there are many women that do serve +the king in the place of pages and squires; but the principallest to be seen in +this pallace is foure halles very rich, whereas the king giveth audience vnto +such ambassadours as come vnto him from other kingdomes or prouinces, or vnto +his owne people when they call any court of parliament (which is very seldome), +for that he is not seene by his commons out of his owne house but by great +chance, and yet when they doo see him, for the most part it is by a glasse +window. The first of these hals is made al of mettal, very curiously wrought +<span class="sidenote">Foure curious halles.</span> +with manie figures: and the seconde hath the seeling and the floore wrought in +the order of masons' worke, all of siluer of great value: the third is of fine +golde, wrought and inamiled verie curiously. The fourth is of so great riches, +that it much exceedeth all the other three: for that in it is represented the +power and riches of that mightie kingdome: and therefore in their language they +do cal it the hall of the king's treasure; and they do affirme that it deserueth +to haue that name—for that there is in it the greatest treasure that any king +hath in all the world, besides many iewels of an inestimable price, and a chaire +(wherein he dooth sit) of great maiesty, made of iuory, set full of precious +stones and carbuncles, of a great price, that in the darkest time of the night +the hall is of so great clearenesse as though there were in it many torches or +lights: the wals are set full of stones of diuers sorts, verie rich and of great +vertue, wrought verie curiously: and to declare it in fewe words, it is the +richest and principalst thing to be seene in all the kingdome, for therein is +the principallest thereof.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span></p> + +<p>In these foure halles are heard such ambassadours as are sent from other +countries, according vnto the estate and qualitie of the king and prouinces from +whence they come: so that according as they are esteemed, so are they +entertained into one of these foure hals. If that from whence they come is from +a king of small power, he hath audience in the first hall: if he be of a +reasonable power, in the second hal, and in this order in the rest. Within this +mightie pallace, the king hath all that any humane vnderstanding can desire or +aske (touching this life), in pleasure for to recreate his person, and for their +queene: for that neuer (or by great chance) they go foorth of the same: and it +hath beene a customable vse amongst the kings of that countrie, that it is as a +thing inherited by succession never to go forth. They say, their reason why they +doo keepe themselues so close and not to go abroade, is to conserue the mightie +estate of their estade,<a name="FNanchor_79_79" id="FNanchor_79_79"></a><a href="#Footnote_79_79" class="fnanchor">[79]</a> +and also to auoide for being slaine by treason (as many times it falleth so +out); for which occasion you haue had kings, that in all the time of their +reigne haue not gone out of their pallace but onely the day of their oath and +crownation: and besides this their close keeping, yet haue they tenne thousande +men continually (as aforesaide) in garde of the pallace both day and night, +besides others that are in the courtes, staires and halles, and other places. +Within the gates and wals of this mightie pallace they haue gardines, orchards, +woodes, and groues, whereas is all manner of hunt, and foule, and great pondes +full of fish. And, to conclude, they haue all manner of pleasures and delites, +that may be inuented or had in any banketting house in the fielde. In all this +kingdome there is not one that is lorde ouer any subiect or vassales (as they of +Turkie), neither haue they any iurisdiction proper, but that which is his +patrimonie and moueables, or that which the king doth giue them in recompence of +good seruice or gouernment, or for any<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span> +other particular respect: all the which dooth end with the person, and is +returned againe vnto the king, except he will giue it vnto the sonne of him that +is dead, in curtesie more then by obligation or duetie: giuing to vnderstande +that it is to auoyd inconueniences and occasions of treasons, which might grow +if that there were any lords that were rich or of power, and not for couetousnes +or any other intent. Those whom he dooth put in authoritie, whether they are +vizroyes, gouernours, or captaine generals, or whatsoeuer they be, hee giueth +vnto them large wages, sufficient to sustaine them in their office, in so ample +sort, that it is rather ouerplus vnto them then lacke; for that he will not that +their necessitie compell them to take presents or bribes, which thing doth +<span class="sidenote">Punished for taking bribes.</span> +blinde them, that they cannot do iustice vprightly: and vnto him that doth +receiue or take any such (although it be but of smal prise) he is cruelly +punished.</p> +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. III.</p> +<p class="intro">The number of such subiects as doo pay vnto the king tribute in all these fifteene prouinces.</p> + +<p>Vnderstanding the greatnesse of this kingdome of China, and the infinite +number of people that is therein, it is an easie thing to bee beleeued, the +number that euery prouince hath of such as do pay tribute, as is taken out of +the booke that the officers haue, whereby they do recouer that tribute: and it +is affirmed, that there are as many more, such as are free and do pay no +tribute. The loytians and ministers of iustice, all sorts of soldiers, both by +sea and land (which is an infinite number), are free and do pay nothing; the +number as followeth.</p> +<p>The prouince of Paguia<a name="FNanchor_80_80" id="FNanchor_80_80"></a><a href="#Footnote_80_80" class="fnanchor">[80]</a> +hath two millions seuen hundred and foure thousand that doth pay tribute to the +king.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span></p> +<p>The prouince of Santon, 3 millions and 700 thousand tributers.</p> +<p>The prouince of Foquien, two millions foure hundred and seuen thousand +tributers.</p> +<p>The prouince of Olam, two millions two hundred and foure thousand tributers.</p> +<p>The prouince of Sinsay, three millions three hundred and foure score +thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Susuan, two millions and fiftie thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Tolanchia, there where as the king is resident, and is the +biggest of them al, sixe millions fourescore and ten thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Cansay, two millions three hundred and fiue thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Oquiam, three millions and eight hundred thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Ancheo, two millions eight hundred and foure thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Gonan, one million and two hundred thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Xanton, one million nine hundred fortie and foure thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Quicheu, two millions thirtie and foure thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Chequeam, two millions two hundred and fortie foure thousand.</p> +<p>The prouince of Sancii, which is the least of all the prouinces, hath one +million sixe hundred threescore and twelue thousand tributers.</p> +<p>By this account it is found, that the tribute payers are verie many: and it +is approoued in manie places of this historie whereas they do treate of the +greatnes of this kingdome, that it is the mightiest and biggest that is to bee +read of in all the world. God, for His mercies sake, bring them to the knowledge +of His lawe, and take them out from the tyrannie of the diuell, wherein they are +wrapped.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. IV.</p> +<p class="intro">The tribute that the king hath in these fifteene prouinces, according +vnto the truest relation.</p> + +<p>Although this kingdome is great and very rich, yet there is none that doth +pay so little tribute ordinarily vnto their king as they do, neither amongst +Christians, Moores, nor Gentiles, that we know. The extraordinary and personall +seruice is very much, that in some respect wee may say that they are more slaues +than free men, for that they do not possesse one foote of land; but they pay +tribute in respect whereof, as also for the great misusing of them by their +gouernours, will bee a great part and occasion to inuite them to receiue the +lawe of the gospell, and that with great facilitie to inioy the libertie of the +same.</p> +<p>The ordinarie tribute that euery one dooth pay that dooth keepe house, is two +Mases<a name="FNanchor_81_81" id="FNanchor_81_81"></a><a href="#Footnote_81_81" class="fnanchor">[81]</a> +euery yeare, which is as much as two Spanish rials of plate. This tribute is +verie little, yet the Loytians (which is a great part of the kingdome) do pay +none, neither their gouernours nor ministers, captaines nor souldiours: the +multitude of the people is so great, and the kingdome so bigge, that alonely +that which they giue for expences of the king and his court is woonderfull, with +customes, dueties, portages, and other rents: not accounting that which is paide +vnto garisons and souldiers of that kingdome, neither in that which is spent in +repairing of walles of particular cities, and in men of warre at sea, and campes<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span> +by land, to gouernoures and iustices, which doth not enter into this account.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">The rent of the king.</span> +The rent which remaineth vnto the king ordinarily is this that followeth, and +is taken with great regard out of the booke of his excheker. Yet the Chinos do +say that it is much lesse then that they do pay at this time; for that this is +of old antiquitie, when as the tributes were lesse: the tributes as followeth.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Pure gold.</span> +Of pure golde, from seuenteene to two and twentie killates,<a name="FNanchor_82_82" id="FNanchor_82_82"></a><a href="#Footnote_82_82" class="fnanchor">[82]</a> +they giue him foure millions, and two hundred fiftie sixe thousand and nine +hundred Taes:<a name="FNanchor_83_83" id="FNanchor_83_83"></a><a href="#Footnote_83_83" class="fnanchor">[83]</a> +euerie one is worth ten rials and foure and twentie marauadies Spanish mony.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Fine siluer.</span> +Of fine siluer, three millions one hundred fiftie three thousand two hundred +and nineteene Taes.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Pearles.</span> +The mines of pearles, whereof you haue many in this kingdome (although they +are not verie round), is woorth vnto him commonly two millions sixe hundred and +thirtie thousand Taes.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Precious stones.</span> +Of precious stones of all sorts, as they come from the mines, one million +foure hundred three score and ten thousand Taes.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Muske and amber.</span> +Of muske and amber, one million and thirtie fiue thousande Taes.</p> +<p>Of earthen dishes and vessell, fourscore thousand Taes. Besides all this, the +king doth put forth verie much ground to his subiects, and they do pay him with +part of the croppe that they gather, or with the cattle that they bring vp on y<sup>e</sup> +same grounde.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Rice.</span> +The quantitie that they pay him is as followeth. Of cleane rice (which is a +common victuall throughout all the kingdome, and of the countries adioyning to +them) they pay him three score millions, one hundred three score and eleuen +thousand, eight hundred thirtie and two hanegges.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Barle.</span> +Of barley, twentie nine millions, three hundred foure<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span> +score and eleuen thousand, nine hundred fourescore and two hanegges.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Wheate.</span> +Of wheat like vnto that in Spaine, thirtie three millions, one hundred +twentie thousand and two hundred hanegges.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Salt.</span> +Of salt, twentie fiue millions three hundred and fortie thousand foure +hundred hanegges, which is made in his owne salt pits, and is of a great rent.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Mayz.</span> +Of wheat called Mayz, twentie millions two hundred and fiftie thousand +hanegs.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Millo.</span> +Of millio,<a name="FNanchor_84_84" id="FNanchor_84_84"></a><a href="#Footnote_84_84" class="fnanchor">[84]</a> +twentie foure millions of hanegges.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Panizo.</span> +Of Panizo,<a name="FNanchor_85_85" id="FNanchor_85_85"></a><a href="#Footnote_85_85" class="fnanchor">[85]</a> +fourteene millions and two hundred thousande hanegges.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Other graine.</span> +Of other different graine and seeds, fortie millions and two thousand +hanegges.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Peeces of silk.</span> +They doo pay him in peeces of silke, of fourteene vares long the peece, two +hundred fiue thousand and fiue hundred ninetie peeces.</p> + +<p><span class="sidenote" >Raw silke. Cotton wool.</span> +Of raw silke in bundles, fiue hundred and fortie thousande pounds. +Of cotton +wool, three hundred thousand pounds.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Mantels.</span> +Of mantles wrought of all colours, eight hundred thousand and foure hundred +mantles. Of Chimantas<a name="FNanchor_86_86" id="FNanchor_86_86"></a><a href="#Footnote_86_86" class="fnanchor">[86]</a> +made of rawe silke, that waieth twelue pound a peece, three hundred thousand +sixe hundred and eightie of them. Of mantles made of cotton of fourty vares, +sixe hundred seuenty eight thousand, eight hundred and seuentie. Of Chimantas of +cotton, three hundred foure thousand sixe hundred forty and eight. All this +aforesaide is for expenses of the court, which is great. The Chinos y<sup>t</sup> +come vnto the Philippinas do affirme the same, and do not differ in the report, +which is a signe to be true: likewise they do receiue of it in his tresurie, +whereas is many millions, and cannot be otherwise, considering his great rentes.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. V.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the men of war that are in the fifteene prouinces, as wel footmen as<br /> +horsemen, and of the great care they haue in the gard of the kingdome.</p> + +<p>Looke what care and diligence this mightie king hath, that iustice should be +ministred with right and equitie: so likewise (yea and much more) he hath +touching matters that may preuent wars, which be offered by princes adiacent +vnto him, or any other whatsoeuer. But in especiall with the Tartarians, with +whom they haue had continuall wars many years. (Although at this day) that the +Tartarians doo feare him very much: in such sort as he thinketh it best to keepe +him for his friende, and doth acknowledge vnto him a certain manner of +vassalage. And although at this present and long time since, he hath bin and is +without any occasion of wars, that should come vpon a sodain; yet hath he had +manie and grieuous enimies to defend himselfe from, or to offend them, as you +shall perceiue in this that followeth. For besides that he hath in euery +prouince his president and counsell of war, captaine generall, and others +ordinarie to take vp people, and ordaine their campes and squadrons as well by +sea as by land, to serue at all assaies when that occasion shall serue; so +likewise he hath in euery city captaines and souldiers for their particular +<span class="sidenote">Great care for to defend their countrie.</span> +garde and defence, and doo range and watch to set their garde in order both day +and night, as though their enimies were at the gates. This military order they +do vse and maintaine, in such sort that no nation knowne may be compared vnto +them. Although, speaking generally, (according vnto the relation of certaine +Spanish souldiers that were there, and did manie times see them) there be other +nations that do exceed them both in valiantnesse, courage, and worthinesse of +mind.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span></p> +<p>They haue at the gates of all their cities their squadrons, who let<a name="FNanchor_87_87" id="FNanchor_87_87"></a><a href="#Footnote_87_87" class="fnanchor">[87]</a> +the entrie and going out of any whatsoeuer, except he haue licence of the +iustice of that citie or towne, brought them in writing: the which gates they do +shut and open by order and licence of their captaines, which is sent vnto them +euery day, written in whited tables, and their sine vnto it. These gates are the +force of all the cittie, and thereon is planted all the artilerie they haue; +nigh vnto the which gate, is ordinarily the house whereas they are founded or +made. At night, when they do shut their gates, they do glew papers vpon the +ioinings of them: then they doo seale the papers, with the seale that the +gouernour or iudge of that cittie doth weare on his finger, the which is done by +himselfe, or by some other in whom he hath great confidence and trust: and they +cannot open them againe in the morning vntill such time as it bee seene and +acknowledged that it hath not been touched since the night that it was put on. +So that if any haue any iourney to ride very early in the morning, he must go +forth of the citie ouer night, before the gates be shut, and remaine in the +suburbs: for out of the cittie it is not possible to goe vntill the gates be +open, which is not till the sunne be vp ordinarily.</p> +<p>They do not vse any castles nor forts, but great bulwarkes and gun bankes, +whereas they haue continuall watch, and doo change by quarters according as wee +do vse: and the officers with a great number of souldiers do range throughout +the city, and bulworkes: and commonly the captaines be naturall of those +prouinces, whereas they haue their charge giuen them in consideration that the +loue they haue to their countrie, doo binde them to fight to the death for the +defence thereof. And for that there should be more quietnesse and rest in the +cities, it is not permitted that any do weare weapons, defensiues, nor +offensiues, but onely such souldiers as haue the kings pay: neither do they +consent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span> they +should haue them in their houses, neither vse any in trauaile by sea nor lande. +Besides all this, the king hath in the citie of Taybin and Suntiem (whereas hee +is resident), and in such cities lying there about, a great number both of +horsemen and footemen, alwaies in a readinesse for to go with him into any +place, for the safegarde of his person in time of necessitie.</p> +<p>The souldiers of his kingdome are in two sortes and manners, the one sort are +such as bee and are naturals of the citie whereas they haue their charge, and +these be called in their language Cum: in this place the sonne doth succeed the +father, and for lacke of an heire, the king doth prouide one in the dead man's +place. Euery one of them hath his name written vpon the post of his doore, and +the place appointed whither he shal go when occasion shall serue (enemies being +against that cittie or towne). The other sort of souldiers are strangers, and +are consorted for yeares or monethes to serue. These be they that ordinarily +make their watches, musters, and ioyne companies for the receit of the +captaines: these be called in their language Pon.<a name="FNanchor_88_88" id="FNanchor_88_88"></a><a href="#Footnote_88_88" class="fnanchor">[88]</a> +These goe from one place vnto another, whereas they are commanded to go. One +captaine and ancient hath charge of a thousand, and a meaner captaine with his +ancient a hundreth, that doo depend vpon the other. So that for to knowe the +number of people that is in a great campe, it is done with great ease in +accounting the ensignes of a thousand men, which are easily knowne. Euery chiefe +or petie captaine of these, hath his house vpon the cittie wal, and his name put +on it, and there he dwelleth so long as the warres indureth. These captaines +euery moneth do exercise their souldiers in marching and putting them in order: +sometime<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span> +with quick speed, and other times more slower, and to giue assalt and retyre as +they are taught by the sound of the drum: this they do vse continually in the +time of peace, as well as in the time of warre: also how to vse their weapons, +which are ordinarie, hargabuses, pikes, targets, faunchers,<a name="FNanchor_89_89" id="FNanchor_89_89"></a><a href="#Footnote_89_89" class="fnanchor">[89]</a> +brushebilles,<a name="FNanchor_90_90" id="FNanchor_90_90"></a><a href="#Footnote_90_90" class="fnanchor">[90]</a> +holbards, dagars, and armour. The horsemen do vse in the warres to carrie foure +swords hanging at their saddell bowes, and doo fight with two at once, with +great dexteritie and gallant to behold. These do accustome to go into the wars +accompanied with many seruants, and familiar friends on foote, all wel armed +after the gallantest manner that possibly they may. These footemen be +marueillous full of policie, and ingenious in warlike or martiall affaires: and +although they haue some valor for to assalt and abide the enemie, yet doo they +profite themselues of policies, deuises and instruments of fire, and of fire +workes. Thus do they vse as wel by land in their wars as by sea, many bomes<a name="FNanchor_91_91" id="FNanchor_91_91"></a><a href="#Footnote_91_91" class="fnanchor">[91]</a> +of fire, full of old iron, and arrowes made with powder and fire worke, with the +which they doo much harm and destroy their enimies. The horsemen do fight with +bowes and arrowes, and lances, and with two swordes (as I haue saide before), +and some with hargabuses. They cannot gouerne their horses very wel, for that +they haue but one peece of iron that is crosse in their mouthes that serueth for +a bridle; and for to make them stay, they pull but one raine, and with clapping +their hands together and making of a noise before them. They haue very ill +<span class="sidenote">Uerie ill horsemen.</span> +saddels, so that they be al verie ill horsemen. The like prouision hath the king +for the sea: hee hath great fleetes of ships, furnished with captaines and men, +that doo scoure and defend the costs of the countrie with great diligence and +watchings. The souldiers, as well by land as by sea, are paid with great +liberalitie, and those that do aduantage themselues in valor, are very much +esteemed, and haue great preferment and rewards. When<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span> +these Chinos doo take anie prisoner in the wars, they doo not kill him, nor giue +him more punishment, but to serue as a souldier in that countrie in the farthest +parts from their naturall, the king paying him his wages as other souldiers are +paid. These for that they may be knowne doo weare redde bonnets, but in their +other apparell they do differ nothing from the Chinos. Likewise such as be +condemned by iustice for criminall offences, to serue in any frontier (as is +vsed much amongst them), they also weare redde caps or bonnets: and so it is +declared in their sentence, that they do condemme them to the red bonnet.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. VI.</p> +<p class="intro">More of the men of war which are in al these fifteene prouinces, and how +many there be in euery one of them, as well horsemen as footemen.</p> + +<p>In the chapter past you do vnderstande what care these Chinos haue in the +time of peace as well as in warre for to defend their citties, and what +preparations they haue generrally throughout al the countrie. Now lacketh to let +you know particularly the number that euery prouince hath in it selfe, the +better to vnderstand the mightinesse therof. They haue in euerie prouince in +their chiefe or metropolitan citie, a counsell of warre, with a president and +foure counsailers; all the which are such as haue bin brought vp from their +youth in the wars, with experience of the vse of armour and weapon: so that vnto +them is giuen the charge for the defence of their prouince.</p> +<p>These counsellors doo ordaine captaines, and prouide other officers and all +necessaries for the warres, and send them vnto such cities and townes whereas +they see it is needfull. And for that in the accomplishing thereof there<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span> +shalbe no lacke, the treasurer is commanded to deliuer vnto them whatsoeuer they +do aske without any delay.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">The number of souldiers in all China.</span> +The number of the souldiers that euery prouince had in the yeare 1577, at +such time as frier Martin de Herrada and his companie entered into China (hauing +no wars, but great peace and quietnesse), is as followeth.</p> +<p>The prouince of Paguia, whereas ordinarily the king is resident, hath two +millions and one hundred and fiftie thousand footemen, and foure hundred +thousand horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Santon hath one hundred and twenty thousand footemen, and +fortie thousand horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Foquien hath eight and fiftie thousande and nine hundred +footemen, and twentie two thousand foure hundred horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Olam hath three score and sixteene thousand footemen, and +twentie fiue thousande fiue hundred horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Cinsay hath eightie thousand three hundred footemen, but of +horsemen verie few or none; for that this prouince and the other that followe, +are all mountaines, and ful of rockes and stones.</p> +<p>The prouince of Oquiam hath twentie thousand and sixe hundred footemen, and +no horsemen, for the reason aforesaide.</p> +<p>The prouince of Susuan foure score and sixe thousande footemen, and foure and +thirtie thousande and fiue hundred horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Tolanchia, which is that which doth border vpon the +Tartarians, with whom the kings of China haue had wars (as aforesaid), hath two +millions and eight hundred thousand footemen, and two hundred and +ninety thousand horsemen, and are the most famous and best in all the whole kingdome: for that they are brought vp in the use of armour from their youth, +and many times exercised the same in times past, when they had their ordinary +war with their borderers the Tartarians.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span></p> +<p>The prouince of Cansey hath fiftie thousand footemen, and twentie thousand +two hundred and fiftie horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Ancheo (there whereas the friers were) hath foure score and +sixe thousand footemen, and fortie eight thousand horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Gonan, fortie foure thousand footemen, and fourteene thousand +fiue hundred horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Xanton hath fiftie two thousand footemen, and eighteene +thousand nine hundred horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Quincheu, hath fortie eight thousand and seuen hundred +footemen, and fifteene thousande three hundred horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Chequeam, thirty foure thousand footmen, and thirteene +thousand horsemen.</p> +<p>The prouince of Sancii, which is least of them all, hath forty thousand +footemen, and sixe thousand horsemen.</p> +<p>All these people aforesaid, euery prouince is bound (by an order set downe in +parlement) to haue in a redinesse, the which is an easie thing to be done; the +one is for that the king doth pay them roiallie, the other for that they do dwel +<span class="sidenote">The souldier is royall paid.</span> +in their owne natural countries and houses, wheras they do injoy their +patrimonies and goods: leauing it vnto their sonnes. In the time of wars, they +are bound to assist the place that hath most necessitie. By this account it +plainely appeareth that all these prouinces (which may better be called +kingdomes, considering their greatnes) haue fiue millions and eight hundred +<span class="sidenote">The number of footemen and horsemen.</span> +fourtie sixe thousand and fiue hundred footemen, and nine hundred fortie eight +thousand three hundred and fiftie horsemen. All the which, if in valor and +valientnes might be equalled vnto our nations in Europe, they were sufficient to +conquer y<sup>e</sup> whole world. And although they are more in number and +equal in policies, yet in their valientnesse and courage they are far behind. +Their horse for the most part are little, but great traueilers: yet they say, +within the countrie there are verie great and excellent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span> +good horse. I do not here declare the industrie that might (with the fauour of +God) be vsed to win and ouercome this people, for that the place serueth not for +it; and I haue giuen large notice thereof, vnto whom I am bound. And againe, my +profession is more to bee a meanes vnto peace, then to procure any warres; and +if that which is my desire might be doone, it is, that with the word of God, +which is the sworde that cutteth the hearts of men, wherewith I hope in the +Lorde to see it.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. VII.</p> +<p class="intro">Of a law amongst the Chinos, that they cannot make anie wars out of their +owne countrie, neither go forth of the same, neither can any stranger come in +without licence of the king.</p> + +<p>Although in many things that haue bin seene in this kingdome is shewed and +declared the sharpe and ripe witts of these men, and with what wisedome and +prudence they doo most manifest the same (in my iudgment) is in that which +shalbe declared in this chapter. They without all doubt seeme to exceede the +Greekes, Carthagenians, and Romanes, of whom the old ancient histories haue +signified to vs, and also of those later times; who for to conquere strange +countries did separate themselues so farre from their natural, that they lost +their owne countries at home. But these of this kingdome being forewarned (as y<sup>e</sup> +prouerbe saith:) Felix quem faciunt aliena pericula cautum. By the hurt of +another, etc., they haue found by experience y<sup>t</sup> to go forth of their +owne kingdome to conquer others, is the spoile and losse of much people, and +expences of great treasures, besides the trauaile and care which continually +they haue to sustaine that which is got, with feare to be lost againe: so<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span> +that in the meane time whilest they were occupied in strange conquests, their +enimies, the Tartarians and other kings borderers vnto them, did trouble and +inuade them, doing great damage and harme. And more, considering that they do +possesse one of the greatest and best kingdomes of the world, as well for riches +as for fertility, by reason whereof, and by the great aboundance of things that +the country doth yeeld, many strange nations do profite themselues from them, +<span class="sidenote">They haue no neede of other nations.</span> +and they haue need of none other nation, for that they haue sufficient of all +things necessarie to the mainteining of humane life. In consideration whereof +they called a generall court of Parliament, whether came all vizroyes and +gouernours and other principall men of all the fifteene prouinces: and there +they did communicate, to put remedy in this great inconuenience in the best +manner possible. Then after they had wel considered of the same with great care +and diligence, taking the iudgment particular of euery one, and in generall by +common consent, they found it requisit for their quietnes and profite, and a +thing most conuenient for the common wealth to leaue al y<sup>t</sup> they had +got and gained out of their owne kingdome, but specially such countries as were +farre off. And from that day forwards not to make any wars in any place: for +that from thence did proceed a known damage and a doubtfull profite: and being +altogether conformable, they did request the king that was at that present that +he would cal home al such people as he had in other kingdomes bordering there +about vnder his obedience, perswading him that in so doing, he should remaine a +mightie prince, more richer, more in quiet and in more securitie. Then the king +perceiuing the request and petition of his kingdome and subiects, and being +fully satisfied that this perswasion was requisite to be put in execution: he +straight wayes set it a worke, and commanded vpon great penalties, that al his +subiects and vassals naturall that were in any strange countries, that in a time +limited, they should returne<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span> +home to their owne country and houses: and likewise to the gouernours of the +same countries, that they should in his name abandon and leaue the dominion and +possession that he had of them: excepting such as would of their owne good will +acknowledge vassalage, and giue him tribute, and remaine friends, as vnto this +<span class="sidenote">Straight lawes.</span> +day the Lechios<a name="FNanchor_92_92" id="FNanchor_92_92"></a><a href="#Footnote_92_92" class="fnanchor">[92]</a> +and other nations do. This law was then established and is inuiolablie kept to +this day: in the which it is first commanded that none whatsoeuer, vpon paine of +death, shall make or begin warre in any part without his licence. Also on the +said penaltie, that no subiect of his shall nauigate by sea out of the kingdome +without the said licence. Also that whatsoeuer will go from one prouince to +another within the said kingdome, to traficke in buying and selling, shall giue +sureties to returne againe in a certaine time limited, vpon paine to bee +disnaturalled of the countrie. Likewise that no stranger whatsoeuer shall come +in by sea nor by land, without his express licence, or of the gouernours of such +ports or places whereas they shall come or ariue. And this licence must be giuen +with great consideration, aduising the king therof. All which lawes haue beene +the occasion that this mightie kingdome hath not come to notice and knowledge +but of late yeares. All the which that is said, seemeth to be true, for that it +is cleerely found in their histories and books of nauigations of old antiquitie: +whereas it is plainely seene that they did come with the shipping vnto the +Indies, hauing conquered al that is from China, vnto the farthest part thereof. +Of all the which they indured possessors in great quietnes, till such time as +they ordeined the law of abandoning of their owne good will, as aforesaid. So +that at this day there is great memory of them in the Ilands Philippinas and on +the cost of Coromande, which is the cost against the kingdome of Norsinga<a name="FNanchor_93_93" id="FNanchor_93_93"></a><a href="#Footnote_93_93" class="fnanchor">[93]</a> +towards the Sea of Cengala;<a name="FNanchor_94_94" id="FNanchor_94_94"></a><a href="#Footnote_94_94" class="fnanchor">[94]</a> +whereas is a towne called vnto this day the soile of the Chinos, for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span> +that they did reedifie and make the same. The like notice and memory is there in +the kingdom of Calicut, wheras be many trees and fruits, that the naturals of +that countrie do say, were brought thither by the Chinos, when that they were +lords and gouernours of that countrie. Likewise in those dayes they were of +Malaca, Siam, and Chapaa,<a name="FNanchor_95_95" id="FNanchor_95_95"></a><a href="#Footnote_95_95" class="fnanchor">[95]</a> +and other of their borderers. Also it is to be beleeued of y<sup>e</sup> Ilands +of Iapon, for that there are many token unto the Chinos unto this day, and the +naturals of the country are much after the fashion of the Chinos, and many +particular things that do giue vs to vnderstand: and some lawes that are +obserued and kept in China. But now in these dayes the gouernors of the sea +ports do dispence with the law that forbiddeth y<sup>e</sup> going out of the +kingdome, by certaine gifts which is giuen them by merchants to giue them secret +licence, that they may go and trafficke in ilands bordering there about, as vnto +the Philippinas, whither come euery yeare many ships laden with merchandise of +great riches, of the which is brought many times into Spaine. Likewise they do +trauaile vnto other parts and places, wheras they vnderstand they may profite +themselues. Yet they do not giue any such licence vntill they haue giuen +sureties to returne within one whole yeare.</p> +<p>The desire of gain hath caused them to traueile to Mexico, whither came the +yeare past in anno 1585 three merchants of China, with verie curious things, and +neuer staied till they came into Spaine and into other kingdomes further off. +Likewise the said iudge and gouernours doo giue licence vnto strangers (in the +order aforesaid) for to enter into their ports to buy and sel, but first vpon +examination and charge, that they should haue a great care not to demand any +licence but to the same intent. Then haue they their licence with a time +limited, and with condition that they shall not procure to goe about their +cities, neither to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span> +see the secrets thereof. And this is giuen in writing vpon a whited table, which +is set vpon the fore partes of their ships, that when they come to an anker in +any port it may be seene of the keepers and guards that they sinke them not, but +let them peaceably to enter and to trafficke in buying and selling, paying their +ordinarie customes due vnto the king.</p> +<p>In euery port there is a scriuener or notarie, put there by the gouerners, +that dooth set downe in memorie the day and houre that any shippe doth enter in, +in order that, whether hee be a stranger or natural, to take in his lading and +dispatch, according vnto the old custome of those ports, the which is inuiolably +kept; which is the occasion that they do lade and dispatch in so short a time, +and with so great quietnesse, as though there were but one shippe, although many +times you shall see in one port two thousande ships small and great. In this +sort, with a bought licence, did the Portugals traficke from the Indies in +Canton, a prouince of this kingdome, and in other parts of that kingdome, as +they themselues haue declared, and likewise the Chinos.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. VIII.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the kings royall counsell, and the order they haue to know euerie +moneth what dooth passe in all the kingdome.</p> + +<p>The king hath in the citie of Tabin,<a name="FNanchor_96_96" id="FNanchor_96_96"></a><a href="#Footnote_96_96" class="fnanchor">[96]</a> +whereas he is resident, a royall counsell of twelue counsellers, and a +president, chosen men throughout al the kingdome, and such as haue had +experience in gouernement many yeares.</p> +<p>For to be one of the counsell, it is the highest and supremest dignitie that +a man can come vnto; for that (as aforesaid)<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span> +in all this kingdome there is neither prince, duke, marquesse, earle, nor lord, +that hath any subiectes, but the king only, and the prince his sonne. These +counsellers, and the gouernors of these prouinces by them appointed, bee such +personages, that they are respected and esteemed for the time of their +continuance in the same estimation, as is the other, where as they haue these +titles.</p> + +<p><span class="sidenote">Councillors must be expert in sciences.</span> +For to be one of this counsell, it is not sufficient that they be expert and +learned in the lawes of the countrie, and in morall and naturall philosophie, +and commenced in the same, but they must be also expert in astrologie and +iudgements. For they say, he that must be of this supreme counsell, by whome is +gouerned all these fifteene prouinces: it is requisite that they know all this +that is saide, for to prognosticate what shall succeede and happen, the better +to prouide for all necessities that shall come. These twelue doo sit in counsell +ordinarily in the kinges pallace, for the which there is a hall appointed, +maruellous richly trimmed: and in the same thirteene chayres, sixe of them of +golde, and sixe of siluer: both the one and the other of great price, wrought +with great curiositie: yet the thirteenth is more richer, for that it is of +golde and set full of precious stones of great value, and that is placed in the +middest of them vnder a canopie or cloth of estate, of cloth of gold: in the +which is imbrodered the kinges armes, and is as it is saide, certaine serpentes, +wrought with golde wyer: in this chayre the president doth sitte when the king +is not in presence: but if hee be there (as seeldome he is) then doth the +president sit in the first and highest of the chaires on the right hand, which +be of gold: in the which, and in the other of siluer, they bee placed according +vnto their antiquitie: in this sort, that if the president do die, then do the +most auncient proceede and inherite his roome, and in his chaire doth the fift +person rise on the side of the golden chaires: and so from the fourth vnto the +fift: and in this order all<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span> +the rest arise in the chaires of siluer, passing into the other chaires of +golde. This may the president doo, preferring euerie one in order (if any doo +die) without the consent of the king. And if any of these chaires be voyd, then +doth the counsell choose an other by voices: the which is done by vprightnes, +and he which hath the most is preferred; but the chiefest in this preferment is +merit and sufficiencie. If he that is chosen be absent in any gouernment, then +doo they send for him; but if hee be present in the citie, then doo they carrie +him before the king, giuing him to vnderstand of their election, in whose power +it is to accept or to make it voyde, which neuer doth happen. Then the king +himselfe on his owne handes, according vnto their custome, doth make him sweare +a solemne oth that he shall doo vpright iustice according vnto the lawes of the +countrie, and that he shall likewise doo vprightly in the choosing of viceroyes +and gouernours or any other iustices, and not be led with affections nor +passions, neyther receiue anie bribes himself nor any other for him: with many +other things in this order and effect: and aboue all thinges hee shall not bee +partaker, neyther consent to anye treason at anie time against the king: but +rather if that hee doo vnderstande of anie such, directly or indirectly, he +shall straight wayes giue the kinge to vnderstande thereof, or his counsell, of +all that he dooth knowe or vnderstande, alwaye favouring with his industrie and +force the preseruation of peace and life of the king.</p> +<p>This oth of homage being doone, they doo carrie him vnto the chaire which is +on the left hande in the hall, and doo giue him the possession with great +solemnitie; for the which, certaine dayes after there is great feastes in the +citie, as well by them of the counsell as by the citizens and courtiers: during +the which time, the marchants do leaue their contractions and trafickes, and +handicraft men their occupations.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span></p> +<p>If any occasion bee requisite to talke with the king, there is none that +speaketh with him but the president, and if it so fall out that hee be sicke, +then the most auncient and vppermost in the golden chayres dooth talke with him +at all times when neede requireth; but when hee talketh with him hee is on his +knees, and his eyes inclyned to the grounde, and neuer mooueth although the +talke endureth two houres. He is paide with the same money that all viceroyes, +gouernours, iustices, and captaines of the kingdome are: when they will talke +with the president, it is in the self same order.</p> +<p>In this royall counsell euerie moneth they doo knowe all thinges that doo +happen in all the kingdome woorthie to bee aduised of, and this is without falt; +for that those which doo gouerne the prouinces haue expresse commandement to +sende notice vnto the court of all thinges that doo happen in anye of their +prouinces touching warres, the estate of the countrie, the kinges rents, or any +other thing: the which is accomplished with so great care, that although it bee +a prouince distant fiue hundred leagues from the court, yet the post doth not +misse his day appointed. And those which do first come, do tarrie till the last +or furthest off doo come, and then vpon the day appointed they do all together +giue their relations. Those which are farre off for to be at the court so soone +and at the instant as those which are nigh at hand, doo send postes daily, that +the one may ouertake the other. They do run post after the vse of Italy and +Spain with a horne, but they were woont to haue a coller of belles, the better +to be heard: so y<sup>t</sup> the postmasters when they do heare the horne or +bels, do straight waies bridle their horse to be in a readines. Likewise, if +their iourney be to passe by water (as many times it hapneth), then y<sup>e</sup> +boat-men do make their barks readie.</p> +<p>Then when the counsell hath taken relation of all the posts in effect, the +president incontinent doth giue a straight<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span> +account thereof vnto the king: then hee, or the counsell by his order (if anie +such neede requireth), do put remedie for that that is needfull for the time. +And if it be requisite to send any iustice about the same, he is straight wayes +appointed, and dispatched and sent in all haste and with great secrecie: and +this iustice doth make inquiries in such sort that it is not knowen, no not in +the citie where the fault is committed.</p> +<p>And for that, touching this matter, it shall bee spoken of more at large in +chapters following, I will conclude with this: that this king will haue such +dominion ouer his kingdome and subiectes, that although it be great with so +manie prouinces, cities, and townes, yet not one uiceroy, gouernor, nor iustice +can put any man vnto death, without his sentence be first confirmed by the kinge +and his royall counsell, except it be in the warres actually, for that there in +the delaying thereof may growe some perill; therefore they doo permit the +captaine generall or his lieftenant, to behead or hang what so euer souldier +that shall offende or doo anie ill thing; this may they do without consentment +of the king or his counsell, onely with the consentment of the kinges treasorer, +or of the generall of the fielde: the which bee both of them graue personages, +and they must be both conformable in their iudgementes or else they cannot +execute death.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. IX.</p> +<p class="intro">Of such presidents and ministers as the king doth put in euerie prouince, +and the order that they haue in their gouernment.</p> + +<p>You do vnderstande howe the two prouinces, Paguia and Tolanchia are gouerned +by the supreme counsell of the king, and such ministers as they doo send to +gouerne. The other thirteene prouinces that do remaine, haue eyther of them a +vizroy or gouernor, whom the common people do call<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span> +Insuanto;<a name="FNanchor_97_97" id="FNanchor_97_97"></a><a href="#Footnote_97_97" class="fnanchor">[97]</a> +who is continually resident, and doth dwell in the metropolitane citie, whereof +<span class="sidenote">Euery prouince hath his viceroy.</span> +the prouince doth commonly beare the name. And although all the kinges officers +and iustices of what sort of administration they are, be generally called by the +name of Loytia;<a name="FNanchor_98_98" id="FNanchor_98_98"></a><a href="#Footnote_98_98" class="fnanchor">[98]</a> +yet euerie one hath a speciall and a particular name besides, according vnto his +office that he doth execute: of the which and of their proper names I will giue +you to vnderstand, for that it doth differ from our purpose. The vizroy, that is +in euery prouince principall and supreme magistrate in place of the king, they +do call him Comon.<a name="FNanchor_99_99" id="FNanchor_99_99"></a><a href="#Footnote_99_99" class="fnanchor">[99]</a> +The second in dignitie is the gouernour of all the prouince, and he is called +Insuanto, who hath verie little less maiestie than the viceroy: then the +corregidor or gouernor that is resident in any citie, where as is neither +viceroy nor gouernor, is called Tutuan,<a name="FNanchor_100_100" id="FNanchor_100_100"></a><a href="#Footnote_100_100" class="fnanchor">[100]</a> +all of this degree. Of any thing that is of importance, of what citie soeuer +they be, they do giue relation thereof vnto the higher gouernor, called +Insuanto, and likewise this Insuanto vnto the viceroy or comon, whose charge is +to giue the king to vnderstand thereof or his royall counsell, by the postes +that we haue spoken of before. The third in dignitie is called Ponchasi;<a name="FNanchor_101_101" id="FNanchor_101_101"></a><a href="#Footnote_101_101" class="fnanchor">[101]</a> +this is the president or counsell, of the kinges reuenewes, who hath vnder him a +counsell and many ministers and officers, as sargents and others, which do +recouer the rents in euery province. This state dooth giue account of all his +office vnto the tutuan, after that he hath paide all kind of wages and charges +ordinarie and extraordinarie due to any officer of the kinges in all that +prouince.</p> + +<p>The fourth degree or dignitie is called Totoc,<a name="FNanchor_102_102" id="FNanchor_102_102"></a><a href="#Footnote_102_102" class="fnanchor">[102]</a> +and this is captaine generall of all souldiers, as well footmen as horsemen.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span> +The fift is called Anchasi;<a name="FNanchor_103_103" id="FNanchor_103_103"></a><a href="#Footnote_103_103" class="fnanchor">[103]</a> +<span class="sidenote">Captaine generall.</span> +he is president and gouernour ouer iustices both criminall and ciuill: and doth +determine with his counsell of matters in difference, whatsoeuer that do appeale +vnto him from other meaner iustices. The sixt is called Aytao:<a name="FNanchor_104_104" id="FNanchor_104_104"></a><a href="#Footnote_104_104" class="fnanchor">[104]</a> +this is generall puruier and president of the counsell of warre, whose office is +to prouide souldiers when that it is requisite or necessitie demaundeth, and to +prouide ships, munitions, and victuals for any fleete that shall passe by sea, +as that shall be requisite by land, and for the suppliment of garisons in cities +and coastes. To this is giuen the charge to examine such strangers that do come +to any prouince, to knowe of whence they are, and wherefore they do come, and of +all other thinges, and after beeing knowen, to giue the viceroy to vnderstand +thereof, and of all thinges needful.</p> +<p>These sixe offices or charge are of great authoritie, and they that haue the +execution thereof are had in great reuerence: euerie one of them hath in +societie or counsell tenne, which are men chosen of great experience and +diligence, and they do help him in the exhibition and dispatch of matters +touching that office. When they are in place of counsell, which is in the +pallace of the viceroy (whereas euerie office hath his place appointed, +garnished in very good order), their sociates are diuided in two partes, fiue of +them do sit on the right hand of the president, and fiue on the left hand; those +which do sit on the right hande are the most auncientes and haue the more +preheminence, and doo differ from the other that be on the left hande in this +only, for that they do weare wastes or girdels imbossed with gold, and yealow +hattes: and they on the left hand haue their girdels imbossed with siluer, and +weare blewe hats; the which girdels, with gold and siluer, and hats yealow and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span> +blewe, there is none that is permitted to weare but onelye the counsellers. +Likewise these and the presidents do weare the kinges armes on their breastes +and backes imbrodered with golde, without the which they can not goe foorth to +anie place where they must be seen, neyther sitte in iustice to determine anie +thing whatsoeuer. If they doo, they are not onely disobedient, but are seuerely +punished at the time of their visitation.</p> +<p>If the president of any of these counsels doo die, then one of the +auncientest of the counsellers dooth succeede him in the office, obseruing in +all thinges the order, as I haue saide in the chapter past, of the royall +<span class="sidenote">A very good propertie of iustices.</span> +counsell. All these iustices generally haue a maruellous morall vertue, and that +is, they be all very patient in hearing any complaynt, although it be declared +with choller and proude speech. It is the first thing that is taught them in +their schooles: they are verye well nourtered, and courteous in their speeches, +although it bee with them that they haue condemned by lawe. If that vppon any +necessitie they must goe into any part of the prouince to make any information +of importance, then is appointed one of the counsell, and hee goeth alone, but +he hath with him the authoritie of them all.</p> +<p>Besides these sixe counsellers or iudges aforesaide, there bee others of +lesse dignitie (although greatly respected, as all ministers of iustice bee in +this kingdome), and they are called as followeth: Cautoc, this is the chiefe +auncient-bearer;<a name="FNanchor_105_105" id="FNanchor_105_105"></a><a href="#Footnote_105_105" class="fnanchor">[105]</a> +Pochim,<a name="FNanchor_106_106" id="FNanchor_106_106"></a><a href="#Footnote_106_106" class="fnanchor">[106]</a> +the seconde treasourer; Pochinsi, he that keepeth the seale royall; Antzatzi,<a name="FNanchor_107_107" id="FNanchor_107_107"></a><a href="#Footnote_107_107" class="fnanchor">[107]</a> +he is as the maior or bailife of any citie or towne. There be also other three +officers, which are called Guytay,<a name="FNanchor_108_108" id="FNanchor_108_108"></a><a href="#Footnote_108_108" class="fnanchor">[108]</a> +Tzia,<a name="FNanchor_109_109" id="FNanchor_109_109"></a><a href="#Footnote_109_109" class="fnanchor">[109]</a> +Toutay,<a name="FNanchor_110_110" id="FNanchor_110_110"></a><a href="#Footnote_110_110" class="fnanchor">[110]</a> +these doo keepe court and haue<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span> +audience in their houses once a weeke; and when they do open their doores, there +is shott off foure peeces of artilerie, to giue all men to vnderstande that they +are in place, readie to heare, and to doo iustice. If they do finde any that is +culpable or faultie, they doo straight wayes sende them with a sargent vnto the +ordinarie iustice of the citie, which is called zompau, with a bill or note, in +the which is signified the punishment that he must haue.</p> +<p>Euerie ordinarie iustice hath committed to his charge a thousand souldiers. +He can not exceed his limit nor iurisdiction, neyther can anie other haue to doo +<span class="sidenote">A very good order.</span> +in his charge. Euerie night they doo range their circuit, and doo cause that +euery one may be quiet in his house, and to put out their candelles and lightes +in time to auoyde fires, which hath happened amongest them verie great, by +reason that their houses are so neere one to an other, and all the vpper partes +of their houses wrought with tymber, according vnto the vse of Byskaye: and all +suche as they doo finde with light after the houre limited, they are punished +verie asperly. From these there is no appellation but vnto suche iustices as are +sent from the court, and besides them vnto none but vnto the visiters that doo +come ordinarily, who doo vndoo and make satisfaction of all griefes or wronges +doone by the other, and these are called in their language Gomdim, which is as +much to say, a righter of all griefe: this man is respected more than all the +rest.</p> +<p>Besides all these there be other particular officers, which be called Tompo:<a name="FNanchor_111_111" id="FNanchor_111_111"></a><a href="#Footnote_111_111" class="fnanchor">[111]</a> +these haue the charge to see the prouision of victualles, and to put a price on +them; an other is called Tibuco,<a name="FNanchor_112_112" id="FNanchor_112_112"></a><a href="#Footnote_112_112" class="fnanchor">[112]</a> +he that dooth arest and punish vagabundes and idle persons. Quinche<a name="FNanchor_113_113" id="FNanchor_113_113"></a><a href="#Footnote_113_113" class="fnanchor">[113]</a> +is the cheefe sargent, Chomcan<a name="FNanchor_114_114" id="FNanchor_114_114"></a><a href="#Footnote_114_114" class="fnanchor">[114]</a> +is the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span> +keeper of the prison: this is one that they haue in great reuerence, for that he +hath a priuilege aboue all the rest: that after hee hath done his dutie vpon his +knees at his first entrie, hee may tell his tale on foote, and so can not the +rest doo, but kneeling.</p> +<p>When that these gouernours or iustices doo newly come into these prouinces or +cities, ordeyned and sent by the supreme counsell, they doo sende two or three +dayes before they come themselues their letters patentes and prouisions: the +which being seene and obeyed, there goeth foorth to receiue him all the loytias +and men of warre with their souldiers and ensignes military, and other officers, +making great feastes and pastimes.</p> +<p>Likewise the citizens at this time doo hange their streetes with clothes of +silke and other thinges very richly, and trimmed with flowers, bearing him +companie vnto his lodging with much musicke and sound of instrumentes.</p> +<p>Aboue all these dignities and offices there is one which is called Quinchay, +which is to be vnderstood in their language "the golden seale"; this goeth not +from the court, but vpon waightie matters and of great importance touching the +quietnesse of all the kingdome. The order they haue in the choyse of these +iustices and officers, and of other matters touching good gouernment, shall be +declared vnto you in the chapter following.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. X.</p> +<p class="intro">Here is prosecuted the manner how they do choose their gouernors and +iustices, and howe they doo execute the same.</p> + +<p>All such officers as I haue declared vnto you in the chapter past, the king +dooth ordaine them by consent of his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span> +counsell, who doo informe themselues with a particular diligence of the qualitie +and behauiour of the person that shall be elected. The principall matter that +<span class="sidenote">A very good consideration.</span> +they doo aduertise themselues is, that the viceroy, gouernour, or counsellor be +not a naturall of that countrey that he is prouided for; and that for to preuent +the inconuenience that might happen in the executing of good iustice, which many +times chaunceth, eyther for the loue of his friendes and kinsfolkes, or else for +the hate hee hath to his enimies. All such as are prouided in these offices, +after that they do depart from the court whereas the charge is giuen them, til +they come to the prouince, citie, or towne, whereas they shall remaine in +iustice, they doo spende nothing on their owne horses; for that in all places +whereas they doo trauaile or come, the king hath houses appointed, whereas they +are receiued and lodged, and serued of all thinges necessarie, as well for +horses for themselues as horses for them that come with him; likewise of barkes +and boates, if that his iourney be by water, all is of free cost: it is all +appointed what they shall haue to eate, which is conformable vnto the qualitie +of his person, and the office he hath in charge. And when they do come vnto such +houses as are appointed by the king to receiue and cherish them, they of the +house do aske him if he will haue his pittance or ordinarie in money or in +victualles; who, if he haue any kinsfolkes or friendes in that place that will +inuite him, then dooth hee demand it in money, and keepe it to himselfe. These +houses are maruelously well prouided of beds, and all other things necessarie; +for that the Ponchas, who is president of the kinges reuenewes, hath a +particular care to see all these things well furnished, by a commandement from +the king and the supreme counsell. When they doo come vnto the citie or towne +whereas they take the charge of gouernment, after they haue giuen the +intertainment vnto them with feasts and pastime, as is declared in the chapter +past, then do they bring him and lodge him in the kings<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span> +house, and do prouide him of seruants and all thinges necessarie that belongeth +vnto him, and ministers needefull for the execution of iustice, who likewise +haue their abiding in the same house, as sergeants and notaries, and other +ministers of lesse authoritie. The king doth pay them all sufficient wages, for +that it is forbidden vpon great penalties to take bribes or any other thing of +any clyent. Likewise y<sup>e</sup> iudges be straightly charged and commanded, +and that is one of the chiefest articles that is giuen them from the counsel, +not to consent to be visited of any clyents in their houses, neither can they +pronounce any sentence but in the place of publike audience, and in the presence +of all the officers, and it must be done in such sort that all men that are in +the place of audience may heare it, and is doone in this sort following. The +iudge doth set himselfe in the seate of iustice, then do the porters put +themselues at the entring or doores of the hall, who do name with a lowde and +high voice the person that doth enter in to demand iustice, and the effect of +that he doth aske. Then the plaintife doth kneele downe somewhat a far off from +the iudge, and doth with a loud voice declare his griefe or demand, or else in +writing. If it be in writing, then one of the scriueners or notaries doth take +the petition and doth read it, the which being vnderstood by y<sup>e</sup> +iudge, he doth straightwaies prouide vpon the same that which is agreeable vnto +iustice, and doth firme the petition with his own firme with red inke, and +commandeth what is needful to be done. These iudges are straitly charged and +commanded by the kinges authoritie, that they must go fasting into y<sup>e</sup> +hal of audience or iudgement hall without drinking of any wine, and they must +giue no sentence with wine; and that is such a custome amongst them, that +whosoeuer dooth breake it is seuerely punished. By way of phisicke they do +permit, before they doo go to giue any sentence, to comfort themselues with some +conserues or such like. But wine in no manner of wise, although<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span> +they bee sicke of any infirmitie, and the lacke thereof to be hurtfull unto +them: for they esteeme it a lesse euill to leaue of the hearing of any matter, +then to giue any sentence after that they haue eaten or dronke. These matters +being executed in publike (which is maruelously obserued and kept), it is not +possible y<sup>t</sup> any of the officers should take any bribes, but it must +be discouered by one of them; and for that they are vsed with great rigour in +their residence, euerie one is afraid of his companion, and are one to an other +(in this case) great enemies. The sergeants and notaries and the other officers +are maruelous precise in the executing of their office: if that any doo not his +duetie in his office, they take him and put a little banner in his hand, and he +remaineth with the same, kneeling on his knees till the court of audience be +ended. Then do the iudge command the bedelles to giue him so many whippes as hee +doth deserue for the neglecting of his office. This same is little esteemed +amongest them, for that it is a common thing vsed amongest them. When that anie +of these iudges will go abroade into the citie (as seeldome times they doo for +the reseruing of their authoritie), they are accompanied with the officers and +ministers of iustice, and that in so good order, that the first two doo carrie +siluer mases, after the manner as they doo in Rome carrie the mases before the +cardinalles. They doo carrie them vpon long roddes, which doth signifie that in +the name of the king they are in those offices: then after them followeth other +two, and they do carrie ech of them in his hand a long cane and very straight, +which doth signifie the vpright iustice that ought to be done and is doone by +that iudge that there goeth: then followeth them other two, and they doo trayle +ech of them a cane vpon the ground with long red laces, and at the endes +tassels, which doth signifie the instrumentes wherewith they do whippe the +faultie or malefactors; then followeth them other two with tables, like vnto +white targets, in the which is<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span> +written the name of the iudge, with his title and office. The rest, which be +many in number, do accompanie him to do him worship and honor. Those two that we +spake of before, that do carrie the mases, do crie out and make a noyse vnto the +people apart themselues, and to make roome that the iudge may passe: the which +is straightwayes accomplished, for that by experience they know that he that +doth neglect the same, is incontinent punished in the streete without remission: +and the respect they haue vnto him is such that not one, of what state or degree +soeuer he be, that dare mooue himself at such time as he doth passe by, neither +crosse the streetes (except it be some superior iudge, vnto whom the inferiors +doth the like reuerence). If any man do offend therein, he is then straightwaies +punished. In all matters of lawe, as ciuill as criminall, the iudges do nothing +but by writing, and do pronounce the sentences, and examine witnesses in +publike, before all the rest of the officers, because no subtilty nor falshood +shalbe vsed in their demaundes, neither in their writings, to set downe other +then the truth. Euerie witnesse is examined by himselfe, and if he do double in +his declaration, then do they ioyne together and make their demaunde from one to +an other, til by their striuing they may come to a better knowledge of the +truth. But when by these meanes they cannot bring it to light, then doo they +giue them torments to make them confesse, beleeuing that without it such persons +as haue experience and knowledge will tell the truth.</p> +<p>In matters of great importance, and such as doo touche graue personages, the +iudge will not trust the scriuener or notarie to write any information; but they +with their owne handes will write the declaration of any witnesse, and will +consider verie much of that which is declared. This great diligence is the +occason that fewe times there is any that doth complaine of any ill iustice +doone, the which is a great and notable vertue, and ought to be imitated of all +good<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span> +iustices, for to auoyd many inconueniences which doo happen for the not vsing +the same the which these Gentiles haue great care to performe; who, beside the +prosecution of right iustice, without respect or exception of any person, do vse +certaine preuentions worthie to be suffered.</p> + +<p>First these iudges, in al cities and townes of their iurisdiction, do number +the households, and do repart them in ten and tenne housholds, and vpon the +tenth house they do hang a table or signe whereon is writen the names of those +ten housholders, with a commandement, in the which generally they are commanded, +and euery one by himselfe particular, y<sup>t</sup> hauing any knowledge or +notice that any of those ten housholders haue committed any trespasse or fault +against any of the rest, or against himselfe, that is hurtfull vnto his +neighbours or to the commonaltie, to go straight way and giue the iustice to +vnderstand thereof, that the fault may be punished, with a mendment vnto the +offender, and an example to al other. And vnto him that doth know any such +offence and wil not declare it, is allotted the same punishment y<sup>t</sup> +<span class="sidenote">An occasion of amitie betwixt neighbours.</span> +the offender should haue, which is the occasion that one neighbour hath a care +of an other, and liueth vnder feare, least they should giue occasion to be +complained of. And againe, that their enimies may not this way take any +aduantage. When that any of these ten neighbours doth remooue into an other +streete, or into any other citie or towne to dwell, or will make any long +iorney, hee is bound to ring a bell, or play on a coper kettle amongest all the +neighbours for the space of ten dayes before he doth remooue or depart, and to +aduise them all of his departure, and whether for that if he do owe any thing, +or any thing be lent, that they may come and demaund it before their departure, +because that none shall loose y<sup>t</sup> which is theirs. And if it so fall +out that any shall depart without vsing this diligence, the iustice doth compell +the rest of his neighbours y<sup>t</sup> are written on the signe to pay his +debt, because they did<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span> +not aduise the iustice or his creditors before his departure. Such as do owe +money or debts and will not paye (proouing the debt they doo execute their +goods), if they haue none, they put them in prison, and limit a time for him to +pay the same. But if it passe, and the debt not paide nor his creditor +contented: for the first time they doo whippe them moderately, and do appoint +him the second time limited for to pay y<sup>e</sup> same: if he do then misse, +they do whip him more cruelly, and doo appoint him an other time, and so doo +prosecute the same till he die with punishments, which is y<sup>e</sup> occasion +y<sup>t</sup> euery one doth pay that he oweth, or procure amongst his friends +to pay, or else giue himselfe for a slaue vnto his creditor, to shun the trouble +of the prison and the paine of whippings, which is a thing not to be suffered.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Cruell tormentes.</span> +These iudges do vse two maner of torments to make them to confesse the truth, +when by fayre meanes they can not, or by pollicie, the which first is procured +with great care and diligence: the one is on their feete, and the other on their +hands, and is so terrible that it cannot be suffered, but of force they do +confesse that which the iudge doth pretende to know; yet doo they execute none +of them except first they haue good information, or at the least, semiplena, or +else so many indicions that it is a sufficient information for the same. The +tormentes on the hands is giuen with two stickes as bigge as two fingers, and a +span long, turned round and full of hooles in all places, wherein are put cordes +to pull in and out: their fingers of both their hands are put into the cordes, +and little and little they do pinch them, till in the end they do breake them at +the jointes, with an incredible paine vnto them that doo suffer it, and y<sup>t</sup> +causeth them to giue great shrikes and groanes that will mooue any man to +compassion. And if it so come to passe that by this cruell torment they will not +confesse, and that the iudge do vnderstand by witnesse and by indicions that hee +is faultie and culpable, then dooth he commaund to giue him the torment<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span> +of the feete, which is a great deale more cruell than that of the handes, and is +in this sort: they take two peeces of woode, foure square of foure spannes long +and one spanne broade, and are ioyned together with a gume, and hooles boored +<span class="sidenote">A more cruell torment.</span> +thorough, and put thorough them cordes, and in the middest of these bordes they +doo put the whole foote, and straine the cordes, and with a mallet they do +stryke vpon the cordes, wherewith they do breake all the bones, and cause them +to suffer more paine and griefe than with the torment of the handes. At the +executing of these torments the supreme iudges are alwaies present, the which +seeldome times doth happen: for that such as be culpable will sooner confesse +than suffer those torments, desiring rather to die some other death that is not +so cruell, than to suffer the paines of this torment.</p> +<p>The prisons that they haue are no lesse cruell and rigorous, as you shall +vnderstand in a chapter by it selfe hereafter.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XI.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the visitors that the king doth send euery yeare to visite the +inferior iudges of his prouinces, and of the punishing of such as they do find +culpable.</p> + +<p><span class="sidenote">A great care to do true iustice.</span> +It is to be woondred at the great and vigilant care that this heathen prince +hath, in that his ministers and iudges, as wel viceroyes, gouernors, presidents, +as anie other officers, should execute their offices well and vprightly, as they +ought to doo: for in the end of three yeares that their gouernment doth indure, +they do take of them in residence straight account by the iudges thereof, who +bee called Chaenes. Likewise they doo dispatch euerie yeere in great secrecie +into euerie prouince, other iudges and visitors, that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span> +be called Leachis,<a name="FNanchor_115_115" id="FNanchor_115_115"></a><a href="#Footnote_115_115" class="fnanchor">[115]</a> +the which are persons of great confidence, and prooued by experience of long +time to be of good life, good customes, and haue done good seruice in the +administring of iustice vprightly. These as they trauaile do inquire in euerie +citie and towne that they come in (not being knowen, and in verie secret +manner), all griefes and iniustice that is done in that prouince, which is the +occasion that euerie one dooth liue (as the prouerbe sayth) with their face +discouered. These do carrie from the king so great authoritie in their +commissions giuen them, that without returning to the court, if they finde any +delict culpable, they may apprehend the iudges and punish them, suspend, and +reprieue, and do any thing touching their commission at their owne pleasure, so +that it be not to take away the life of any man. This (as it is said) none can +do without the consent of the king.</p> +<p><span class="sidenote">Ceremonies in performing of their oth.</span> +And because they should execute their office the better in this visitation, +and with iustice and equitie, they do make them to sweare to be loyall, true, +and secret. The which oth is executed in this order: they doo giue him to drinke +three times of a certaine beuerage which they doo vse, and that is the +confirming of their oth. And for that their departure should be with more +secrecie, the counsell doth command their secretaries to make their prouisions, +leauing in blank a space for his name that shal haue the prouision, and for the +name of the prouince whether he shall goe, declaring nothing but that which is +their ordinarie, that wheresoeuer the Loytia or iudge (being so dispatched) +shall come, that they shall obey him as the king himselfe. But when soeuer it is +in secret determined who shall goe, then doth the president of the counsel +command the prouision to be<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span> +sealed, then he himselfe doth write his name in, and the prouince whether he +doth goe. And tharewithall hee dooth depart from the court in great secrecie, +and vnknowen of any who it is, nor whether he doth go, nor wherefore.</p> +<p>Then when he doth come to the prouince, citie, or town, whether he is sent, +he dooth with like secrecie make his inquirie how the viceroy or gouernour doth +vse himselfe in his gouernment, and how all other officers do execute their +offices, without knowing from whence he came, nor whether he will, neither what +he doth pretend. So after that hee hath passed throughout all the prouince, and +is fullie certified of all his desire, then doth hee goe vnto the chiefe or +metropolitane citie, whereas are resident all those iudges against whom hee hath +made his visitation, and there he dooth remaine and abide till such time as the +Tutam or viceroy doth make a generall counsell, which is once a month at the +least: and at such time as they are in their counsell hall (and peraduenture +without thought of any such iudge that should come), then this uisitor doth goe +vnto the doore, and sayth vnto the porter, goe and tell them of the councell, +that there is a uisitor that must and will come in, to notifie vnto them a +commandement from the king: then the viceroy (vnderstanding by these words what +he might be) doth commaund the doores to be open, and doth himselfe and the rest +that are with him, rise vp from their seates, and doth goe and receiue him as +their superior iudge; who doth enter with his prouision open in his handes +(which dooth not cause a small feare amongest them all, but in especiall vnto +such as their owne conscience doth accuse them): he doth read his prouision in +the presence of them all, and at the instant of the conclusion, the viceroy doth +arise from his place and dooth vnto him great reuerence and complementes, and so +doo all the rest, acknowledgeing their duties.</p> +<p>Then dooth this uisitor place himselfe in the principallest<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span> +seate of counsell, and maketh his oration as the common vse is amongst them, +wherein he doth giue them to vnderstande the cause of his comming, and with what +care and diligence he did vse in his visitation to search out the trueth of +matters: after which, with well pondred wordes, he doth laude and prayse all +such as haue well executed their offices, and according thereunto he doth +straight waies place them in their counsels in the higher seates, and promising +them to giue the king and his counsell large account of their good seruice, that +they might be rewarded according as they do deserue. Likewise he doth sharply +reprehende all such as haue neglected their bounden dueties. Then doth he read +there before them all the sentence pronounced against them, declaring in summe +all such thinges wherein he hath found them culpable, which hath caused him to +pronounce that sentence against them, the which, although it be never so +rigorous, it is foorthwith executed without any replication or appellation: for +from these visitors there is no appellation.</p> +<p>All such as shalbe punished or reprehended, they do first take away from them +the ensignes of iustice, which be, as I haue told you, the girdle, bonnet, or +narrowe brimd hat: with the which they can neither punish nor hurt him: and if +that any wil absolutely do it, he shall for the same be deprived of his office, +and loose his head. So being cleare of these things, then do they execute the +rigour of the sentence pronounced against the malefactor. But if there be any +doubt in the sentence giuen, doth he straight waies (vppon the same doubt) +ordaine nine iudges to sit vpon it, admonishing them (with the present before +their eyes) to vse well their offices, wherewith hee doth charge them in the +name of the king. Manie times these visitors do carrie power for to reward all +such as doo well execute their offices, in giuing them roomes and offices of +greater honor: so that the present and knowen reward which is done vnto the +good, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span> +the rigorous punishment for the malefactors, is the occasion that this mighty +kingdome is one of the best ruled and gouerned of any that is at this time +knowen in all the world: waying the gouernement of the one (as in many places of +this historie it is expressed) and ioyne it vnto the long and great experience +which we haue had in the other, and then you will say as I say. Many times these +visitors do visite the colleges and schooles, such as the king hath ordained of +his owne cost in euerie prouince (as in the processe of this booke you shall +vnderstand), and do examine the schoollers of the same, animating them to +promotion all such as doo profite themselues in their studies, and doo whip and +put in prison, yea and thrust them out of the schooles all such as are to the +contrarie. Of all the which and of their commencing and rewardes, which is given +vnto such as they do find sufficient, shall be at large declared vnto you in a +particular chapter for the same.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XII.</p> +<p class="intro">Of their prisons they doo vse, and the order they haue in the executing +of iustice vpon the culpable.</p> + +<p>Euen as the iudges and ministers are seuere and cruell in punishing, euen so +are they in putting them in prisons, the which are as terrible and as cruell, +with the which they doo keepe in peace and iustice this mightie kingdome: and as +there is much people, so haue they manie prisons and verie great. There are in +<span class="sidenote">Thirteene prisons in euery great cittie.</span> +euery principal citie throughout al these prouinces thirteene prisons, inclosed +and compassed about with high wals, and of so great largenesse within, that +besides the lodgings of the keeper and his officers, and for a garison of +souldiours that are there continually, there are<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span> +fish ponds, gardeines, and courts, whereas the prisoners do walke and recreate +themselues all the day, such as are in for small matters. Likewise there are +<span class="sidenote">Victualing houses in the prisons and shops.</span> +victualling houses and shops, whereas is solde all manner of such things as the +prisoners doo make for to sustaine themselues: which if they did not vse, their +whole substance were not sufficient for their maintenance, the time is so long +that they be there, although it be for a small matter: the occasion is for that +the iudges take deliberation in their sentences: and againe, their cities are +great and ful of other matters. Likewise they are slowe in the execution of any +sentence. So that many times it doth fall out, that men being condemned to die, +doo remaine so long in prison after their condemnation, that they die with pure +age, or some other sicknesse or infirmitie, or by the crueltie of the straight +and asper prison. Of these thirteene prisons aforesaide, alwayes foure of them +are occupied with prisoners condemned vnto death, and in euerie one of them +there is a captaine ouer one hundred souldiers which are reparted, and dooth +keepe watch and warde day and night: euery one of these condemned prisoners hath +a bord tied about his necke that hangeth downe vnto his knees, a third of a +yarde brode; it is made white with a certain whiting, and written vpon it the +occasion wherefore he was condemned to die. The keeper of the prison hath a +booke, wherein is written all the names of them that are condemned, and the +occasion wherfore: for to be accountable of them at all times when they shalbe +demaunded of him by the iudges or vizroies. They are shakled and manakled, and +put in wards that do answere into the court, whereas the officers of the prison +do make them to lie with their face downewarde vpon a floore made of bords for +the same purpose, and do drawe ouer them iron chaines, drawne through great iron +rings that are placed betwixt prisoner and prisoner, wherewith they are so +strait crushed that they cannot mooue nor turne them from one side to another: +also<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span> they +doo lay on them a certaine couering of timber, wherein remaineth no more space +of hollownesse then their bodies doth make: thus are they vsed that are +condemned to death. This prison is so painefull and grievous, that many doo +dispaire and kill themselues because they cannot suffer it. In the day time they +do take them forth and take off their manacles, that they may worke for to +sustaine themselues; all such as haue nothing to maintaine themselues, nor any +other that will help them, them the king doth giue a pittance of rice to +sustaine them. Likewise they do worke what they may to better the same.</p> +<p>There is neuer no execution done vpon such as are condemned to die, but at +the comming of the visiters or iudges of residence, whom they do call Chenes and +Leuchis,<a name="FNanchor_116_116" id="FNanchor_116_116"></a><a href="#Footnote_116_116" class="fnanchor">[116]</a> +the which doe make their visitation in secret (as you doo vnderstande in the +chapter where I spake of them). These doo visite the prisoners and demaund a +note of the names of all them that are condemned, and the cause wherefore: and +although that some of their sentences are confirmed by the king and his +counsell, yet they will see them againe in the presence of these iudges that did +condemne them, or such as did gouerne in their absence, for to be informed of +them the faults of euerie one: whereby he may see and vnderstand whether his +sentence of condemnation bee done with iustice or not. This diligence being +done, they doo choose out among them fiftie condemned men, such whose faults are +most odious, and commande the iayler to put all things in order for to doo +execution on them: the which being done, they do examine them a new, and looke +vpon the causes and faults, to see if by any meanes they can saue them. And if +they do finde in any of them any iot of discharge, they do apart them from the +rest, and straightwayes command three pieces of ordinance to be shot off, which +is to giue warning to bring forth them that shalbe executed.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span> +Then againe, when they doo bring them forth, they doo a new enter into counsell, +to see if they can saue any of them: and when not, they command other three +peeces of ordinance to be shot off, to cause them to be brought out into the +fielde, and yet before they do breake vp their counsell, they doo turne and see +once againe all their faults, to see if that by any meanes possible there might +bee some remedie to saue them. If they do finde any, or any suspect of indicion, +they do returne out of the fielde that person, and sende him againe to the +prison. Some doo returne with an euill will, for that they had rather die at +once, then for to suffer the straightnes and crueltie of the prison. In the +meane time while they are perusing their causes, and concluding the same, they +do cause these condemned prisoners to sit vpon heaps of ashes, and do giue them +to eate. So when all y<sup>t</sup> these diligences are concluded, and they can +find no remedy to saue any of them according vnto iustice, they doo commande +three peeces of artilery more bee shot off, then do they execute iustice +according vnto their sentence giuen them.</p> +<p>The deathes that they do execute is hanging, setting vppon stakes, +quartering, and burning: but there is none that is burned, but such as are +traitors to the king. When the last three of artilerie is shot off, then the +belles do ring, and a great rumor is in the cittie, for that this execution is +done but seldome. The day of execution all their shops are shut in, and there is +none that doth worke vntill sun be set, which is after that the executed men are +buried, the which is done with the companie of much people. The next day after +this is done, the visitors do make the second visitation, which is of the +theeues (a thing verie much abhorred amongst them): and such as they doo finde +culpable, hee is whipped throughout the common streetes with great shame, with a +borde hanging about his necke (as aforesaide), whereon is written his fault: and +therewith they are carried throughout<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span> +the streetes three or foure dayes. They do beate them on the calues of their +legges, with a broade and thicke cane of foure fingers broad, and as thicke as a +mans finger, the which they do lay in water before, the more for to torment +them: they are bound with their hands behind them, and their faces downewards to +the earth: two hangmen do execute this whipping of them, the one at one legge +and the other at the other, and it is done with so great crueltie, that after +they haue giuen sixe blowes, they cannot stande vppon their feete, and many +times it chanceth that with fiftie blowes they die. The most part of these +theeues do die in the punishments, and many times there is whipped togither of +theeues two hundred. So that with these and others that are punished in the +prisons (is of a verie truth) that there do die euerie yeare in one of these +principall cities of the prouince more than sixe thousande persons. At these +punishments the iudges are alwaies in presence, and for that they should not be +mooued to compassion, in the meanetime that execution is done, they do occupie +<span class="sidenote">Adulterie is death.</span> +themselues in banquettings or other pastimes. Adulteries are death, and such as +do consent to be coockoldes (which is neuer founde but amongst them of the +basest sort), are punished with exemplar punishments ordained for the same.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XIII.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the characters and letters that the Chinos do vse, and of the colleges +and scholes that are in this kingdome, and of other curious things.</p> + +<p>It is not from our purpose (now after that we haue told you of the +gouernement of this mightie kingdome) to giue you to vnderstand how that there +be great and famous philosophers, as well naturall as morall, and other things +of great<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span> +pollicie and curiosity: to tel you now of their characters, and the manner they +haue in writing, and then of the colledges and schooles. Now vnto the first. You +shall finde verie fewe in this kingdome but can both write and reade, yet haue +they not the alphabet of letters as we haue, but all that they doe write is by +figures, and they are long in learning of it, and with great difficultie, for +that almost every word hath his character. They do signifie the heauen, which +they do call Guant, by one character alone, which is this +<img src="images/ch1.jpg" width="27" height="22" alt="Guant" />:<a name="FNanchor_117_117" id="FNanchor_117_117"></a><a href="#Footnote_117_117" class="fnanchor">[117]</a> +the king, whom they doo call Bontay,<a name="FNanchor_118_118" id="FNanchor_118_118"></a><a href="#Footnote_118_118" class="fnanchor">[118]</a> +by this <img src="images/ch2.jpg" width="25" height="25" alt="Bontay" />, and by consequent the earth, the sea, and the rest of +<span class="sidenote">Sixe thousand characters in writing.</span> +the elements. They do vse more than sixe thousand characters different the one +from the other, and they doo write them verie swiftly (as it hath beene seene +many times at the Philippinas, by manie Chinos that are there, and come thither +daily); it is a kinde of language that is better vnderstood in writing then in +speaking (as the Hebrue toonge), by reason of the certaine distinction of points +that is in euery character differing one from the other, which in speaking +cannot be distinguished so easilie. Their order of writing is cleane contrarie +vnto ours, for that they doo beginne their lines from aboue downewards, but in +verie good order: likewise they begin their lines at the right hande and write +towards<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span> +the left, contrarie vnto vs. They keepe the verie same order in their printing, +as you shall vnderstande, and as may be seene this day at Rome in the librarie +of the sacred pallace. And likewise in that which King Philip hath caused to be +erected in the monasterie of Saint Laurence the royall, and also in other +places; in this order as I haue saide, and of their characters to the which I +referre me, it is an admirable thing to consider how that in that kingdome they +doo speake manie languages, the one differing from the other: yet generallie in +writing they doo vnderstand one the other, and in speaking not. The occasion is, +for y<sup>t</sup> one figure or character vnto them all doth signifie one thing, +although in the pronouncing there is difference in the vowels. The character +that doth signifie a citie is this +<img src="images/ch3.jpg" width="25" height="24" alt="Leombi" />,<a name="FNanchor_119_119" id="FNanchor_119_119"></a><a href="#Footnote_119_119" class="fnanchor">[119]</a> +and in their language some doo call it Leombi, and others Fu, yet both the one +and the other doo vnderstande it to bee citie; the like is in all other names. +And in this order doo communicate with them the Japones, Lechios, those of +Samatra, and those of the kingdome of Quachinchina and other borderers vnto +them: whereas in their speech or language, there is no more vnderstanding then +is betwixt Greekes and Tuskanes.</p> +<p>The king hath in euerie citie colleges or schooles at his owne cost, in the +which they doo learne to write, read, and count, as well as to studie naturall +or morall philosophie, astrologie, lawes of the countrie, or any other curious +science. They that doo teach in these schooles be such persons as excell in +euerie facultie, such as may be found none better, but speciallie in writing and +reading: for that there is none, although he be neuer so poore, but dooth learne +to write and read, because amongst them he is accounted infamous that cannot doo +both. Unto higher studies come a great<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span> +number of students, and doo trauaile all they may possiblie to profite, for that +it is the best course and surest way to obtaine the name of a Loytia, or +gentleman, or other dignitie: as more plainelie shall bee showed you in the +chapter following, where the order howe they doo giue them the title Loytia +shall bee spoken off, and is amongst vs after the fashion of proceeding or +commencing doctor.</p> + +<p>Unto the colleges, as well maiors as minors, the king dooth sende euerie +yeere uisiters, for to see and vnderstande howe the studentes doo profite, and +what the masters bee, with other matters touching their good governement. In +their visitation they doo honour in wordes those whome they finde of abilitie, +animating them to perseuer in the same: and doo put in prison and punish such as +they knowe to haue abilitie, and doo not profite themselues thereof; and such as +haue none, nor will not learne, they put out of the colleges, that others may +occupie their places that better will imploy themselues. They haue great +<span class="sidenote">Paper made of the filme of canes.</span> +abundance of paper, the which is made of the filme of canes, and with great +facilitie: it is verie good cheape: their printed bookes are made thereof: the +most part of it can be written but on the one side, for that it is so thinne: +they doo not write with pennes as wee doo, made of quilles, but with pennes made +<span class="sidenote">Pens made of canes.</span> +of canes, and at the end like a fine brush, like vnto a painters pensill: and +although this bee their order, yet haue they amongst them excellent scriueners, +that grow thereby to bee verie rich. When they write letters vnto anie +principall person, they gilde the margent of the paper, and limbe it, and they +put the letter written into a purse made of the same paper all guilt and +painted, the which they shut and seale, so that the letter is onely contained +therein.</p> +<p>This they doo vse verie much, that although one go to visite another in +person, yet they doo carrie a letter written in their sleeues, and possible +there shall not bee written in the same tenne letters, and that signifieth that +they doo come<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span> +to kisse their handes; these things are to bee solde at the bookebinders of all +sortes, as well for principall persons and men of authoritie, as for others of +meaner estate for to desire, reprehend, or discommende: and to conclude, for all +thinges that they will desire or haue neede of, yea if it bee to defie anie +bodie, so that the buyer hath no more to doo but to close it vp and seale it to +sende it whither his pleasure is. These and manie other curiosities they do vse, +as you haue heard and shall heare in the discourse of this small hystorie, or at +the least somewhat touched, for that the breuitie that I doo pretend and will +vse, will not permit that I shoulde enter so farre for to declare at large, but +to be briefe in that I shall declare.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XIV.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the examination of such whome they preferre to the degree of Loytia, +which is with vs the degree of a doctor: and howe they doo commence them, and +howe they doo beare him companie.</p> + +<p>These uisitours of whome wee haue spoken, the king and his counsaill doo +sende them to visite his prouinces; and amongest the greatest things that are +giuen them in charge, is the visitation of the colledges and schooles which the +king hath in all the principall citties, as is saide; the which visitour hath a +particular authoritie for to commence or graduate such students as haue finished +their course, and are of abilitie and sufficiencie to perfourme the same. They +doo make them gentlemen, if they bee capable of anie charge of iustice or +gouernment. And for that the vse of their ceremonies is a thing woorthie to bee +knowne, I will here declare the same order which Frier Martin de Herrada, and +his companions, did see in the citie of Aucheo,<a name="FNanchor_120_120" id="FNanchor_120_120"></a><a href="#Footnote_120_120" class="fnanchor">[120]</a> +at the time of their commencement.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span></p> +<p>At such time as the visitor hath concluded the visitation of his prouince, +and hath punished the malifactors, and rewarded the good: in the metropolitane +cities, hee doth straight wayes cause proclamation to bee made that all students +and scholers that doo finde themselues sufficient, and haue a corage to be +examined to take the degree of Loytia, the which, although amongst them is +vnderstoode to bee made a gentleman, yet amongst vs is a doctour.</p> +<p>The day appointed being come, they are all presented before the visitour, who +taketh all their names in a scrowle, and appointeth another day for their +examination. This day, for honour of the feast, the visitor dooth inuite all the +learned Loytias that are in the citie, who ioyntly with him do make the +examination with great rigour, alwayes putting forwardes and preferring those +that are skilfull in the lawes of the countrey, by which they do gouerne all +other faculties whatsoeuer, and that they be therewithall good, and vertuous. +And all those that they doo finde with these properties, they do write their +names in an other scrowle, and doo appoint the day of commencement, the which is +done with great ceremonies and much people, in whose presence the visitor, in +the name of the king, doth giue vnto them the ensignes of degree and dignitie to +be a Loytia; that is, a waste or girdle bossed with gold or siluer, and a hat +with certaine thinges on it, as shall be shewed you in the chapter following; +which is a signe and token that doth make the difference from the vulgar people, +without the which none can shewe himselfe in publike.</p> +<p>And although al be called Loytias, I meane those that come to it by letters +or learning, and others by the warres, and others by a gift of the king, yet +they differ the one from the other in estimation. For that those of the royall +counsell, viceroyes, gouernors, and visitors, are made Loytias by disputation in +learning; and the generall captaines, maiors, bailifes, and testators, are a +gift of the kinges in recompence<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span> +of some good seruice that they haue done. These haue no more preheminence, but +onely that they haue the benefite of their priuileges, and haue the dignitie of +that vocation, but these are neuer preferred to greater honours, as the other +Loytias are, of these you have in euery citie very many.</p> +<p>There be others likewise of great estimation, and are put in the second +degree, and are those that are made by desert in the warres, and are elect and +chosen by the generals by authoritie of the king, for some act or worthie deede +done in the wars, by force of armes or such like, approued by witnesse of great +credite; vnto whom, besides the title and honour giuen vnto them, they doo giue +them great liuings, for that no valiant or worthie deede but is had in +<span class="sidenote">Any good thing gratified.</span> +estimation, and gratified with great liberalitie, which is the occasion that +those which are meane souldiers, are animated to imitate those that be most +principall and valiant. According vnto my promise I will here, with as much +breuitie as may bee, declare vnto you the order of their commencements, and how +they do accompanie them after that they are made Loytias, for that it is a thing +worth the hearing.</p> +<p>The day appointed being come for to commence or giue degrees, all the +Loytias, with the visitor, doo enter into the royall hall whereas they were +examined, al richly apparelled, and being assembled, then do enter in al those +that shal receiue degrees, galantly apparelled without any upper garment, and +before euerie one of them, go the padrines,<a name="FNanchor_121_121" id="FNanchor_121_121"></a><a href="#Footnote_121_121" class="fnanchor">[121]</a> +and after them the graduates with garments very finely made, riding on gennets +very sumptuously couered with cloth of gold and silke, that do carie the +ensignes that shalbe giuen vnto him, the which hee dooth demande of the visitor, +kneeling vpon his knees with great humilitie. Who first sweare them, that in all +offices committed vnto them, they shall with all care and diligence doo iustice +equallie vnto all men, and that they shall not receiue any bribes or presents +whatsoeuer: that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span> +they shall be true and loyall vnto the king, and that they shall not conspire in +any confederacie or treason against him, and manie other things: which +ceremonies he standeth long about.</p> +<p>This oth being taken, the visitor who presenteth the kings person, dooth put +on them the ensignes aforesaide, with the facultie belonging thereunto, and then +hee and all the Loytias imbrace them presently. This doone, they depart out of +the hal in verie decent order, at which instant all the belles in the citie are +rong, and great store of ordinance and artilerie discharged, which continueth a +good space. Then they carrie these newe Loytias throughout the citie, +accompanied with a multitude of people in manner following.</p> +<p>There go first before them many souldiers, marching in good order, with +drommes and trumpets and other musicall instruments verie melodious: after them +are borne many maces, then follow all the Loytias, some on horsebacke and some +are carried in litter chaires, in most gallant order, after which follow the +Padrines. Then the new commenced Loytias, without any upper garment as before is +saide, all mounted vppon white horses verie richly couered with cloth of golde; +hauing euerie one of them a tippet of taffeta vpon his shoulder, and on his head +a hat with two small tippets hanging downe behinde, much after the fashion of +those that hang on the bishops miter; this is permitted unto none but vnto those +of their orders abouesaide: vpon their hats they haue two branches of golde, or +of siluer and guilt, made like vnto a bunch of fethers: before euerie one of +them are carried sixe frames, couered with satten, and euerie one is carried by +foure men: in these frames are written in letters of golde their disputation, +facultie, and title giuen them for the same, and their armes, with manie other +things which I omit for breuitie sake, because this marching and passing holdeth +eight houres togither. The citizens there keepe this day festiuall, and do +ordeine manie dances and sportes. And the better sort doo celebrate three or +foure daies after,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span> +banquetting the newe made Loytia, and giuing him ioy of his newe preferment, +euerie man seeking his good will and fauour. From this day forwards hee is of +abilitie to take vppon him any office and gouernement whatsoeuer: and therefore +straight wayes he goeth vnto the court to procure the same, and carrieth with +him the ensignes of his commencement, and is apparelled so that he may be +knowne, wherefore they doo him great honour in the way as hee goeth, and lodge +him in such houses as the king hath appointed in euerie towne for such as they +be. When he commeth to the court, hee goeth and dooth his duetie vnto the +president and vnto the rest of the royall counsell, who euerie one a part, doo +giue him ioy of his new dignitie, and with many words of great curtesie and +praise promise him, as occasion shall serve, to prouide him a place, as they by +their examination doo vnderstande his abilitie, and, againe, as they see his +discreete dealing and care in such matters as they do giue him in charge, so +will they preferre him to better dignitie and honour. So the next day following +they register him in their booke of memorie, which is alwayes in the counsell +chamber; and they remaine there waiting and seruing them vntill they haue +prouided them of some gouernment, which is not long after, for that the kingdome +is great, with manie prouinces and citties, as by this historie you shal +vnderstand.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XV.</p> +<p class="intro">How that with them they haue had the vse of Artilery long time before vs +in these parts of Europe.</p> + +<p>Amongst many things worthie to bee considered, which haue beene and shalbe +declared in this historie, and amongst<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span> +manie other which of purpose I omit, because I would not be tedious vnto the +reader, no one thing did cause so much admiracion vnto the Portugals, when that +they did first traficke in Canton, neither vnto our Spaniards, who long time +after went vnto the Philippinas, as to finde in this kingdome artilerie. And wee +finde by good account taken out of their histories, that they had the vse +thereof long time before vs in Europe. It is said that the first beginning was +in the yeare 1330, by the industrie of an Almane,<a name="FNanchor_122_122" id="FNanchor_122_122"></a><a href="#Footnote_122_122" class="fnanchor">[122]</a> +yet howe he was called there is no historie that dooth make mention: but the +Chinos saie, and it is euidently seene, that this Almaine dooth not deserue the +<span class="sidenote">The first inuenting of armor.</span> +name of the first inuenter, but of the discouerer, for that they were the first +inuentors, and from them hath the vse thereof beene transported vnto other +kingdomes, where it is now vsed. The Chinos saie that their first king, called +Vitey, did first inuent the same, and that he was taught the matter how to make +them by a spirite that came out of the earth, for to defende himselfe and his +kingdome from the Tartares, that did much molest him with warres: for, according +vnto the tokens giuen him, (as it dooth appear in their histories,) and the +industrie for the same, it appeareth that it was some spirit, enimie vnto +mankind, onely for to destroy them, as in these daies the experience thereof is +apparent vnto vs. All the which carieth a similitude of the trueth, for that +this king was a great sorcerer and inchanter, as you may well vnderstand by the +herbe that he had growing in y<sup>e</sup> court of his pallace, whereof before +I haue told you. And if this be not credible, because so many yeres are past +since this kings raigne, yet it is of truth, y<sup>t</sup> when these Chinos +went to the kingdom of Pergu,<a name="FNanchor_123_123" id="FNanchor_123_123"></a><a href="#Footnote_123_123" class="fnanchor">[123]</a> +<span class="sidenote">Artilerie 1300 years before us.</span> +and to cōquest y<sup>e</sup> east Indies more then 1500 yeares since, they +caried with them y<sup>e</sup> like instruments of warre, which did serue them +in their conquest: the which conquest being ended, they left behind them +certaine peeces of artilerie,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span> +which were found afterwards by the Portugals, whereon were grauen the armes of +China, and in what yeare they were made, agreeing iust with the time of the +conquest.</p> +<p>Such artilerie as the frier Gerrarda and his companions did see at their +being there, they say it was of antiquitie, and very ill wrought, and was for +the most part peeces to shoote stones, or murderers: but it was giuen them to +vnderstande that in other prouinces of the kingdome, there be that bee verie +curiouslie wrought and faire, which may bee of such which the Captaine Artreda +did see: who in a letter that hee wrote vnto King Phillip, giuing him to +vnderstande of the secreats of this countrie, amongst which hee saide, the +Chinos doo vse all armour as wee doo, and the artilerie which they haue is +excellent good. I am of that opinion, for that I haue seene vessels there of +huge greatnesse, and better made then ours, and more stronger.</p> +<p>In euerie citie they haue certaine houses, where they make their ordinance +and artilerie continuallie: they doo not plant them on castles (for that they +haue not the vse of them in all the kingdome), but vppon the gates of their +cities, which hath mightie great and thicke walles, and deepe ditches, which +they doo fill with water out of the next riuer, at all times when neede +requireth, which they account the greatest strength in all the kingdome. At +euerie gate of the citie there is a captaine with manie souldiours, that keepeth +watch and warde, night and daie, to suffer no stranger to enter in without +especiall lycence of the gouernour of the citie or towne. By this that I haue +alredie saide, as seemeth vnto me, is apparantlie shewed and declared the +antiquity of artilerie in this kingdome: and howe that they were the first +inuentors thereof. Likewise it dooth plainely appeere that there was the first +inuention of printing, a thing as strange as the other, whose antiquitie in that +kingdome shall be shewed in the chapter following.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XVI.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the antiquitie and manner of printing bookes, vsed in this Kingdome, +long before the vse in our Europe.</p> + +<p>The admirable inuention, and the subtill ingenie of printing is such, that +for lacke of the vse thereof, should haue beene forgotten the worthinesse of +manie excellent men, and of their deedes doone in the happie daies and times +long past: and manie in these our daies woulde not trouble themselues so much as +they doo, in learning to get honour and promotion, or in feates of warres, if +that their fame should no longer continue in writing then their liues on the +earth. Leauing apart the woonderfull effectes of this subtile inuention, least +speaking thereof I should be ouer tedious, I will heere onlie goe about to +prooue that which this chapter dooth propounde, with some ensamples, whereof +manie are found in their histories, and likewise in ours. It doth plainlie +appeare by the vulgar opinion, that the inuention of printing did beginne in +Europe in the yeare 1458, the which was attributed vnto Toscan,<a name="FNanchor_124_124" id="FNanchor_124_124"></a><a href="#Footnote_124_124" class="fnanchor">[124]</a> +called John Cutembergo: and it was saide of trueth, that the first mould +wherewith they doo print was made in Maguncia, from whence an Almaine called +Conrado<a name="FNanchor_125_125" id="FNanchor_125_125"></a><a href="#Footnote_125_125" class="fnanchor">[125]</a> +did bring the same inuention into Italie. And the first booke that was printed, +was that which saint Austine<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span> +did write, intituled <i>De ciuitate Dei</i>: wherein manie authors agree. But +the Chinos doo affirme, that the first beginning was in their countrie, and the +inuentour was a man whome they reuerence for a saint: whereby it is euident that +manie yeares after that they had the vse thereof, it was brought into Almaine<a name="FNanchor_126_126" id="FNanchor_126_126"></a><a href="#Footnote_126_126" class="fnanchor">[126]</a> +by the way of Ruscia and Moscouia, from whence, as it is certaine, they may come +by lande, and that some merchants that came from thence into this kingdome, by +the Redde Sea, and from Arabia Felix, might bring some books, from whence this +John Cutembergo, whom the histories dooth make authour, had his first +foundation. The which beeing of a trueth, as they haue authoritie for the same, +it dooth plainlie appeare that this inuention came from them vnto vs: and for +the better credite hereof, at this day there are found amongst them many bookes +printed 500 yeares before the inuention began in Almaine: of the which I haue +one, and I haue seene others, as well in Spaine and in Italie as in the Indies. +The frier Herrada and his companions, when they came from the China vnto the +Philippinas, did bring with them manie printed bookes of diuers matters, which +they did buy in the citie of Ancheo, the which were printed in diuers places of +the kingdome.<a name="FNanchor_127_127" id="FNanchor_127_127"></a><a href="#Footnote_127_127" class="fnanchor">[127]</a> +Yet the most part<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span> +of them were printed in the prouince of Ochian,<a name="FNanchor_128_128" id="FNanchor_128_128"></a><a href="#Footnote_128_128" class="fnanchor">[128]</a> +whereas is the best print: and as they did report, they woulde haue brought a +great number more, if that the vizroy had not disturbed them, for they haue +great libraries, and very good cheape; but hee suspected that those bookes might +be a meane to giue them to vnderstande the secrets of their kingdome, the which +they doo indeuour to keepe close from strangers. The vizroy vsed a policie, and +sent them word, how that he was certified that they went about buying of bookes +for to carry them into their countrie, and howe they shoulde not spende their +money on them, for hee would giue them for nothing so manie bookes as they +woulde haue, which afterward hee did not performe, possible for the reason +aforesaide, or else he did forget his promise.</p> +<p>At such time as this commandement came vnto them, they<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span> +had bought a good number, out of the which are taken the most things that wee +haue put in this small historie, for to giue a briefe notice of them and of that +kingdome, till such time as by a true certificate the experience of manie shall +cause more credite thereunto: for that vnto this day, by reason of the small +notice wee haue, we cannot with so great authoritie make it so credible as wee +hope that time hereafter will doo. The which hath moued mee, yea and constrained +me, to leaue to intreat of manie things, which in those parts are to bee +credited, yea and are most true: and for the same I haue beene blamed and +reprehended by such as haue had perfite notice thereof.</p> +<p>And nowe for that I will not go from my purpose, you shall vnderstand in the +chapter following, whereof these bookes that they brought doo intreat, that the +better you giue credite vnto the curiositie and policie of that kingdome, as in +manie places I haue declared, and hereafter will declare.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XVII.</p> +<p class="intro">The substance and manner of those bookes that Frier Herrada and his +companions brought from China.</p> + +<p>They brought with them a great number of bookes, as wee haue said, that did +intreate of diuers matters, as you shall perceiue in the sequell.</p> +<p>Of the description of all the whole kingdome of China, and the placing of the +15 prouinces, and the length and bredth of euery one of them, and of other +kingdomes bordering vppon them.</p> +<p>Of all tributes and rentes belonging vnto the king, and of all the orders of +his royall pallace, and of his ordinarie pensions that hee giueth, and the names +of all officers in his house, and how far euery office doth extend.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span></p> +<p>How many tributaries euerie prouince hath, and the number of such as are free +from tribute, and the order and time, how and when they are to be recouered.</p> +<p>For the making of ships of all sorts, and the order of nauigation, with the +altitudes of euery port, and the quantitie of euery one in particular.</p> +<p>Of the antiquitie of this kingdome of China, and of the beginning of the +world, and in what time and for whome it beganne.</p> +<p>Of the kings that have raigned in this kingdome, and the order of their +succession and government, with their liues and customes.</p> +<p>Of the ceremonies they vse in doing sacrifice vnto their idols (which they +hold as gods), and the names of them: of their beginnings, and at what time they +shoulde make their sacrifices.</p> +<p>Their opinions of the immortalitie of the soule, of the heauen, of hell, of +the manner of their funerals, and of their mourning apparel that euery one is +bounde to weare, according as he is alianced unto the dead.</p> +<p>Of the lawes of the kingdome, and when and by whome they were made; and the +punishment executed on those which violate the same, with manie other matters +touching their good government and policie.</p> +<p>Manie herbals, or bookes of herbes, for phisitions, shewing how they should +be applied to heale infirmities.</p> +<p>Many other bookes of phisicke and medicine, compiled by authors of that +kingdome, of antiquitie and of late daies, containing in them the maner how to +vse the sicke, and to heale them of their sicknes, and to make preseruatiues +against all sicknesses and infirmities.</p> +<p>Of the properties of stones and mettals, and of things natural that haue +vertue of themselues; and wherefore pearles, gold, and silver, and other metals, +may serue for the vtility of man, comparing with the one and the other the +vtilitie of euerie thing.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span></p> +<p>Of the nomber, and moouings of the heauens: of the planets and stars, and of +their operations and particular influences.</p> +<p>Of such kingdomes and nations as they haue notice off, and of particular +things that are in them.</p> +<p>Of the life and behauiour of such men, whom they holde for saints, where they +lead their liues, and where they died and were buried.</p> +<p>The order howe to play at the tables, and at the chests, and how to make +sports of legerdemaine and puppets.</p> +<p>Of musicke and songs, and who were the inuentors thereof.</p> +<p>Of the mathematicall sciences, and of arithmeticke, and rules how to use the +same.</p> +<p>Of the effectes that the children doo make in their mothers wombs, and how +they are euery moneth sustained, and of the good and bad times of their birth.</p> +<p>Of architecture, and all manner of buildings, with the bredth and length that +euerie edifice ought to haue for his proportion.</p> +<p>Of the properties of good and bad ground, and tokens how to know them, and +what seede they will beare euery yeare.</p> +<p>Of astrologie naturall, and judiciarie, and rules to learne the same, and to +cast figures to make coniectures.</p> +<p>Of chiromancia and phisiognomia, and other signes and tokens, and what euery +one doth signifie.</p> +<p>The order how to write letters, and how to give euerie one his title, +according to the dignitie of his person.</p> +<p>How to bring vp horses, and to teach them to runne and trauaile.</p> +<p>How to deuine vpon dreames, and cast lottes when they beginne any iourney, or +take any thing in handes, whose ende is doubtfull.</p> +<p>Of apparell worne in all the kingdome, beginning with the king, and of the +ensignes or coates of armes of such as doo gouerne.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span></p> +<p>How to make armour and instruments of warre, and howe to firme a squadron.</p> +<p>These bookes, and many others that the fryers brought, out of the which (as +afore saide) haue been taken all such thinges as haue beene and shall be +declared in this historie, interpreted by persons naturally borne in China, and +brought vp in Philippinas with the Spaniards that dwell there, who affirme that +they haue seene great libraries in cities where they abode, but especially in +Ancheo and Chincheo.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XVIII.</p> +<p class="intro">The order that these Chinos obserue in making bankets, and in celebrating +their festiuall daies.</p> + +<p>For that in some parts of this historie wee haue touched the bankets that the +Chinos do make, it shall not bee amisse to declare here the order they vse +therein, for that they are curious, and differ verie much from our order and vse +in their banquetting, the which we haue perceiued as well by their feeding as by +many other thinges.</p> +<p>Amongest these Chinos, more than amongest any other people of the world, are +vsed bankets and feastes, for they are rich and without care, and also without +the light of heauen, albeit they do confesse and beleeue the immortalitie of the +soule, and the rewarde or punishment in an other worlde, according vnto their +workes in this life (as we haue saide). All that euer they can, they doo giue +themselues vnto the contentment of the flesh, and vnto all maner pastimes, +wherein they liue most delicately, and in verie good order. Their custome is, +although they haue a hundred guestes, yet euerie one must sit and eate at a +table by himselfe. Their tables be verie fine, gilt and painted full of birdes +and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span> +beastes, and other varieties verie pleasant vnto the eye. They do not vse to put +table clothes on them, but onely a forefront of damaske, or some other silke, on +euerie one of them, which hangeth downe to the ground; and on the foure corners +they doo sette manie little baskettes curiously wrought with golde and siluer +wyre, full of flowers and knackes of sugar, made with great curiositie, as +elefantes, grayhoundes, hares, and all other kinde of beastes and foules, gylt +and painted: in the middest of the table they doo sette the victualles in +maruelous good order, as flesh of diuerse sortes, fowle, and fishes: of the +which they make diuers manners of brothes passing well dressed, and are serued +in fine earthen dishes of great curiositie, and of siluer (although these they +vse verie seeldome, except for the viceroyes): they haue no neede of table +clothes nor napkins, for they eate so delicately, that they doo not touch the +meate with their handes, but with little forkes of golde or siluer, with the +which they eate so cleanly, that although it be verie small that they eate, yet +will they let nothing fall: they drinke often, but a little at a time, and +therefore they vse verie little cuppes.</p> +<p>At these bankettes and feastes, there are present alwayes women gesters, who +doo play and sing, vsing manie prettie gesters to cause delight, and make mirth +to the gestes: besides these they haue diuerse sortes of men with other +instruments, as tomblers and players, who doo represent their comedies verie +perfectly and naturally: in these bankets they spende the greatest part of the +day, by reason of so manie diuersities of meates that they serue in. They passe +manie times a hundreth sundrie dishes, when that the estate of the person that +is inuited, or of him that maketh the banket, dooth require. As may shew the +report of the Augustine fryers, in the beginning of the second part of this +historie: where one doth tell of bankets that were made him by the Insuanto, a +gouernor of the prouince of Chincheo,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span> +and the uiceroy of Ancheo, and of the gallant deuices they had to driue away the +time so long as the banket lasted. Unto euerie one of their guestes they doo set +a table, euerie table standing one along by an other, making a difference of the +number of them, according vnto the qualitie of the persons: vpon the first table +(where sitteth he that is inuited) they set the victualles readie dressed, +sweete meates, or march-panes,<a name="FNanchor_129_129" id="FNanchor_129_129"></a><a href="#Footnote_129_129" class="fnanchor">[129]</a> +which is the last seruice: and on the rest, although they be twentie, they set +great store of diuerse kindes of meates, all rawe, as capons, ducks, teales, +hennes, peeces of salt and martlemas biefe, gammons of bacon, and many other +thinges. All these doo remaine vppon the tables till the banket be ended, and +the guestes departed: then doo the seruantes of him that made the banket take +all these rawe meates, and carrie them before their guestes till they come vnto +their houses or lodges, where they doo leaue it with great ceremonies. When they +doo make any banket to a viceroy or to any embassadour, it is with so great cost +and sumptuousness, that they spend a great substance therein. These bankets do +commonly indure twentie daies together, continuing vntill the last day as +royally and as plentifully as the first day.</p> +<p>They do celebrate all their festiuall dayes in the night, which is ordinarily +their newe moones; and they doo solemnize them with much musicke and newe +inuentions. But more particularly they doo celebrate the first day of the yeare, +which is, after their account, the first day of the moneth of March: on this day +they apparell themselues verie costlye and sumptuouslie, both men and women, and +doo adorne themselues with all their iewelles and newe toyes, and doo hang their +houses and doores with carpettes and clothes of silke and cloth of golde, and +dresse them vppe trimme with roses and other flowers, for at that time there is +great store in that country: likewise they doo sette at all<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span> +their doores great trees, on the which they doo hang manye lightes, and all the +triumphall arches that bee in the streetes (which bee verye manie, as wee haue +sayde) are decked with bowes this day: wherein they put manie lightes, and set +full of canapies of cloth of gold, damaske, and manie other sundrie sorts of +silkes.</p> +<p>Their priestes doo assist them in these feastes very richly apparelled, and +doo offer sacrifice vpon their altars vnto the heauen, and vnto their idolles, +and they sing many songes.</p> +<p>This day dooth all people generally sport themselues with great singing and +sounding of instruments, in the which they are very cunning. Such instruments as +the Augustine fryers did see, were lutes, gytternes, vyalles, rebbukes, +wayghtes, virginalles, harpes, and flutes, and other instrumentes which wee doo +vse, although they doo differ something in the fashion of them, but yet easie to +be knowen. They do tune their voyces vnto their instrumentes with great +admiration: they haue all commonly very good voyces. In these feasts they do +make many representations of great pastime according vnto nature, with +vestiments that they haue for the purpose. All the dayes that these feastes do +indure, their tables be full of diuerse sorts of meates, as well of fish as of +flesh, and of all sortes of fruites, and excellent good wine, the which they +make of the palme tree, with certaine mixtures, which maketh it have an +excellent good taste. All the day, they and their priestes do eate and drinke so +much till they can no more. They haue it for a thing most certaine amongest +them, that looke how they are in disposition that day, so shall they passe the +whole yeare, eyther sorrowfull or merrie. I omit the feastes which they make at +marriages, and at any good successe, though they be in great number and very +sumptuous, because I would not be tedious: in all things they couett to auoyde +melancholy.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XIX.</p> +<p class="intro">How they salute one another in this countrie, and of some part of their +ceremonies.</p> + +<p>There is no nation in all the worlde, be it neuer so barbarous, that hath +been found out vntill this day, without a manner of courtesie, or some ceremony +of salutation in their meetinges and visitinges, or when they do assemble in any +particular businesse: whereof wee haue large notice by auncient histories, and +sufficient experience in that wee haue seene and vnderstoode in these kingdomes +and prouinces which in our dayes hath beene discouered: although herein (as I am +fully perswaded) those of this kingdome do exceede all nations of the world (as +is affirmed by them that haue had the experience), for they haue so many +ceremonies and vsages of courtesie and ciuilitie amongest them, that they haue +bookes to teach them only how they should behaue themselues in making difference +of persons. Of all the which, such as shall seeme expedient to giue notice of, I +will declare in this chapter, using therein the breuitie that this historie +requireth.</p> +<p>They esteeme it a great discourtesie, not to salute one an other when they +see or meete one an other, although the acquaintance betwixt them be but small.</p> +<p>The salutation that the common people do vse is, when they do meete the one +with the other, to shut the left hande, and to couer it with the right, ioyning +therewith their breastes together, with much bowing their heades downewardes, +signifying that loue and amitie is as firme betweene them as their handes are +fast, and that their friendshippe is not alonely in the ceremonie, but also in +the heart: the which they giue to vnderstande by woordes at the same time. But +amongest courtyers and gentlemen they vse an other manner<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span> +of courtesie, which seemeth vnto them of much more curiositie, that is: at such +time as they doo meete, they make a little staye, then they caste abroad their +armes, and claspe their fingers together, remayning in compasse, humbling +themselues manie times, and contending one with an other about their parting for +to prosecute his waye; and the higher estate they are of, the more is their +contention. When that anie meane person doth meete with a principall man, who +for dignitie or for any other occasion dooth acknowledge superioritie, straight +wayes hee dooth stay with great silence, declining his head, till such time as +he is past by, although the most part of them dooth it more for feare than for +courtesie: for that experience hath taught them, that he that dooth it not, is +straight wayes punished and whipped cruelly.</p> +<p>When that any of these commeth to speake with any Loytia, at the entering in +at the hall whereas he is, hee kneeleth downe, declyning his head and looking +vpon the ground: and on this sort he goeth vpon his knees till hee come into the +middest of the hall, and there he stayeth and declareth his petition by worde of +mouth, with an humble and meeke voyce, or else presenteth it by writing: and +hauing receiued answere, hee dooth returne on his knees backwardes, without +turning his backe to the Loytia, vntill hee bee quite out of the hall. And if +they which doo meete or visite one an other be equall in dignity, they shew +great courtesie on both sides, contending who shall surpasse in courtesie and +wordes: wherein they are verie ceremonious. When one doth goe to visite an +other, he that is visited, after the visitation done, doth bring the other vnto +the streete doore. This custome is vsed most amongest the common people, being +equal in degree, or differing little. Likewise they vse one thing verie strange, +and neuer heard of amongest other nations, that is: if that one doo come out of +<span class="sidenote">A strange kind of courtesie.</span> +the countrie, to visite an other that is in the citie or towne (although he be a +nigh kinsman, and long time acquainted), if that<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span> +knocking at the doore or in the streete hee doo meete with him whome he dooth +come to visite (hee being not well apparelled), although he speake vnto him, yet +will hee not make any aunswere, nor any resemblance that euer he sawe or knewe +him before: but straightwayes returneth home to his house in all haste possible, +and doth apparell him selfe with the best apparell that he hath, and then he +goeth foorth and receiueth his guest and friend, dissembling as though he had +not before meete nor seene him.</p> +<p>This ceremonie amongest them is infalliblie kept, for that it is amongest +them an auncient tradition, and founded vppon their religion. They giue great +intertainement vnto their guestes, and make them straightwayes a beuer<a name="FNanchor_130_130" id="FNanchor_130_130"></a><a href="#Footnote_130_130" class="fnanchor">[130]</a> +or collation with manie sortes of conserues and fruites, and good wine, and an +other kinde of drinke, that is generally vsed thorough out the whole kingdome, +and is made of diuerse physicall hearbes, good to comfort the heart, the which +they warme when they drinke thereof.</p> +<p>These ceremonies they vse when that one neighbour dooth visite an other. But +when that one of the towne dooth meete with a stranger that hee dooth knowe, and +hath beene in the towne certaine dayes, and he not seene him, then hee of the +towne dooth aske of the other if that hee hath eaten any thing: if he aunswere +no, he dooth by and by, without any delay, carrie him to the next victualling +house, whereas hee dooth banket him deliciously: for in euerie towne there is +good opportunitie for the same, by reason that in the market places and +streetes, and in the suburbes, there is great store of victualling houses, that +doo keepe tabling verie orderly, and for little cost: for there (as we haue +sayde) all kinde of victualles are verie good cheape. But if the stranger dooth +aunswere that he hath eaten, then dooth the citizen or townesman carrie him to +an other kinde of victualing houses,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span> +where are to be had al sortes of conserues and iunkettes, fruites and +marchpanes, and there dooth hee make him a banket with great love and good will. +Of the women as well strangers as towneborne, or of what degree soeuer, they +haue great respect, but especially of the married women: vnto whome if any man +giue an ill or dishonest woorde, he is accounted infamous: and likewise if he +doo not offer to them courtesie, and giue them place or way when they passe the +streetes, which is seeldome seene. But when they doo passe they behaue +themselues so discreetly that they giue no occasion that anye shoulde misuse +them: towardes strangers they vse verye great courtesie: but especially the +principallest: as you shall perceiue in the relation of the seconde part of this +historie, where it shall be declared by experience.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XX.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the great closenesse that the women of this kingdome do liue in, and +with what condition they permit common women.</p> + +<p>The principall intent that this king and his gouernors haue, as is gathered +by their lawes, is to preserue their common weale from vices; for the which he +dooth set downe great penalties, and executeth the same without any remission; +and least any should offend they vse great vigilancie, and do iudge that the +libertie and dishonestie of the women is most preiudiciale thereunto, and is the +occasion that their common wealth falleth to decay, being neuer so well +gouerned: therefore they haue ordained many preseruatives and remedies by their +lawes and customes to preuent the same, which is the only occasion (that +although it is so long since this kingdome first began, and againe, being so +great as you may vnderstande), yet in this one point there is lesse<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span> +inconuenience or preiudice than in any other countrey of lesse antiquitie and +fewer people. So that a dishonest woman is knowen by name, although it be in a +great citie, the which is seldome seene, and a rare thing. And the best way they +haue to preuent this is, that all people that haue daughters are commaunded by +expresse order, that they shall bring them vp (after they haue the vse of +reason) in their owne houses very close, and not be seene, but alwayes to doo +something to auoide idlenesse, for that it is the mother of all vices, whereby +it may take no roote in them. This lawe dooth comprehende married women, and is +kept in such sort that the wiues of the viceroyes and gouernours do obserue it, +yea they say that the queenes themselues doo obserue it, and that they are +alwayes spinning golde, silke, or flaxe, or doing some other exercise with their +handes, esteeming all idle persons woorthie to be hated and contemned: so that +the children being brought vp in this manner, seeing the good example of their +mothers, is the occasion that this vertuous exercise, worthie to be imitated, is +conuerted vnto a dayly and perpetuall custome, in such sort, that they think it +a perpetuall torment to commaunde them to be idle. These ordinarie and +voluntarie exercises haue the women of this kingdome in such sort, that it is +newes and a strange thing to meete a woman in the streetes of any citie or +towne, neither at the windowes, which is a signe that they liue honest. If it so +fall out that of force they must go abroad, as to the buriall of parents and +kinsfolkes, or to visite any one being sicke, or vpon any like occasion, then +are they carried in litter chaires where they are seene of none, as we told you +before: but other superfluous visitations or meetings of gossips are not there +vsed. Albeit tendering the conseruation of this honest crewe, and to eschewe +greater euils in the common wealth, they permit common women as a necessarie +thing: yet they do allow them in such sort, that their euill example may not be +hurtfull vnto the honest state<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span> +of them which liue chast. And therefore they do build for them houses out of the +cities and townes in the suburbes, giuing them straight commandement there to +remaine in the said houses, and not to straggle and go abroad at all. And whilst +they liue there they are prohibited, vppon paine of death, to enter into the +gates of the citie or any part thereof.</p> +<p>Such women as doo vse this facultie are nothing esteemed amongst them, for +they are for the most part of the basest sort, as strangers, slaues, or such as +haue beene bought of their mothers being yoonge, which is a kinde of perpetuall +bondage, yea a great crueltie which is vsed amongst them there, and yet suffered +amongst them. You shall vnderstande, that such as are poore widowes and driuen +by necessitie, cannot sustaine themselues, may for the supplying of their want, +sell their children and binde them to perpetuall seruitude, the which is +permitted in such sort, that there are amongst them rich merchants that deale in +no other thing: and all the maiden children that they buy so bee brought vp with +great care, and taught to plaie and sing, and other things appertaining vnto +pleasure. Then after, when they are of yeares, they carrie them vnto the houses +aforesaid ordained for common women. The first day that they doo dedicate her to +this ill office, before shee is put into this common house, they carrie her +before a iudge, which the king hath ordained for euerie house appertaining to +any cittie or towne appointed to bee their keeper, and see that there bee no +euill rule kept amongst them: and this iudge dooth place her in the house +himselfe, and from that day forwards her master hath no more to doo with her, +but to go euerie moneth vnto the iudge to recouer his tribute, which is a +certaine summe set downe by the iudge, by agreement made betweene them both, and +hee appointeth besides this the time when hee shall be paide for her, and for +that was spent in her bringing vp and teaching.</p> +<p>These women be very much haunted, and passe away the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span> +time maruellous pleasantly by reason of their singing and playing, which they +doo with great cunning: and according vnto the report of the Chinos, they +apparell themselues with great curiositie, and paint themselues. They haue +amongst them many blinde women, that are free and not bonde: these are trimmed, +dressed, and painted by others that haue their sight; and such as haue spent all +their youth in these houses, can not goe foorth so long as they liue, as is +commaunded by a lawe publike, least by their dishonest demeanure they should be +an occasion of some harme and an euill example to others. Whatsoeuer profite +dooth remaine vnto these women when they haue payed their maister, they giue +vnto the iudge their superiour, who doth keepe it faithfully and carefully, and +giueth a good account thereof euerie yeare vnto the uisitors. And afterwardes +when these women waxe olde, it is repaied vnto them againe by order of the said +iudge. But it is bestowed in such sort, that they shall not lacke, neither haue +vrgent necessitie. But if it so fall out that they should lacke, they will giue +them a stipend to maintaine them, onely for to dresse and trimme the blinde +women, or else they will put them into the kinges hospitall, a place ordeyned +for such as cannot helpe themselues.</p> +<p>The men children which they buy, and are solde to supplie their necessitie, +in the order aforesaide, of the women, they put to learne some occupation, and +after that they are expert therein, they doo serue a master in the same trade +for a certaine time; the which being expired, their masters are not only bound +to giue them their libertie, but also to provide them of wiues and to marrie +them, prouiding also for them houses and necessaries wherewith they may get +their liuing. Which, if they doo not of their owne free will, they are compelled +by iustice to doo, whether they will or no. And they for a token of +greatefulnesse must come vnto their masters the first day of the yeare, and +other dayes appointed, and bring them some present. The children of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span> +these be all free, and subiect to no bondage for the benefite doone vnto their +father for their bringing vp.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XXI.</p> +<p class="intro">The fashion of their ships, as well of those that passe the seas, as of +those that doo roade riuers, which are manie and great: and howe they doo +prouide themselues of fish for all the yeare.</p> + +<p>There is in this kingdome a great number of shippes and barkes, with the +which they sayle all a long their coastes, and vnto ilandes neere hande, and +into their riuers, the which doo runne cleane through the most part of all their +prouinces: and there dwelleth so much people vpon these riuers in shippes and +barkes, that it seemeth to be some great citie; there is so many of them that +they do esteeme that there is almost as many people that dwell vpon the water as +vpon the lande.</p> +<p>They make them slightly and with small cost, for they haue in all partes of +this countrie great aboundance of tymber, iron, and other thinges necessarie for +this vse: but in especiall a kinde of glew, wherewith they doo dawbe and trimme +their shippes, that is much more tougher and stronger then the pitch which wee +vse, which after it is layde on, sticketh fast and maketh their shipping as +harde as stones; the aboundance whereof, and the great number of ship-wrightes, +and againe for that there is not on the lande roome enough for the people to +inhabite, being so many in number, causeth them to build so great a number of +shippes and barkes. They vse their shippes and barkes of many fashions, euery +one hath his proper name. Such ships as they haue to saile long voiages be +called Iuncos, but for the warre they make huge and mightie vessels, with high +castles, both on<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span> +the prowe and sterne, much after the fashion of them that come out of the +Easterne Seas, and vnto those with which the Portingales sayle into the East +India. They haue these in so great number, y<sup>t</sup> a generall may ioine +together in 4 dayes an armie of more than 600. Those which they do commonly vse +for burden and to lade, are much after y<sup>e</sup> same fashion and greatnes, +and smal difference there is betweene them, but that they are lower both before +and at the sterne. There is an other sort of lesser vessels, and are much like +vnto pinases, and haue foure great ores on ech side, whereat row sixe men at +euery ore and foure at the least. These are excellent good to rowe in and out +ouer their bard hauens, or into any place where is litle water: they do call +them Bancoens. There is an other sort that is more brode than these, which they +call Lanteas, and carie eight ores on a side, with sixe men at euerie ore. Of +these two last sorts of vessels pirates and rouers at the sea do commonly vse +(for in those seas there be very many), for that they be very nimble to fly and +to giue assalt as occasion doth serue. They haue an other sort of vessels y<sup>t</sup> +are long, like vnto a galley, but more square, being very brode and neede little +water: they do vse them likewise to transport merchandise from one place to an +other: they are swift and run vp the riuers with smal force of the armes. Many +other sorts of barks they haue, besides the aforesaid, some with galleries and +windows painted and gylt, but chiefely those which the uiceroyes and gouernours +doo make for their recreation. Of those sortes of shipping afore sayd, which +they call Iuncos, the king hath in al his prouinces great armies, and in them +souldiers with their captaines to defend the coastes, that as well all ships of +their owne countrie, as those that doo come from other places to traficke with +them, may goe and come in safetie, and not bee spoyled and robbed of the roauers +that be there abouts. In the riuers there are pynases well equipped appointed +for the same purpose. And the king doth out of his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span> +rentes pay all these ordinarie souldiers, and that with great liberalitie.</p> +<p>The pitch wherewith they doo trimme their shippes (as we haue sayde) is +founde in that kingdome in great aboundance; it is called in their language +Iapez, and is made of lyme, oyle of fish, and a paste which they call Vname:<a name="FNanchor_131_131" id="FNanchor_131_131"></a><a href="#Footnote_131_131" class="fnanchor">[131]</a> +it is verie strong and suffereth no wormes, which is the occasion that one of +their shippes dooth twise out last one of ours: yet dooth it hinder much their +sayling. The pumpes which they haue in their shippes are much differing from +ours, and are farre better: thay make them of many peeces, with a wheele to draw +water, which wheele is set along the shippes sides within, wherewith they do +easily clense their shippes, for that one man alone going in the wheele, doth in +a quarter of an houre cleanse a great shippe, although she leake verie much.</p> +<p>Many men be borne and brought vp in these shippes and barkes (as is +aforesayde), and neuer in all their liues haue beene on lande, and doo knowe +none other occupation wherewith to liue, but that which they doo inherite of +their fathers, which is, to goe in one of these shippes or barkes, carrying and +recarrying of merchandise from place to place, or to ferrie people ouer the +riuers. They haue in them their wiues and their children, and haue like +neighborhood amongst them on the riuers as in their cities and townes, of whom +they stand in little need, for they do bring vp within their ships all things +necessarie for their sustenance, as hens, duckes, pigeons, and other foules good +to be eaten: and if they do lacke any thing, they haue it in victualing houses +and shops, which they haue amongst them on the same riuers in great abundance: +and of other superfluous thinges such as may bee founde in a citie, they are +well furnished: as of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span> +many sorts of silkes, amber, and muske, and other things more curious then +needefull. They haue also in their shippes, pots with little orange trees and +other fruits, and gardins with flowers, and other herbes for their recreation, +and in the wide shippes pooles of water, wherein they haue great store of fish +aliue, and yet doo dayly fishe for more with nettes. This kingdome is the best +prouided of fish of any that is knowen, by reason of the great number of these +barkes, as also because they haue many fisher men at sea and in the riuers, that +continually fish with nettes and other engines for the same purpose: and doo +carrie the same fishe (in infinite number) aliue into their pooles fiue hundreth +leagues vp into the lande by the riuers, which they doo with great ease in +shifting the water euerie day, and doo feede them with thinges fit for the +nature of the fish.</p> +<p>The chiefe and principallest time of fishing in this countrie, is in three +monethes of the yeare, which is Februarie, March, and Aprill, at such times as +are the spring tides, which do bring the fish out of the mayne sea into the +riuers, and there they do spawne and leaue their young: then these fisher men, +who doo liue by that facultie, doo take them and put them into their pondes, and +feede and nourish them in the ships till they come to bignesse to be solde.</p> +<p>Unto these fishermen repayre many barkes from diuerse partes of the countrie +to buye their fishe, and doo bringe with them wicker baskets lyned with a +certaine thicke paper for that purpose, and annoynted with oyle, so that the +water can not goe out: wherein they doo put their fish, and do shift them euerie +day, and feede them as aforesaide. All people doo buye of this fish, although +they bee verie small and leane, and doo put them in their pondes which euerie +one hath in his house (as common vse in all that countrie is), whereas in a +small time they waxe great, fitte to be eaten. They doo feede them with a paste +made of cowes doung, buffes doung, and pigins doong.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span></p> +<p>Likewise they doo throwe of these small fishes into the mootes of their +cities, which is the occasion that they are so full of fish. But all that breede +in them do appertaine vnto the gouernors or iudges of the cities, so that none +without their expresse commandement dare fish for them. These gouernors and +iudges doo vse much to recreate themselues vppon the riuers, and haue for the +same purpose barkes made close, and chambers in them verie curiously wrought, +with windowes and galleries likewise hanged with rich clothes, and many other +thinges for their contentment and pleasure.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XXII.</p> +<p class="intro">A curious order that these Chinos haue to bring vp ducks in great +abundance, and with small cost: and of a pleasant and ingenious order of fishing +which they vse.</p> + +<p>The great number of people that is in this countrie, and not permitting any +idle people to liue therein, is the occasion that it doth stirre vp the wits of +poore men (being constrained thereunto by necessitie, the inuenter of manye +thinges) to seeke new inuentions to get their liuing, to relieue and supply +their necessities. So that many of this kingdome, seeing the whole countrie so +throughly inhabited and tilled, that there is not one foote without an owner, +they do take them vnto the riuers (which are verie great), and there they do +make their dwellinges in ships and barkes (as is aforesaide), where they have +their whole families vnder borde to defende them from the sunne and rayne, and +inclinations of the heauens. There they do vse the occupation that they do +knowe, or that which they did inherite of their father, and many misteries to +liue by, verie strange: whereof the most principall<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span> +is to bring vp in some of their barkes so great quantitie of duckes, that they +sustaine a great part of the countrey therewith; and the vse thereof is as +followeth.</p> +<p>They haue cages made of canes so bigge as the vpper most holde of the barke, +in the which may be foure thousand duckes at once. They haue in certaine places +of these cages made nestes, where these duckes do almost euery day laye egges, +the which they take: and if it be in the sommer, they doo put them in buffes +doong, or in the doong of those duckes, which is verie warme, where they leaue +them so many dayes as experience hath taught them that they will come foorth. +Then they doo take them out of the doong, and do breake them one by one, and +take a little ducklin, the which they do with so great cunning that almost none +of them doth perish, which is y<sup>t</sup> which causeth great admiration vnto +some that go to see it: although they bee but few, for that it is an auncient +custome vsed for long time in that countrie. And for to haue the fruition of +this benefite all the yeare, in the winter they must vse an artificiall helpe: +to giue a little warmenes vnto the doong for the bringing forth of their egs, +they do vse then an other inuention as ingenious as the first, and that is this: +they take a great number of canes tied one by another, whereon they do laye the +doong, then vppon that they doo lay their egges, and do couer them verie well +with the same: this being done, they put vnder the canes straw, or some other +like thing, and set it on fire, but in such sort that it dooth not burne, but +keepeth a naturall heat all the time, till they thinke that they are readie to +be taken out. Then doo they take and breake them, as aforesaide, so that their +pultrie dooth increase in such number as though they were antes. Then doo they +put them into an other cage for the same purpose, wheras be old duckes brought +vp for no other purpose but to couer the little ones vnder their winges and +keepe them warme: and there they doo feede them euery day, till such time as<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span> +they can feede themselues, and go abroad into the fieldes to profit themselues +in the companie of the olde duckes. Many times they haue in number aboue twentie +thousand, yet do they maintain them with a small cost, and it is in this order: +euery morning they do giue them a small quantitie of boyled rice, then do they +open a doore of the cage, which is towardes the riuer, and doo put a bridge of +canes that doth reach vnto the water: then doo they come foorth with so great +haste one vpon an other, that it is a pastime to see them. All the day after +they do passe the time vpon the water, and in the fieldes of rice vpon the land, +wheras they do feede: the owners of the rice doo giue vnto the owners of the +duckes somewhat to let their duckes go into their fields, for that they do +destroy all the grasse and other weeds in it, and hurt nothing of the rice.</p> +<p>When that the euening draweth on, then they of the barke do make a sound with +a taber or such like, y<sup>e</sup> which being heard of his duckes, they throwe +themselues with great speede into the water, and swimme straight vnto their owne +barke, whereas their bridge is readie put for them; and euerie flocke doth know +his owne barke by the sounde, without missing at any time, although there be +many flockes together. For euerie barke doth vse a different sound the one from +the other, to the which the duckes are vsed, and their ears full thereof, so +that they neuer fayle their owne barke.</p> +<p>This manner of liuing is greatly vsed in all that countrie, and verie +profitable, for that it is a victuall most vsed amongst them, and is esteemed as +a thing of great sustentation and of small price, by reason that at al times +there is breeding of them and of small cost.</p> +<p>Likewise in this country they do vse a kinde of fishing, that is of no lesse +industrie then the bringing vppe of these duckes, and a thing to be scene. The +king hath in euerie citie founded vppon the riuers, houses wherein euerie yeare<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span> +is brought vp many cormorantes or sea rauens, with whome they doo fishe in those +monethes that the fish dooth spawne, and that is in this maner following. They +take the cormorantes out of their cages, and carrie them vnto the riuer side, +whereas they haue many barkes ordeyned for their fishing, and they are halfe +full of water. Then they take their cormorantes, and with a corde they do binde +their mawes, in such sort that no fish can fall into it: then they do cast them +into the riuer to fish, the which they do with such good will and couetousnesse, +that it is a woonder to see; they throwe themselues into the water with great +swiftnesse, and diue, whereas they do fill their throate with fish. Then they +come foorth, and with the like hast they go vnto the barkes that are halfe ful +of water, and the fish which they have taken they put in that water, which is +put there for that purpose, that the fish may not die; the which being done, +they returne againe vnto their fishing as they did before.</p> +<p>In this order they do indure their fishing foure houres together, in such +sort that the one doth not trouble the other; and when y<sup>t</sup> their +boates with water are ful of fish, then do they vnbind them, and turne them +againe into the riuer for to fish for themselues, for they haue neede thereof, +for that alwayes the day before that they will fish they keepe them from their +ordinarie victualles, which is a litle <i>millio</i>, that they may y<sup>e</sup> +better do their office. So after a while that they haue filled their bellies and +recreated themselues, they take them out of the water and carrie them vnto the +ordinarie places, whereas they are kept; and euerie third day during the time of +this fishing, they do take them forth for the same exercise, which for them is +so great pastime, that they would it should indure all the yeare.</p> +<p>In these three monethes they do take so much fish, that they do prouide the +whole kingdome for all the yeare; as in the chapter past it hath beene tolde +you, which is the occasion that they are as well prouided of fish as of any +other<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span> +thing: so that, if they please, they may eate euerie day fresh fish, although +they are farre from the sea.</p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XXIII.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the curtesie that the king of this mightie kingdome doth vnto the +ambassadors that come to him from anie other king, prince, or comonaltie.</p> + +<p>We should in the chapter following intreate of the ambassage that king Philip +of Spaine, with the Christian zeale that he had, to sende vnto the king of this +kingdome, who being mooued by certaine causes and reasons, did referre it till a +better occasion, and we do beleeue that it will be offered shortly. Therefore +now it shall not be from our purpose to declare in this chapter the honour and +curtesie that this king doth vnto the ambassadours of kings, princes, or any +other prouince, that doth come vnto him, in what sort soeuer it be; and for that +it is of great curiositie, it shall be necessarie to declare it with the +circumstance wherewith it is done.</p> +<p>All such as doo enter into this kingdome, with the title of ambassadour, be +it from a king that is a friend or enemie, they are respected, intreated, and +made of, with so great care and diligence, as though they came themselues in +person that doo send them. Unto whome, besides the obseruing the law of nations, +which is obserued and kept among all kings in the worlde, in especiall that +their persons shall not receiue neither incurre any danger, although their +ambassage bringeth discontent or harme vnto the king; besides all the which, +there is granted vnto them great and particular priuiledges. When that he doth +enter into the kingdome, by any of the prouinces whatsoeuer, the iudge or +gouernor of the first towne dooth in person go forth to meete and receiue him, +and giue him his welcome, with great complement of words<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span> +and ceremonies. All the loytias, captaines, souldiers, and the inhabitants of +the towne, doo accompanie the iudge or gouernour, when that they go to receiue +him. But at his disembarking to come a shore, they will not suffer him to set +his feete vppon the ground (although it be but a little way that he should go), +but hath at the waters side in a readinesse eight men, with a chaire made of +yuorie, or of some other pretious thing, with the curteines of ueluet, damaske, +or cloth of golde: which for the like oportunitie, they haue in euerie cittie or +principall towne appointed by the king, wherein they do carrie him to his +lodging. Likewise they haue in euerie citie and great towne throughout all the +kingdome, a principall house, and sufficient for to lodge such like personages. +It is also vsed to lodge such iudges as are sent by the king to execute his +commandement, when they passe by anie of such cities or townes. There is in +euery one of these houses a lieutenant, and he hath in it maruellous and +excellent household stuffe, as hangings, beddes, seruants, and all other +necessaries, not only to lodge one ambassador, but many, if they should there +meete, and not one to disturbe another. So as aforesaide, they doo beare him +company (either on horsebacke, or in a chaire, which is the ordinarie carriage +amongst them) till hee come vnto this house, whereas they do leave him with much +curtesie and many ceremonies, alonelie with them that waite vppon him and serue +him. And also a captaine with a thousand or two thousande souldiers for to garde +him continuallie, and to beare him companie till hee returne againe out of the +kingdome.</p> +<p>Then the next day following, the iudge or gouernour that did receiue him +dooth go and visite him. And after that they haue demanded of him such ordinarie +thinges as is vsed in such like visitations, then doo they learne of his estate, +and of the prince that hath sent him, and in summe, the effect of his comming +and ambassage: then doo they straightways at the houre dispatch a post vnto the +gouernour or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span> +vizroy of the prouince, who is alwayes resident in the chiefe or metropolitan +citie thereof, and hee at the same instant dooth dispatch another post with that +message vnto the king and his counsel. And he dooth sende order vnto the +ambassador, either to stay, or a safe conduct for him to go vnto the place +whereas hee is. Likewise hee sendeth order vnto the iudge, how hee shall +intreate that ambassador, which is giuen according vnto the relation sent him, +wherein he did vnderstande the state of the king and prince that sent him. +Likewise the number of souldiers y<sup>t</sup> shall beare him companie, and of +all other thinges needefull for him in his iourney: all the which is set downe +in order, and in particular, as what they shall giue euery man to eate for him +and his seruants, and in what townes, and howe hee shall be lodged. His safe +conduct is brought him, written vppon a whited table (after the fashion as we +haue tolde you heere before in manie places), and is with great letters, wherein +is contained from what king that ambassador is sent. This table is borne alwayes +before him, wheresoeuer hee dooth go. But that pasport, which is sent him +afterwards from the royall councell, with facultie, that hee may go vnto the +court, is after another sort: for that it is written in parchment and gallantlie +lymned, and with the kings seale of golde hanging at it, which is neuer giuen +but at such like occasion, or for some prouision giuen to a vizroy.</p> +<p>Looke what is spent vppon this ambassadour in all his iourney, and vppon them +that doo beare him companie for all necessaries, is vppon the kings cost and +charges, and is paide by the kinges treasurers in euerie place whereas they doo +go. Generallie in all partes, they doo make him great feastes and banquets, with +pastimes and presents, that day that hee dooth enter into the cittie of Taibin +or Paquin, whereas the king is.</p> +<p>There goeth foorth to meete him without the citie, all the gentlemen of the +court, with the royall councel and president,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span> +who, according vnto the saying of the Chinos, goeth forth with little lesse +maiestie and companie than the king: who, if the ambassadour be from a king that +is mightie, they giue him the right hand, if not they giue him the left hand: +and in this sort they go, ether talking with himselfe, or, by interpreters, +demaunding of him of his health, and of his trauail in comming, and other +thinges, till hee come into the court of the pallace, whereas he is lodged; and +there they doo leaue him, with some to beare him companie, and hee dooth returne +vnto his house with all this company aforesaid. But when they do depart from +him, they doo giue him power in the name of the king, to make a certaine number +of loytias, and to set at libertie a certaine number of prisoners, such as are +condemned to die, and other good deeds particular.</p> +<p>Those that doo enter in this kingdome with the title of an ambassador, they +cannot do him any griefe, for anie delight or euill that he doth, although they +can make good proofe thereof. And for that it is of a truth, you shall +vnderstande the proofe by experience. There was sent vnto this king, one +Bartholomew Perez, a Portugall, and his company, by order of the vizroy of the +India, with an ambassage from the king Don Manuel of Portugall, and they were +accused before the vizroy of the prouince of Canton, by the ambassadors of the +king of Malaca, that were there present, who were bounde vnto the court to treat +of matters of their king; they did testifie that the ambassage that the +Portugall did bring was false, and they were spies sent from the vizroy of the +India for to view the fortresses of the citie, that they might come afterwards +and take it, as they had done in many places of the India: they perseuering +still in the euill and mischieuous intent, did will the vizroy to apprehend +them, and to punish them as such spies did deserue, offering themselues to giue +good information for the same.</p> +<p>Who, after that he had well considered thereof, and consulted<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span> +with the loytias of the citie, and with his counsailors, they commanded that +they should be apprehended and put in straite prison, whereas their declarations +were taken with great care, deceit, and pollicie: and by reason that in them +they found contrarieties: some for feare confessed much more then that which was +demanded, and other saide that it was of truth; so that by their confessions, +according vnto the lawes of the countrie, they were condemned to die, and sent +their iudgment vnto the roiall councell for to confirme the same, with intent +and great desire for to execute the same. The which being seene by the roiall +councell, and considering with what title they entred into that kingdome, did +not onely make voide the sentence and would not confirme the same, but did send +commandement vnto the vizroy to set them at libertie, and to returne freely back +againe vnto the India from whence they came, and that hee shoulde furnish them +with all things necessarie in aboundance, til they were entred into the same, +although in this time the ambassadors of the king of Malaca, who were in the +court, did still perseuer in their malicious intent.</p> +<p>In which commandement, although it were true all that which the foresaide +ambassadors did testifie, and that they for feare of death did confesse it, yet +it is sufficient that they entred into his kingdom with the title of ambassador, +whereby they should receiue any harme. But now let vs returne to our purpose. So +after this ambassador hath refreshed himselfe of his iourny, and receiued many +banquets and orations of the gentlemen of the court: vpon a day appointed he +goeth to speake with the king, accompanied with all the gentlemen of the court, +and with the president of the councell, who doth giue him audience in one of the +three rich hals aforesaide, at all times as his businesse doth require. So when +that all his busines is dispatched and gratified with many gifts, he returneth +backe againe from whence he came; and looke with what curtesie they did receiue +him at his comming, the like they doo vnto him at his returne.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span></p> +<p>But if an ambassador doo come from any common wealth of the said kingdome, +they do not giue him the intertainement abouesaid, but cleane contrarie +thereunto, for that he dooth enter into the citie, accompanied onely with the +iustice, whose charge it is to lodge him in such houses as the king hath +ordeined to the same effect, and to giue him all that is necessarie, takeing of +him the summe and effect wherefore he doth come: and he doth giue relation +thereof vnto the president of the councell, and the president doth giue the king +to vnderstand therof: then doo they appoint the day of audience, with this +condition, that when he dooth go thither, hee must go on foote, or else on horse +back without a bridle, with onely a halter on his horse head, in token of +humility, and acknowledging to be a subject. The day of his audience, he commeth +forth obseruing the order and condition aforesaid, accompanyed with the iustice. +And when hee doth come into a great place, which is right against the pallace of +the king, he staieth there till an officer of the king doth come vnto him (who +is master of the ceremonies), and hee dooth cause him to proceede forwards, and +dooth shew him the place whereas hee must first kneele downe, with his handes +ioyned togither in token of adoration or worship: and all the time of this +ceremonie, his eis must bee fixed on that part where as they say the king is. In +this sort hee goeth onwards his way, making in it other fine adorations like +vnto the first, vntill such time as he do come into the first hall of the +pallace, which is at the staires heade, whereas the president is set with great +majestie, and doth represent the kings person: who after that hee hath hearde +the effect of his ambassage, dooth sende them away without answering one word at +that time; but after that hee hath giuen the king to vnderstande, hee dooth +sende him answere by that iustice, who hath the charge to lodge him, and to +prouide him of all things necessarie for the time that hee is in the court.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span></p> + +<hr class="l15" /> +<p class="chapter">CHAP. XXIV.</p> +<p class="intro">Of the ambassage that the king of Spaine did send vnto the king of this +kingdome, and the occasions that did mooue him therevnto, as also wherefore it +was declared.</p> + +<p>For to conclude this small historie, in the which I haue declared, in summe, +all such things as I haue vnderstoode of this kingdome of <i>China</i> vnto +this, I meane such as I might wel set forth, leauing a great number more, of the +which I haue particular note: some for that they are vnknowne, and others for +that they will cause admyration because they haue not beene seene. And according +vnto the counsell of the wise, they should not be intreated of, vntill that time +that experience dooth make them more credible. And againe, I doo hold it for a +lesse euill, to be reprehended for breuitie (as some haue beene), then to bee +prolix and tedious in the declaring, although it bee hurtfull vnto this worke, +from the which I doo take away much that I might put in. Nowe letting all passe, +I will in this last chapter declare of the letter present, and ambassage, +wherewith the king of Spaine did sende mee in the yeare of our Lorde one +thousande one hundred and foure-score: for that in company of other religious +men of my order, I should passe from his mightie kingdome of Mexico to China, +and to present it vnto the king of that countrie in his name: of all the which I +will declare that which I doo vnderstande and know, not exceeding the limits of +fidelitie, by reason that the ambassage was not ended, nor no conclusion in +effect of that which was pretended, but doo hope in the deuine maiestie, and +with the care and diligence that is put therein by the king of Spaine, shortlie +to haue a conclusion of that they desire, for the which the letter and the rest +was sent.</p> +<p>Beeing considered of by the Spaniards (such as were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span> +dwellers in the Ilands Phillippinas, which by another name are called the Ilands +of the Ponent or West) the thinges of great valour and riches, as of golde and +silkes and many other thinges which is brought from the kingdome of China, and +out of their ports, and how those which brought it did sel it for a small +quantitie in respect as they did esteeme it, and being certified by the saide +Chinos of many other things which were in the firme land, wherof some of them +haue beene made mention in this historie: being mooued with the conuerting of +these soules, and with the profite that might come of trafike that they might +haue with the Chinos, it was concluded by the gouernour and principals of the +citie of Manila, with the iudgement of the prouinciall of the order of Saint +Augustine, and of many other religious men that were both graue and wise, such +as were the first, that in those parts did preach the Gospell, and did baptize a +great number of the dwellers therein, and did many other thinges, of the which I +might say much, if it were to my purpose, and that my part were not therein: so +that I say it was concluded amongst them to sende vnto the Catholike king graue +personages, vnto whome intire credite might be giuen, for to giue relation what +they vnderstoode of that kingdome, and also of the euident necessitie (that all +those ilands that were his) had for their conseruation to holde to friendes the +Chinos their borderers, whereof might growe vnto them great benefites and +profites: and likewise to request him (if it were his pleasure) to sende an +ambassador to the king of that kingdome, the better to confirme their +friendship, and to carrie with him some things which he vsed in his countrie, +which would be maruellous well esteemed of the Chinos, and be a way vnto the +preaching of the Gospel, and bee a beginning that a farther contraction may +growe betwixt the Christians and Chinos, of the which shall follow the aforesaid +profite vnto other countries, by the great quantitie of things, as well of +riches as of other curiosities that shalbe brought from<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span> +thence. After they had well considered with great deliberation, who should be +the person that they shoulde send vpon so long a iourney, for to request his +maiestie of the aforesaid: in the ende they did agree vppon for to desire the +prouinciall of the Augustine friers, who was called Frier Dilho de Herrera, a +man of great learning and of great experience touching matters of those ilands, +for that hee was one of the first discouerers of them: they requested him for +the loue of God and the good seruice to his maiestie, and the benefite that +might come thereby vnto these ilands, that he would take vpon him to go with +this petition, for they were fully perswaded for that he had trauailed so manie +places of those ilands, as also for his office and vocation, there was none that +better coulde put in effect their desire, and perswade with his maiestie the +great importance of that ambassage: and manie other things necessarie touching +the gouernement of those ilands. This determination was liked well of them all, +and that they had chosen well in sending of the prouinciall, who incontinent +departed from the ilands in a shippe that was prepared for Noua Hispania, which +was in the yeare of Christ 1573. At his imbarking, hee was accompanied with the +gouernour, and all those of that citie, of whom hee was maruellouslie well +beloued for his holinesse and good condition. Desiring him with all diligence to +procure to returne, with as much breuitie as was possible, vnto those ilands, +whereas they so much loued him, and had neede of his presence.</p> +<p>He did promise them to make all the speede possible, and in paiment of the +trauel that he did take vpon him, for the benefite and profite, he requested +them al that they would pray vnto God to giue a good voyage: they promised him +to doo it, the which they did performe with particular care. Then did the master +command to weigh ankers, and to set saile, which was in the moneth of Nouember +the same yeare: and with reasonable wether they arriued at the new Spaine,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span> +and came vnto the cittie of Mexico, and from thence they went and embarked +themselues in the North Seas; who with prosperous winds the 13 day of August, +the yeare following, they ariued in San Lucar Debarameda, in Spaine, and caried +me in his company. From thence, the day following, we departed from Syuel, from +whence wee departed forthwith toward Madrid, whereas his maiestie was at that +present, and we came thither the fifteenth day of September in anno 1574, the +same weeke that they had newes of the losse of the Goleta.<a name="FNanchor_132_132" id="FNanchor_132_132"></a><a href="#Footnote_132_132" class="fnanchor">[132]</a> +Wee went straightwayes to kisse the kings hands, and caried the letters which we +brought from his gouernor and citie: by whom both we and the letters were +receiued with his accustomed benignitie, and did heare the petition with great +satisfaction, for that the desire was holy and profitable, and told vs that he +would command his counsell to vnderstand in the same with a particular +consideration, and with so much breuitie as the thing required: and gaue vs +thankes for the great trauell and long iourney which we tooke vpon vs in his +seruice, for to giue him notice of the discouering of this great kingdome, and +of other things touching the Ilands Philippinas. He straightwayes commanded that +we should be prouided for of all things necessarie for our sustentation for the +time that we should there remaine, and that we should go and giue account of all +things (for the which we came thither) vnto the counsel of the Indies, who was +Don Iuan de Obando, vnto whom his maiestie did recommend the consideration to be +done with great care, and to consult vpon the same. After that they had comuned +with the roiall counsell of the Indies touching that which should be requisite +and conuenient, which was done as it appeared in effect, for that they gaue vs +facultie in a few dayes after of all things that was requested from the said +ilands, except that which did touch the ambassage vnto<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span> +the king of China, as a thing of greater importance, and requested longer time +to consider of the same: so that they did referre it till they had a better +occasion. So that with this resolution and with fortie religious men, and manie +commissions from his maiestie touching the good gouernement of that new +kingdome, wee departed from Syuell in the moneth of Ianuarie, the yeare +following, in 1575, whereas I remained by his order and for certaine respects. +But the aforesaid prouinciall did imbarke himselfe with his fortie religious +persons, and departed in the moneth of Iuly with a faire winde and merrie +passage, till they came vnto Newe Spaine, and from thence into the South Sea, +vntill they came in sight of the ilands: whereas the wether did alter, and they +were forced by the furie thereof to ariue at an iland inhabited with Gentiles, +by whome they were all slaine, and none escaped but onely an Indian natural of +the ilands, which wee carried from thence in our companie for Spaine. He +afterwards came vnto Manilla, and gaue them to vnderstand how they were all +slaine, and how the Gentiles did teare all the papers and commissions in peeces, +and of all that happened to them.</p> +<p>This beeing knowne by the gouernor, and by the rest that dwelt in the ilands +(after that they had done the rytes, with the funerall griefes, as iustice +required in such a case), they finding themselues in the same necessitie that +before they were in by reason of the losse of the aforesaid prouinciall and his +companions, and also of the letters and prouisions sent from his maiestie, they +forthwith in the same determination did write newe letters, in requesting that +which in part the king had granted (although they had no knowledge thereof); +they did also therein write touching the ambassage that they did request for the +king of China, adding thereunto new occasions, wherby they should be moued to do +them so much fauour as to send the ambassador afore requested, which was a thing +of great importance for all those<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span> +ilands. When that these letters came in conformitie with the others before sent, +the king did ordaine for gouernor of those ilands, a gentleman, who was called +Don Gonsalo de Mercado y Ronquillo, a man of great valor and discretion, one +that had serued the king as wel in the Peru as in Mexico with great fidelitie; +who vnderstanding the earnest request wherewith those of the ilands did aske the +ambassage, and how much it did import to haue it (as a man then elected for +gouernor of those ilands, and a matter that touched him very much), did put the +king and his counsell in memorie of the same: and in conclusion, they answered +that hee should foorthwith depart with the souldiers that were prouided for +those parts, for that it was conuenient so to be doone by reason of great +necessitie that they had of them in the said ilands; and as for the ambassage, +for that there was no such great necessitie nor haste, it should be intreated of +at more leasure, when that the counsell will aduertise themselues of al that +shalbe conuenient touching that matter, and that they would consult and confer +with his maiestie that he may, as the right owner of them, command that which +shuld be to the seruice of God and his benefite. So with this answere the said +gouernor departed.</p> +<p>It happened that in the moneth of August, in the yeare following, before that +this gouernor was ariued at the ilands, there came newe letters from thence of +supplications, requesting with greater instance, that which before at other +times they had requested, sending with their petition the whole relation of the +entrie of Frier Martin de Herreda, prouinciall of the Augustine friers and his +companions, into the kingdome of China, and of such things as they had seene and +heard of (as may be seene at large in the said declaration, which is in the +second parte of this booke). This being seene by his maiestie, he was resolued +to send the ambassage which so many times they haue requested; this chanced at +that time that he began to go vppon Portugall, a time of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span> +trouble, but yet a great token that it was the will of God, in whose hands (as +the wise man saith) are the hearts of kings. For the appointment of one for to +go on this ambassage, the king did remit it vnto his roial counsel of the +Indies, whose president was Don Antonio de Padilla y Meneses, who had +communicated with me diuers times, touching matters of that kingdome and of +Mexico, whereas I was alwayes resident euer since I was seuenteene yeares of +age, and by reason of matters that was committed vnto me out of that country, +was the occasion that I did vse to visit him the oftener: the which large +conuersation and the good wil that hee did beare me, did perswade him that I +could put in execution the ambassage of his maiestie, for that his will was that +some religious person should do it: and they being fully perswaded that my good +will and desire was for the saluation of those soules, and in all respects +willing to serue his maiestie: all the which, with the knowledge that I had of +that large nauigation,<a name="FNanchor_133_133" id="FNanchor_133_133"></a><a href="#Footnote_133_133" class="fnanchor">[133]</a> +and the qualitie of that countrie and people, was a great helpe to the +accomplishing in effect the will of his maiestie, and desire of those that dwelt +in Philippina.</p> +<p>So after this charge being committed vnto me, and his maiestie readie to +depart on his voiage for Portugal as aforesaid, he did remit my dispatch vnto +the lords of the royall counsell, who were at that time the Licenciado Gasca de +Salaçar, and Doctor Gomez de Santisteuan, the Licenciado Espadero, the +Licenciado Don Diego de Zuniga, the Doctor Vaillo, the Licenciado Eua, the +Licenciado Gedeon de Hinonsosa. By whose commandement I depart from the court +vnto Syuell, where as order was giuen that all such things should be prouided +that I should carrie vnto the king. Whereas I was procuring the same certaine +dayes, and for that they were many the which I should carrie, it was not<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span> +possible by any meanes that they should be made readie against the departure of +the fleete. Then the Licenciado Gasca de Salacar aforesaide, who was at that +present resident in the contractation house of Syuel, gaue his maiestie to +vnderstand thereof, who was at Badaioz occupied in matters touching the kingdome +of Portugal as aforesaid, and requested him to giue order what his pleasure was +to be done therein: who commanded that the fleete should depart, and that I +should stay till such time as all things were made and concluded that I shoulde +carrie with me for the king of China, as in ample manner as hee had commanded. +And when that all things were in good order, that they should cause a shippe or +galoon to bee made readie, wherein I should made my voyage, for to ouertake or +meete at the Newe Spaine such shippes as euerie yeare dooth depart for the +Ilands Philippinas, which is at Christmas time: this commandement was delayed +vntill the beginning of Lent, as well for that the thinges were manie that +shoulde bee made, and coulde not be dispatched in the time, as also for a +generall sicknesse that was amongst them in Spaine, called the cattarre or +murre. Then after that all thinges were in order, by the commandement of the +Licenciado Gasca, hee deliuered vnto me the kinges letter, and all other +thinges. The which, for that they were manie, and againe I haue beene tedious in +this chapter, I doo not declare it; for that the prudent lector may of himselfe +conceiue, if hee doo weigh the magnanimitie of the Catholike king that dooth +sende them, and the mightinesse and richnesse of him to whome it is sent, of the +which we haue declared enough in this small historie. I would I could +particularly declare it vnto you, as also the copie of the letter that his +maiestie did send vnto that Heathen or Gentile king, a thing worthie of the +author: but for that it came not to effect, neither had I anye licence of him +that all onelye might grant it: and againe, in place whereas I could not aske +it, therefore I dare not, for that I<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span> +will not excede the limits of fidelitie which I owe vnto my prince. But it is +sufficient that the letter and the present sent by his maiestie vnto the king of +that countrey was to no other intent, but to procure him and all his subiects to +acknowledge the true God, and to exhort them to receiue our Catholike faith, and +to giue them to vnderstand the error wherein they are, and how ignorant they are +of the knowledge of the true God, the creator of heauen and earth, and of all +the creatures of the world visible and invisible, Sauiour and redeemer of all +such as with a true knowledge doo beleeue in him and obey his holy lawe, +declared by his worde, and confirmed by his deuine tokens, and other thinges in +effect.</p> +<p>So being dispatched, I prosecuted my iourny, and order, till I came vnto the +kingdome of Mexico, whereas I found a certaine inconuenience touching a matter +needful in that voiage, whereof his maiestie, in the commission he gaue me, +willed me to be well aduertised, and, if it were needfull, to giue him notice +thereof before I did passe any farther.</p> +<p>The vizroy of that kingdome, who was the Earle of Couma,<a name="FNanchor_134_134" id="FNanchor_134_134"></a><a href="#Footnote_134_134" class="fnanchor">[134]</a> +thought it good that I shoulde returne vnto Lysborne, whereas the king was at +that instant, and to giue him to vnderstand of the difficultie that was found, +in a meeting that the vizroy had caused to bee made of the most grauest +personages of all that kingdome, about the prosecuting of that ambassage.</p> +<p>With this resolution, I departed from that kingdome, and returned to Spaine, +and left the present in Mexico, in the power of the kings officers, till such +time as order was giuen what should be done therewith.</p> +<p>I found his maiestie in Lisborne, whereas I did deliuer him the letters that +were written touching the same matter, and did declare vnto him my iudgement +touching the meeting aforesaid: who incontinent did take the charge vpon him to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span> +seeke occasion, for to put in effect his most Christian intent and zeale; the +which I doo beleeue he had procured, and will by al waies possible: and that +very shortly we shall see in that kingdome planted the Catholike faith, and +their false idolatrie banished. And I hope in God it will bee very shortly, for +that there be within that kingdome religious men, of the order of Saint +Augustine, and barefoote friers of Saint Francis, and of the order of Jesus, or +Jesuits, who are called there the fathers of Saint Paule: of whom there is +placed fiue or sixe in the citie of Xanquin, whereas the vizroy doth dwell, and +hath erected a couent in that citie ever since the year 1583, with a church, +whereas they doo say masse ordinarily. And it is said, of a truth, that they +haue got license of the saide vizroy for to passe freely thorough out all the +whole kingdome of China. But if it bee so, you must thinke that hee did it after +that he had consulted with the king, and doone by his authoritie: otherwise I am +perswaded he durst not grant any such license.</p> +<p>At this present dooth there go out of Spaine, by the order and commandement +of his maiestie and his royall counsell of the Indies, a companie of religious +men, of the order of Saint Dominicke, for to aid and helpe the rest that are +there to conclude this enterprise, from whom can proceed nothing but that which +tends to great effect, by reason of their great zeale and learning, and the +better if that they doo ioyne together in charitie as seruants to one Lord and +master, and as they which are bounde to doo all one worke. By which meanes, with +the fauour and helpe of Almightie God, putting to their diligence and industrie, +they shall easily conquest their hearts and good willes, and shall frustrate the +diuell from the possession that so long time he hath possessed in that kingdome, +and reduce them to their true Lord by creation and redemption. It will not bee a +small helpe, the manie and evident tokens which the Chinos doo giue of desire of +their saluation; for as it is said that they haue read in their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span> +bookes, that from the occident shall come the true and perfite law to direct +them to heaven, where they shalbe angels. And they, seeing that those religious +people which are come into their kingdome, doo come from the occident, they are +perswaded, without doubt, that the law that they doo declare vnto them is the +truth; by which meanes shall redowne vnto them great goodnesse. They are greatly +affectioned vnto the commandements of the Catholike faith, and vnto the +catechisme, which is translated into their language, and is abrode in manie +parts of that kingdome, which is the occasion (as the fathers of the companie +that are in the citie Xuquien dooth write) that many principal persons are +conuerted vnto the Catholike faith, and others, being holpen by the heauens, and +encited by the ensample of them, doo demande the holy baptisme, which is left +undone because they will not cause any vprore in the countrie. And againe, when +they shall better conceiue thereof, they may receiue it with more firme faith.</p> +<p>God, for his mercie, cause to go forwards, and with his diuine fauour, this +good worke, for his honour and glorie, and exalting his holy faith; and that so +great and infinite a number of soules, redeemed by his pretious blood, might be +saued, and to put in the hart of Christian kings to proceed forwards in that +which he hath begun: putting alwaies in their breasts a greater augmentation, to +the concluding of the same, and to put apart from him all such perswasions as +shoulde cause him to leaue it off, which the diuell will procure by all the +wayes and meanes that he may. But against God and his diuine will there is +neither power nor wisedome.</p> + +<p class="center p4">THE END OF THE FIRST PART.</p> +<hr class="l30 p6" /> +<h2>FOOTNOTES:</h2> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_1_1" id="Footnote_1_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_1_1"><span class="label"> +[1]</span></a> Purchas's <i>Pilgrimes</i>, vol. iii, p. 35, 36.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_2_2" id="Footnote_2_2"></a><a href="#FNanchor_2_2"><span class="label"> +[2]</span></a> Purchas's <i>Pilgrimes</i>, vol. iii, p. 5.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_3_3" id="Footnote_3_3"></a><a href="#FNanchor_3_3"><span class="label"> +[3]</span></a> Barros, dec. <span class="smcap">III</span>, liv. ii, cap. 6.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_4_4" id="Footnote_4_4"></a><a href="#FNanchor_4_4"><span class="label"> +[4]</span></a> ... Mui prospero em honra, e fazenda, cousas que poucas vezes +juntamente se conseguem, porque ha poucos homens que por sus trabalhos as +merecem pelo modo que Fernão Peres naquellas partes as ganhava. Barros, dec. <span class="smcap"> +III</span>, liv. ii, cap. 8. Goes, p. iv, cap. 24. Osorius, lib. xi, p. 317 et +seq.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_5_5" id="Footnote_5_5"></a><a href="#FNanchor_5_5"><span class="label"> +[5]</span></a> Barros, dec. <span class="smcap">III</span>, liv. vi, cap. 2, has +further particulars concerning his regulations. Concerning his person and +manners the same author says: "Como era cavalleiro de sua pessoa, muy pomposo, +glorioso e gastador, todos suas obras eram com grande magestade, etc." In +Osorius (lib. xi, p. 319 <i>b</i>) he appears more faulty and blameworthy. +"... Andradii, viri sane fortis sed temerarii, et plurimum a mente fratris +abhorrentis ... deinde in tyrannidem erupit: rapuit quæ voluit, intulit vim +ingenuis virginibus, quibus voluit: multa præterea signa insiti furoris dedit."</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_6_6" id="Footnote_6_6"></a><a href="#FNanchor_6_6"><span class="label"> +[6]</span></a> For the elaboration of the route of the friars, rendered +difficult of solution by the changes in the form of names, the writer is +indebted to the kind assistance of his learned friend Dr. Neumann, professor of +Chinese in the University of Munich.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_7_7" id="Footnote_7_7"></a><a href="#FNanchor_7_7"><span class="label"> +[7]</span></a> Martin de Rada, otherwise called Herrada, for an account of whom +and his companions, see Introduction.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_8_8" id="Footnote_8_8"></a><a href="#FNanchor_8_8"><span class="label"> +[8]</span></a> Manilla.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_9_9" id="Footnote_9_9"></a><a href="#FNanchor_9_9"><span class="label"> +[9]</span></a> Cochinchina.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_10_10" id="Footnote_10_10"></a><a href="#FNanchor_10_10"><span class="label"> +[10]</span></a> Hainan.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_11_11" id="Footnote_11_11"></a><a href="#FNanchor_11_11"><span class="label"> +[11]</span></a> Birman Empire.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_12_12" id="Footnote_12_12"></a><a href="#FNanchor_12_12"><span class="label"> +[12]</span></a> Bernier, in his <i>Lettre à Colbert sur l'étendue de +l'Hindoustan</i>, describes the Patans as "peuples mahometans, sortis du costé +du Gange vers Bengale, qui avant l'invasion des Mogols dans les Indes avoient +sceu se rendre puissans dans plusieurs endroits, et principalement à Dehly et +faire plusieurs Rajas des environs leurs tributaires. Ces Patans ... haïssent +mortellement les Mogols, souvenans toujours de ce qu'ils ont été autrefois, +avant qu'ils les eussent chassez de leurs grandes principautez et les eussent +obligez de se retirer deça delà, loin de Dehly et Agra dans des montagnes où ils +se sont habituez."</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_13_13" id="Footnote_13_13"></a><a href="#FNanchor_13_13"><span class="label"> +[13]</span></a> Moguls.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_14_14" id="Footnote_14_14"></a><a href="#FNanchor_14_14"><span class="label"> +[14]</span></a> Capital.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_15_15" id="Footnote_15_15"></a><a href="#FNanchor_15_15"><span class="label"> +[15]</span></a> Samarcand.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_16_16" id="Footnote_16_16"></a><a href="#FNanchor_16_16"><span class="label"> +[16]</span></a> Loo Choos.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_17_17" id="Footnote_17_17"></a><a href="#FNanchor_17_17"><span class="label"> +[17]</span></a> Cleanness.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_18_18" id="Footnote_18_18"></a><a href="#FNanchor_18_18"><span class="label"> +[18]</span></a> Germans.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_19_19" id="Footnote_19_19"></a><a href="#FNanchor_19_19"><span class="label"> +[19]</span></a> See note, page 7.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_20_20" id="Footnote_20_20"></a><a href="#FNanchor_20_20"><span class="label"> +[20]</span></a> Dimocarpus leechee.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_21_21" id="Footnote_21_21"></a><a href="#FNanchor_21_21"><span class="label"> +[21]</span></a> From fanega, <i>Span.</i> A measure for grain, varying in +capacity in different parts of Spain and Portugal. It contains on an average one +and three-fifths of an English bushel.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_22_22" id="Footnote_22_22"></a><a href="#FNanchor_22_22"><span class="label"> +[22]</span></a> Panic-grass.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_23_23" id="Footnote_23_23"></a><a href="#FNanchor_23_23"><span class="label"> +[23]</span></a> Martas zibellinas-sables.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_24_24" id="Footnote_24_24"></a><a href="#FNanchor_24_24"><span class="label"> +[24]</span></a> The Spanish <i>Cuarto</i> equals four maravedis, and is of +about the same value as a French sou, or something less than an English +halfpenny.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_25_25" id="Footnote_25_25"></a><a href="#FNanchor_25_25"><span class="label"> +[25]</span></a> Misspelt for Cansi. Probably Sin-gan-fu, capital of the province +of Chen-sy is here referred to.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_26_26" id="Footnote_26_26"></a><a href="#FNanchor_26_26"><span class="label"> +[26]</span></a> Misspelt for Taybinco, meaning Ta-Bing-kwo, the kingdom under +the great Bing (Ming) dynasty.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_27_27" id="Footnote_27_27"></a><a href="#FNanchor_27_27"><span class="label"> +[27]</span></a> Query li.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_28_28" id="Footnote_28_28"></a><a href="#FNanchor_28_28"><span class="label"> +[28]</span></a> Misspelt for Malacca. This sentence shows Olam to be Yun-nan.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_29_29" id="Footnote_29_29"></a><a href="#FNanchor_29_29"><span class="label"> +[29]</span></a> After a careful collation of the following illspelt and vague +enumeration of the provinces of China with those given by Semedo, Heningius, +Heylyn, and in a very early map of the country, as well as with some elucidatory +passages in the text, the following explanations are offered as to their +respective significations. The Paguia here mentioned is evidently Pe-che-lie.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_30_30" id="Footnote_30_30"></a><a href="#FNanchor_30_30"><span class="label"> +[30]</span></a> Fo-kien.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_31_31" id="Footnote_31_31"></a><a href="#FNanchor_31_31"><span class="label"> +[31]</span></a> Yun-nan, see note page 21.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_32_32" id="Footnote_32_32"></a><a href="#FNanchor_32_32"><span class="label"> +[32]</span></a> Quang-see.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_33_33" id="Footnote_33_33"></a><a href="#FNanchor_33_33"><span class="label"> +[33]</span></a> Chen-sy.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_34_34" id="Footnote_34_34"></a><a href="#FNanchor_34_34"><span class="label"> +[34]</span></a> Chan-si.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_35_35" id="Footnote_35_35"></a><a href="#FNanchor_35_35"><span class="label"> +[35]</span></a> Kiang-see.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_36_36" id="Footnote_36_36"></a><a href="#FNanchor_36_36"><span class="label"> +[36]</span></a> Hou-quang.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_37_37" id="Footnote_37_37"></a><a href="#FNanchor_37_37"><span class="label"> +[37]</span></a> This name which is spelt in the same manner as that given in the +second volume to the city of Fo-cheu, would seem to mean the province of +Kiang-nan, as that province is not otherwise represented in the list.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_38_38" id="Footnote_38_38"></a><a href="#FNanchor_38_38"><span class="label"> +[38]</span></a> Ho-nan.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_39_39" id="Footnote_39_39"></a><a href="#FNanchor_39_39"><span class="label"> +[39]</span></a> Chan-tung.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_40_40" id="Footnote_40_40"></a><a href="#FNanchor_40_40"><span class="label"> +[40]</span></a> Koei-tcheou.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_41_41" id="Footnote_41_41"></a><a href="#FNanchor_41_41"><span class="label"> +[41]</span></a> Che-kiang.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_42_42" id="Footnote_42_42"></a><a href="#FNanchor_42_42"><span class="label"> +[42]</span></a> Se-tchuen.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_43_43" id="Footnote_43_43"></a><a href="#FNanchor_43_43"><span class="label"> +[43]</span></a> Evidently Canton, by comparison with the list in next chapter.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_44_44" id="Footnote_44_44"></a><a href="#FNanchor_44_44"><span class="label"> +[44]</span></a> Quinsay or King-sze, means "the capital."</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_45_45" id="Footnote_45_45"></a><a href="#FNanchor_45_45"><span class="label"> +[45]</span></a> Peking.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_46_46" id="Footnote_46_46"></a><a href="#FNanchor_46_46"><span class="label"> +[46]</span></a> Tay-ping-fu.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_47_47" id="Footnote_47_47"></a><a href="#FNanchor_47_47"><span class="label"> +[47]</span></a> One of the five ports opened to England by the treaty of Nanking +in 1842.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_48_48" id="Footnote_48_48"></a><a href="#FNanchor_48_48"><span class="label"> +[48]</span></a> Ho-chow, in the province of Shen-si.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_49_49" id="Footnote_49_49"></a><a href="#FNanchor_49_49"><span class="label"> +[49]</span></a> The Tartar province of Leao-tung, in which the wall commences, +has also the name of Quantonz: see Gutzlaff's Map of China and Biot's <i> +Dictionnaire des noms anciens et modernes des Villes, etc., dans l'Empire +Chinois, fo. 86.</i> From this it is evident that our +author is now considering the work in its course from east to west, and not from +west to east, as in the commencement of this paragraph.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_50_50" id="Footnote_50_50"></a><a href="#FNanchor_50_50"><span class="label"> +[50]</span></a> This is evidently Se-tchuen, as given in p. 22; for although it +is not strictly correct to say that the great wall terminates in Se-tchuen, yet +that province borders on the ancient province of Shen-si sufficiently near to +justify the conclusion that it is here referred to, the whole of the +geographical information gained by the writers at this early period being +necessarily but vague and indefinite.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_51_51" id="Footnote_51_51"></a><a href="#FNanchor_51_51"><span class="label"> +[51]</span></a> <i>Sic</i>, hot.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_52_52" id="Footnote_52_52"></a><a href="#FNanchor_52_52"><span class="label"> +[52]</span></a> Germans.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_53_53" id="Footnote_53_53"></a><a href="#FNanchor_53_53"><span class="label"> +[53]</span></a> A mis-print for Barbosa. Duarte Barbosa, or Barbessa, a native +of Lisbon, wrote in Portuguese an account of his travels in the south of Asia; +but according to Antonio, they have only appeared in type in an Italian +translation. An abridgement of his narrative is given in <i>Ramusio</i>, tom. +i, p. 288. Subsequently Barbosa accompanied Magellan in his voyage round the +world, and shared the melancholy fate of that great navigator in the Island of +Zebu in 1521.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_54_54" id="Footnote_54_54"></a><a href="#FNanchor_54_54"><span class="label"> +[54]</span></a> Mexico.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_55_55" id="Footnote_55_55"></a><a href="#FNanchor_55_55"><span class="label"> +[55]</span></a> <i>Saxii.</i>This has been +supposed to mean the province of Canton, the names of the other provinces having +been pretty well identified. The writer may have considered that the finest +porcelain was made at Canton, as it was usually exported from thence to Europe; +but the chief seat of the manufacture is, in fact, the province of <i>Kiang-see</i>.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_56_56" id="Footnote_56_56"></a><a href="#FNanchor_56_56"><span class="label"> +[56]</span></a> <i>Chincheou.</i> One of the chief districts of <i>Fokien</i>, +often named for the entire province.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_57_57" id="Footnote_57_57"></a><a href="#FNanchor_57_57"><span class="label"> +[57]</span></a> This and the following details of the striking similarity which +exists between the ceremonial of the Buddhist and Roman Catholic religions, are +verified by later travellers and resident missionaries, but there is no evidence +from history to show that the former derived these peculiarities from the +latter.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_58_58" id="Footnote_58_58"></a><a href="#FNanchor_58_58"><span class="label"> +[58]</span></a> The work here referred to was printed in black letter at Evora, +1569, 4to., under the title, "Tractado em que se contam muito por estenso as +cousas da China, con suas particularidades, y assi do regno dormuz."</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_59_59" id="Footnote_59_59"></a><a href="#FNanchor_59_59"><span class="label"> +[59]</span></a> <i>Laocon Izautey.</i> The following particulars evidently +relate, not to the Confucian or national religion of the Chinese, but to the +sect of the <i>Tao-sse.</i> Grosier tells us, that "the sect of the Tao-see +was founded by a philosopher named <i>Lao-kiun</i> or <i>Lao-Tse</i>, who +came into the world in the year 603 before the Christian era." Grosier's <i> +China</i>, vol. ii, p. 203. It is impossible to identify all the names given in +this legend of Chinese superstition. <i>Paosaos</i> (see next page) is +probably the same with <i>Poosah</i>, the name generally given to the Chinese +idols. The <i>Sichia</i>, who are said to have come from <i>Trautheyco</i>, +towards the west [Thibet? <i><a href="#Footnote_60_60">see note next page</a></i>], +are probably the disciples of the sect of <i>Foe</i>, also noticed by Grosier. +"This sect, still more pernicious and much wider diffused throughout China than +the preceding, came originally from India."—Vol. ii, p. 215. The description +here given of the <i>religious people</i> who <i>live without marrying</i> +and <i>wear no hair</i>, tallies exactly with the practice of the Bonzes or +priests of <i>Foe</i> of the present day.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_60_60" id="Footnote_60_60"></a><a href="#FNanchor_60_60"><span class="label"> +[60]</span></a> This would seem to be Kwan-she, the same as Kwan-yin, the +goddess of mercy of the votaries of Foe.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_61_61" id="Footnote_61_61"></a><a href="#FNanchor_61_61"><span class="label"> +[61]</span></a> This would appear to be Thibet (for there is no Chinese form +that we can recognize as corresponding with the word), and Thibet is the country +from which those points of belief are derived.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_62_62" id="Footnote_62_62"></a><a href="#FNanchor_62_62"><span class="label"> +[62]</span></a> This superstitious practice is described in much the same terms +by Grosier. "The commonest way is to burn perfumes before an idol, and to beat +the earth several times with the forehead. Upon the altar which supports this +idol, there is always a kind of horn, filled with small flat sticks, upon which +are traced a variety of unintelligible characters. Each of these small sticks +conceals an answer. The person who consults, lets fall, at random, one of these +small sticks, the inscription of which is explained by the Bonze who accompanies +him. When no Bonze is present, they have recourse to a paper fixed up to the +wall of the pagoda, to discover the enigmatical meaning of the word. This manner +of consulting is very common in China."—Grosier, vol. ii, p. 235.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_63_63" id="Footnote_63_63"></a><a href="#FNanchor_63_63"><span class="label"> +[63]</span></a> Pwan-koo, the Adam of the Chinese.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_64_64" id="Footnote_64_64"></a><a href="#FNanchor_64_64"><span class="label"> +[64]</span></a> Better known as Teen-Hwang.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_65_65" id="Footnote_65_65"></a><a href="#FNanchor_65_65"><span class="label"> +[65]</span></a> Also called Te Hwang.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_66_66" id="Footnote_66_66"></a><a href="#FNanchor_66_66"><span class="label"> +[66]</span></a> Also named Laoutsze.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_67_67" id="Footnote_67_67"></a><a href="#FNanchor_67_67"><span class="label"> +[67]</span></a> Also named Fuh-he-te.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_68_68" id="Footnote_68_68"></a><a href="#FNanchor_68_68"><span class="label"> +[68]</span></a> Also named Shin Nung.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_69_69" id="Footnote_69_69"></a><a href="#FNanchor_69_69"><span class="label"> +[69]</span></a> The Chinese pray <i>to</i> the dead, but the practice of +prayers <i>for</i> the dead and the doctrine of the creation of man out of +nothing by Tien, alluded to at page 50, are not found in other writers; if +therefore our author is correct, these may possibly have been relics of early +Christian teaching.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_70_70" id="Footnote_70_70"></a><a href="#FNanchor_70_70"><span class="label"> +[70]</span></a> This expression is introduced by the English translator.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_71_71" id="Footnote_71_71"></a><a href="#FNanchor_71_71"><span class="label"> +[71]</span></a> Severely.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_72_72" id="Footnote_72_72"></a><a href="#FNanchor_72_72"><span class="label"> +[72]</span></a> This is the well-known lignum aloes of commerce. In some remarks +by the late H. T. Colebrooke, Esq., on a paper of the late Dr. Roxburgh's +recently read at the Linnean Society, occurs the following observation: "The +Portuguese <i>pao de aguila</i> is an undoubted corruption, either of the +Arabic aghaluji, or of the Latin agallochum; and it is by a ludicrous mistake +that from this corruption has grown the name of lignum aquilæ, whence the genus +of the plant now receives its botanic appellation, <i>aquilaria agallocha.</i>" +Roxb.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_73_73" id="Footnote_73_73"></a><a href="#FNanchor_73_73"><span class="label"> +[73]</span></a> It is thus spelt also in Steven's <i>Spanish Dictionary</i>. <i> +Query</i>, cayolizan, a Mexican shrub, giving a perfume like incense.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_74_74" id="Footnote_74_74"></a><a href="#FNanchor_74_74"><span class="label"> +[74]</span></a> Rough.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_75_75" id="Footnote_75_75"></a><a href="#FNanchor_75_75"><span class="label"> +[75]</span></a> A mill. Wickliffe's translation of the Bible: Matthew xxiv, has: +Two wymmen schulen be gryndynge in oo querne; oon schal be taken and the tother +left.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_76_76" id="Footnote_76_76"></a><a href="#FNanchor_76_76"><span class="label"> +[76]</span></a> This sketch of the early annals of China is not altogether +correct; but agrees in the main with that given by <i>Du Halde</i>. The names +of the sovereigns are strangely misspelt; but the order of succession, and the +years of their respective reigns, render it not difficult to identify them. <i> +Vitey</i> does not seem to be the commonly reputed founder of the Chinese +monarchy <i>Fo-hi</i>, but either his great successor <i>Hoang-tie</i>, who +had 25 sons, or the celebrated Emperor <i>Yao</i>, whose reign lasted 100 +years, and commenced <span class="smcap">b.c.</span> 2357. <i>Tzintzon</i> is +evidently the <i>Chi-Hoang-ty</i> of Du Halde, who built the great wall, and +reigned <span class="smcap">b.c.</span> 237. <i>Aguisi</i>, his son, is named +by Du Halde <i>Cul-chi.</i> The <i>Anchosan</i> of our author is clearly the +first emperor of the dynasty of Han, named <i>Han-Cao-tsou</i> by Du Halde. +The years of the reigns which follow correspond very exactly with those of the +several emperors of the Han dynasty; but the names are all spelt differently.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_77_77" id="Footnote_77_77"></a><a href="#FNanchor_77_77"><span class="label"> +[77]</span></a> <i>Spanish.</i> Vara-A yard.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_78_78" id="Footnote_78_78"></a><a href="#FNanchor_78_78"><span class="label"> +[78]</span></a> A third.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_79_79" id="Footnote_79_79"></a><a href="#FNanchor_79_79"><span class="label"> +[79]</span></a> Position, from <i>Span.</i> Estado.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_80_80" id="Footnote_80_80"></a><a href="#FNanchor_80_80"><span class="label"> +[80]</span></a> For the names of the following provinces, see note, p. 22.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_81_81" id="Footnote_81_81"></a><a href="#FNanchor_81_81"><span class="label"> +[81]</span></a> More properly "Mace". "The only coin in general use throughout +China is the <i>le</i> or cash. Its intrinsic value may be about one-twelfth +part of an English penny. The nominal names are those called <i>fun</i>, <i> +tsien</i>, and <i>leang</i>, denominated by foreigners <i>candareen</i>, <i> +mace</i>, and <i>tael</i>, bearing respectively to each other a decimal +proportion."—Murray's <i>China</i>, vol. iii, p. 93.</p> +<p>The mace is usually estimated at about 8<i>d.</i>, and the tael 6<i>s.</i> +10<i>d.</i> sterling.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_82_82" id="Footnote_82_82"></a><a href="#FNanchor_82_82"><span class="label"> +[82]</span></a> <i>Span.</i> Quilates-carats.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_83_83" id="Footnote_83_83"></a><a href="#FNanchor_83_83"><span class="label"> +[83]</span></a> More properly "tael".</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_84_84" id="Footnote_84_84"></a><a href="#FNanchor_84_84"><span class="label"> +[84]</span></a> <i>Spanish.</i> Millo or mijo-millet.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_85_85" id="Footnote_85_85"></a><a href="#FNanchor_85_85"><span class="label"> +[85]</span></a> <i>Spanish.</i> Panizo-panic-grass.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_86_86" id="Footnote_86_86"></a><a href="#FNanchor_86_86"><span class="label"> +[86]</span></a> This word is spelt the same in the original. Query blankets, +from <i>Portuguese</i> Chim-Chinese, and mantas-blankets.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_87_87" id="Footnote_87_87"></a><a href="#FNanchor_87_87"><span class="label"> +[87]</span></a> Prevent.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_88_88" id="Footnote_88_88"></a><a href="#FNanchor_88_88"><span class="label"> +[88]</span></a> The military and non-military in China are usually distinguished +by the terms <i>ping</i> and <i>ming</i>. The <i>pon</i> seems to refer to +the <i>ping</i> or regular troops, and the <i>cum</i> to the <i>ming</i> +or people; being only a species of local militia.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_89_89" id="Footnote_89_89"></a><a href="#FNanchor_89_89"><span class="label"> +[89]</span></a> Falchions?</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_90_90" id="Footnote_90_90"></a><a href="#FNanchor_90_90"><span class="label"> +[90]</span></a> Billhooks?</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_91_91" id="Footnote_91_91"></a><a href="#FNanchor_91_91"><span class="label"> +[91]</span></a> Bombs.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_92_92" id="Footnote_92_92"></a><a href="#FNanchor_92_92"><span class="label"> +[92]</span></a> Loo chooans.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_93_93" id="Footnote_93_93"></a><a href="#FNanchor_93_93"><span class="label"> +[93]</span></a> Mis-spelt for Narsinga.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_94_94" id="Footnote_94_94"></a><a href="#FNanchor_94_94"><span class="label"> +[94]</span></a> Mis-spelt for Bengala.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_95_95" id="Footnote_95_95"></a><a href="#FNanchor_95_95"><span class="label"> +[95]</span></a> Query, Java.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_96_96" id="Footnote_96_96"></a><a href="#FNanchor_96_96"><span class="label"> +[96]</span></a> Pekin.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_97_97" id="Footnote_97_97"></a><a href="#FNanchor_97_97"><span class="label"> +[97]</span></a> Tsong-tuh.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_98_98" id="Footnote_98_98"></a><a href="#FNanchor_98_98"><span class="label"> +[98]</span></a> Laoye. See Chap. xiv on the title of Loytia.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_99_99" id="Footnote_99_99"></a><a href="#FNanchor_99_99"><span class="label"> +[99]</span></a> Possibly this word is confounded with Colao or Chung-tang, a +minister of state.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_100_100" id="Footnote_100_100"></a><a href="#FNanchor_100_100"><span class="label"> +[100]</span></a> More properly To't'ung.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_101_101" id="Footnote_101_101"></a><a href="#FNanchor_101_101"><span class="label"> +[101]</span></a> More properly Po-ching-sz, or, as Du Halde has it, +Pou-ching-ssee.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_102_102" id="Footnote_102_102"></a><a href="#FNanchor_102_102"><span class="label"> +[102]</span></a> More properly Too-tuh, adjutant-general.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_103_103" id="Footnote_103_103"></a><a href="#FNanchor_103_103"><span class="label"> +[103]</span></a> More properly Ngan-tcha-see.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_104_104" id="Footnote_104_104"></a><a href="#FNanchor_104_104"><span class="label"> +[104]</span></a> More properly Hai-tao. Respecting these offices see Du Halde, +vol. ii, fol. 32, 33.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_105_105" id="Footnote_105_105"></a><a href="#FNanchor_105_105"><span class="label"> +[105]</span></a> Standard-bearer.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_106_106" id="Footnote_106_106"></a><a href="#FNanchor_106_106"><span class="label"> +[106]</span></a> More properly Paou-yin.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_107_107" id="Footnote_107_107"></a><a href="#FNanchor_107_107"><span class="label"> +[107]</span></a> This and the preceding title seem to be the same as those +similarly spelt on page 103.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_108_108" id="Footnote_108_108"></a><a href="#FNanchor_108_108"><span class="label"> +[108]</span></a> Perhaps the Koo-ta-sze, or treasurer.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_109_109" id="Footnote_109_109"></a><a href="#FNanchor_109_109"><span class="label"> +[109]</span></a> Perhaps the Che-tsze, or secretary.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_110_110" id="Footnote_110_110"></a><a href="#FNanchor_110_110"><span class="label"> +[110]</span></a> Taou, tae, the intendant of circuits.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_111_111" id="Footnote_111_111"></a><a href="#FNanchor_111_111"><span class="label"> +[111]</span></a> More properly Kwan-paou, commissioner of customs. See +Morrison's <i>View of China</i>, p. 94.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_112_112" id="Footnote_112_112"></a><a href="#FNanchor_112_112"><span class="label"> +[112]</span></a> Perhaps Te-paou, a police runner.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_113_113" id="Footnote_113_113"></a><a href="#FNanchor_113_113"><span class="label"> +[113]</span></a> More properly Yuen-chae, a police constable.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_114_114" id="Footnote_114_114"></a><a href="#FNanchor_114_114"><span class="label"> +[114]</span></a> Perhaps Ching-tang, assistant officer in a prise.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_115_115" id="Footnote_115_115"></a><a href="#FNanchor_115_115"><span class="label"> +[115]</span></a> Shin is the Chinese for the verb "to judge", and with the word +officer added to it will be "a judging officer". Thus also leu-law, prefixed to +che-to rule, or govern, may be the origin of the term Leuchi. This construction +is, however, entirely conjectural.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_116_116" id="Footnote_116_116"></a><a href="#FNanchor_116_116"><span class="label"> +[116]</span></a> See note on page 113.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_117_117" id="Footnote_117_117"></a><a href="#FNanchor_117_117"><span class="label"> +[117]</span></a> This character is so vague as to be scarcely recognizable. The +proper Chinese word for heaven is tien. The word here given may perhaps mean +tsang, <i>the azure sky</i>, which is sometimes used metaphorically for +heaven. At the same time the modern Chinese character for Keen, also pronounced +Kan <img src="images/fch1.jpg" width="25" height="26" alt="Keen" />, which is likewise a very old word for heaven, appears +somewhat to approximate in form to the character given in the text.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_118_118" id="Footnote_118_118"></a><a href="#FNanchor_118_118"><span class="label"> +[118]</span></a> Evidently hwang te, the character here given corresponding with +the modern Chinese character Hwang.<img src="images/fch2.jpg" width="25" height="29" alt="Hwang" /></p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_119_119" id="Footnote_119_119"></a><a href="#FNanchor_119_119"><span class="label"> +[119]</span></a> This character would seem to be intended for ching,—a walled +city, the correct form of the character being +<img src="images/fch3.jpg" width="25" height="23" alt="Ching" />.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_120_120" id="Footnote_120_120"></a><a href="#FNanchor_120_120"><span class="label"> +[120]</span></a> Fucheou, the capital of Fokien.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_121_121" id="Footnote_121_121"></a><a href="#FNanchor_121_121"><span class="label"> +[121]</span></a> <i>Padrinos</i>, <i>Span</i>.—Literally sponsors.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_122_122" id="Footnote_122_122"></a><a href="#FNanchor_122_122"><span class="label"> +[122]</span></a> A German.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_123_123" id="Footnote_123_123"></a><a href="#FNanchor_123_123"><span class="label"> +[123]</span></a> A misprint for Pegu.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_124_124" id="Footnote_124_124"></a><a href="#FNanchor_124_124"><span class="label"> +[124]</span></a> Mis-translated from the Spanish "Tudesco", a German. The reader +will readily recognize the name of Johann Gutemberg or Ganzfleisch, of Mentz, +who disputes with Laurens Koster, of Haarlem, the honour of having invented and +first practised the art of printing with moveable types.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_125_125" id="Footnote_125_125"></a><a href="#FNanchor_125_125"><span class="label"> +[125]</span></a> Conrad Sweynheim, who, in partnership with Arnold Pannartz, +published in 1465, at the Monastery of Subiaco, near Rome, the <i>Lactantii +Opera</i>, 4to., the first work printed in Italy. The <i>De Civitate Dei</i> +of St. Augustine, was printed by the same printers at Subiaco two years later. +It is now known that the first book printed in Europe with metal types, was the <i> +Mazarine Bible</i>, printed by Gutemberg and Fust, at Mentz, in 1455.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_126_126" id="Footnote_126_126"></a><a href="#FNanchor_126_126"><span class="label"> +[126]</span></a> Germany.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_127_127" id="Footnote_127_127"></a><a href="#FNanchor_127_127"><span class="label"> +[127]</span></a> Printing without moveable types does not go back, even in +China, beyond the beginning of the tenth century of our era. The first four +books of Confucius were printed, according to Klaproth, in the province of +Sze-chuen, between 890 and 925, and the description of the technical +manipulation of the Chinese printing press might have been read in western +countries even as early as 1310, in Raschid Eddin's Persian history of the +rulers of Khatai. According to the most recent results of the important +researches of Stanislas Julien, however, an ironsmith in China itself, between +the years 1041 and 1048, <span class="smcap">a.d.</span>, or almost 400 years +before Gutemberg, would seem to have used moveable types made of burnt clay. +This is the invention of Pi-sching, but it was not brought into application. See +Humboldt's <i>Kosmos</i>, translated by Otté, fol. 623. Moveable types are now +no longer used, for as Sir John Davis observes, vol. ii, p. 222, "the present +mode of Chinese printing with wooden stereotype blocks is peculiarly suited to +the Chinese character, and for all purposes of cheapness and expedition is +perfect". A complete set of the materials used by the Chinese in the process of +printing, may be seen in the Museum of the Royal Asiatic Society. In the note on +page 121 of Hakluyt's <i>Divers Voyages</i>, edited for the Hakluyt Society by +J. Winter Jones, Esq., the following description is given of a book printed in +1348: "The earliest work of which we have been able to obtain an account, from +one having had the opportunity of personally inspecting it, bears date the +eighth year of the last period of the reign of Shun Te, or <span class="smcap">a.d.</span> 1348. Mr. +Prevost, our informant, who is at present engaged in cataloguing the splendid +collection of Chinese books in the British Museum, has favoured us with the +following description of the book. The title is 'Chin Tsaou Tsëen Wan, or the +Thousand Character Classic'. It is one of the most popular works in China, and +consists of exactly one thousand different characters, not one being repeated. +It is composed in octosyllabic verses, which rhyme in couplets; each verse +presenting to the student some useful Chinese notion, either in morals or in +general knowledge. The object of this work is to teach the written character, +both in its semi-cursive and in its stenographic form, termed Tsaou, or +grass-writing: the text is, therefore, printed in parallel columns, alternately +in the Chin, or correct, and the Tsaou, or cursive character. The author lived +in the first half of the sixth century. This work, when seen by Mr. Prevost, was +in the possession of Colonel Tynte." The Editor has also in his own possession a +Chinese bank note, printed, or rather stamped, in the fourteenth century.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_128_128" id="Footnote_128_128"></a><a href="#FNanchor_128_128"><span class="label"> +[128]</span></a> Hou-quang.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_129_129" id="Footnote_129_129"></a><a href="#FNanchor_129_129"><span class="label"> +[129]</span></a> A sort of confection made of almonds, sugar, etc.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_130_130" id="Footnote_130_130"></a><a href="#FNanchor_130_130"><span class="label"> +[130]</span></a> Bever, probably from bevere, <i>Ital.</i>, to drink, a small +collation between dinner and supper.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_131_131" id="Footnote_131_131"></a><a href="#FNanchor_131_131"><span class="label"> +[131]</span></a> <i>Vname</i>, is probably <i>Yew ma</i>,—pitch, or the +resin of the pine. In Morrison's <i>Dictionary</i>, "tar" is translated <i>Pa +ma yew</i>: but the Editor finds nothing analogous to <i>Ja pez</i>, which is +probably now obsolete.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_132_132" id="Footnote_132_132"></a><a href="#FNanchor_132_132"><span class="label"> +[132]</span></a> The Goletta of Tunis was taken from the Spaniards by Sinan +Pacha, admiral of Selim II, on the 23rd of August 1574.</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_133_133" id="Footnote_133_133"></a><a href="#FNanchor_133_133"><span class="label"> +[133]</span></a> Mistranslated for "the extensive knowledge which I had of +navigation."</p> +</div> +<div class="footnote"> +<p><a name="Footnote_134_134" id="Footnote_134_134"></a><a href="#FNanchor_134_134"><span class="label"> +[134]</span></a> Misspelt for Corunna.</p> +<p> </p> +</div> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The History of the Great and Mighty +Kingdom of China and the Situation , by Juan Gonzalez de Mendoza + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK GREAT AND MIGHTY KINGDOM OF CHINA *** + +***** This file should be named 39009-h.htm or 39009-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + https://www.gutenberg.org/3/9/0/0/39009/ + +Produced by Chris Curnow, Joseph Cooper, Melissa McDaniel +and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +https://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +https://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +https://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at https://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit https://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including including checks, online payments and credit card +donations. To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + https://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/39009-h/images/ch1.jpg b/39009-h/images/ch1.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..6d6b3ef --- /dev/null +++ b/39009-h/images/ch1.jpg diff --git a/39009-h/images/ch2.jpg b/39009-h/images/ch2.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..281756a --- /dev/null +++ b/39009-h/images/ch2.jpg diff --git a/39009-h/images/ch3.jpg b/39009-h/images/ch3.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..4bd87cc --- /dev/null +++ b/39009-h/images/ch3.jpg diff --git a/39009-h/images/fch1.jpg b/39009-h/images/fch1.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..c40acba --- /dev/null +++ b/39009-h/images/fch1.jpg diff --git a/39009-h/images/fch2.jpg b/39009-h/images/fch2.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..b3fb6dc --- /dev/null +++ b/39009-h/images/fch2.jpg diff --git a/39009-h/images/fch3.jpg b/39009-h/images/fch3.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..abeb947 --- /dev/null +++ b/39009-h/images/fch3.jpg diff --git a/39009-h/images/i089.jpg b/39009-h/images/i089.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..30ee1ca --- /dev/null +++ b/39009-h/images/i089.jpg diff --git a/39009-h/images/i095.jpg b/39009-h/images/i095.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..df35c2e --- /dev/null +++ b/39009-h/images/i095.jpg |
